Top 10k strings from WARAJEVO.DOC in <root> / bin / pc / Emulators / warsp251.zip /
Back to the directory listing
19 -------------------
18 ----------------------------
16 ---------------
16
12 -----------------------------------
12
10 ------------------------
10 -----------------
10 -------------
10
9 =================
9 ===============
9 -----------------------
9 .
9
8 - All standard ASCII signs will be converted;
8 -------------------------
8 ------------------
8 ----------------
7 =======================
7 ================
7 -------------------------------------
7 ---------------------------------
7 -----------------------------
7 ----------------------
6 converted blocks will be appended to the end of the current Warajevo tape
6 Select the source ASCII file and the position of the destination file
6 Like option 'Z80 -> SP'.
6 Like option 'SP -> Z80'.
6 --------------------------
5 in the tape file using the method described earlier. The rules of conversions
5 in the 'Setup' menu (shortcut for this dialog is F4 in the environment).
5 [$]()|SCREEN$}]
5 --------------------------------
5 - Signs above #127 will be ignored;
5 - All standard ASCII signs (#32-#127) will be converted;
5 This option may be set from the environment using the 'Sound' dialog
5 OPTION 'UNSELECT'
5 ======================
5 -------------------------------
5 --------------
5 Option 'Unselect'
5
5
4 the dialog select the name of the destination tape.
4 in the 'Setup' menu.
4 environment.
4 Byte Length Description
4 - All standard ASCII signs will be converted.
4 OPTION 'SELECT'
4 ====================================
4 =================================
4 ========================
4 ==================
4 ==============
4 =========
4 ---------------------------
4 --------------------
4 Option 'Select'
4 EXX
4 RRA
3 the method described earlier. The rules of conversions are:
3 -----------------------------------
3 -------------------------------- ----------
3 ----------------------
3 - Signs above #127 will be ignored.
3 - Line numbers will be ignored;
3 - 4 bytes, a pointer to the previous block, which is 0 for first block;
3 - 1 byte, a flag byte;
3 '?' command.
3 OPTION 'VIEW'
3 OPTION 'RENAME'
3 Before using this option, you must be in the directory which contains
3 ===========================================
3 ========================================
3 ===========================
3 --------------------------------
3 ------------------------------
3 bit D3: joystick moving to right
3 Option 'View'
3 Option 'Rename'
3 XOR L
3 RET NC
3 LD C,A
3 LD A,H
3 DEFB #CD,#21 ; INT 21H
3 RET
3 with options /S0-7)
3
3
2 using the method described earlier. The rules of conversions are:
2 the tape file using the method described earlier. The rules of conversion
2 the 'Setup' menu.
2 method described earlier.
2 http://www.void.demon.nl/warajevo/index.html
2 events happen:
2 directory.
2 dialog in the 'Setup' menu.
2 dialog in the 'Setup' menu (shortcut key F5).
2 chapter 2.1.
2 [$]()|LINE m|SCREEN$}]
2 Warajevo database.
2 SP <- SP - 2
2 Port [BC] <- (HL)
2 Parameters are:
2 PROGNAME.TBL, SPECIALS.TBL, PROGTYPE.TBL, PRODUCER.TBL, AUTHORS.TBL,
2 PLAY x$[,y$[,z$,[r$[,s$[,t$,[u$,[w$]]]]]]]]
2 Output: Ignored!
2 Input: bit D0: joystick moving to up (0=active)
2 Input: Returns last value sent to this port.
2 HL <- HL - 1
2 B <- B - 1
2 8. REMARKED PROBLEMS, AND HINTS FOR PROBLEMS SOLVING
2 7. TECHNICAL INFORMATIONS
2 6. PROGRAM 'ZXCOMP'
2 5. EXPANDING THE EMULATOR FROM THE USER
2 3. THE ENVIRONMENT OF THE WARAJEVO EMULATOR
2 2. BASIC INTRODUCTIONS
2 1. PREFACE
2 ----------------------------------
2 -------------------------------- ---------
2 -------------------------------- --------
2 ----------------------------
2 -----------------------
2 ------------------
2 -----------
2 --------- ------------
2 - The ASCII file must not contain line numbers;
2 - SPECTRUM 2.00, by Pedro M. R. Salas from Spain;
2 - Nuclear ZX, by Radovan Garabik from Slovakia;
2 - After every 64 signs a new line will be inserted;
2 - 4 bytes, pointer to the next block, or to the EOF marker for last block;
2 - 2 bytes, decompressed (logical) block size;
2 (SP) <- PC
2 This is 'Const max impuls'
2 contains the emulator itself, or in the directory determined using the DOS
2 border);
2 Vertical scrollbar
2 After this conversion, the BASIC loader on the tape will be such that all
2 40 CLOSE #4
2 [{;|,|'}{|y|y$|#p|AT p,q|BRIGHT p|FLASH p|INK p|INVERSE p|PAPER p|TAB p|
2 OVER p}...]
2 else begin
2 For more details, see the description of the switch /QX.
2 You will be asked for the name of a binary file, then for the name of
2 You must place the highlight in the list box on the header of the
2 This parameter may be set from the environment using the 'Speed'
2 This option may be set from the environment using the 'ROM' dialog
2 This option may be set from the environment using the 'Parameters'
2 The rules of conversions are:
2 The option 'Select' in the submenu 'Tapes' of the 'TapeFiles' menu in
2 The Timex version of the emulator was started, and the file
2 Select the source ASCII file and position of the destination file in
2 Select the header of the screen image file which will be converted to
2 Select the header of the assembler program which will be converted to
2 OPTION 'PRINTER'
2 OPTION 'DELETE'
2 ==================================================
2 =========================
2 ==========
2 ---------------------------------------
2 --------------------------------------
2 ------------------------------------
2 AbortTransfer
2 details, see description of the network emulation.
2 command from the timer.
2 bit D7: RS232 input bit (not implemented, always one)
2 bit D6: DTR bit (i.e. printer is ready)
2 bit D5: KEYPAD response bit
2 bit D4: status of joystick fire button (0=active)
2 bit D2: joystick moving to left
2 bit D1: joystick moving to down
2 Option 'Delete'
2 XOR C
2 RET
2 OUT (#FE),A
2 LD B,#B0 <<<
2 LD A,C
2 IN A,(#FE)
2 DI
2 AND #20
2 DB 'STATUS.DAT',0
2 :
2 colon where previous command finish
2 : : : :
2
2
1 |d|_}...].
1 |<byte1>|<word1> <byte2>|<word2> BINARY OR
1 |4200 1700 Performs a binary OR between 4200 and 1700 and
1 {x>y|x$>y$} x OR y
1 {x>=y|x$>=y$} POINT (m,n)
1 {x=y|x$=y$} NOT x
1 {x<y|x$<y$} PEEK m
1 {x<>y|x$<>y$} RND
1 {x<=y|x$<=y$} PI
1 {A|B|C} means 'A or B or C'
1 zeros to the appropriate length.
1 zero. The list box shows the position of the new created block. The selected
1 yyyy greater of equal 10 (used principle is, in fact, Huffman statistical
1 your taste and hearing. Determine by yourself whether the sound in some
1 your sound card) to turn off everything except line input on one channel
1 your computer can handle it), use the option /%300 (if your computer does not
1 your computer against the various dangers, we have included the command line
1 you). Most of the users will not use this option. We must say that some
1 you will see the front panel. The front panel contains these:
1 you will get the source code of the emulator. To other donators, we cannot
1 you will found listing of the original loading ROM routine, with marked places
1 you will always get help which is related to your current job. If there are
1 you want to run a 'pure' emulator without a snapshot file). A new feature
1 you want to correct the logical sector structure. Using this option you can
1 you want to convert. The converted database will be appended to the active
1 you want for example to change only active video page.
1 you omit the extension for the file <exe_file>, 'EXE' is assumed. If you omit
1 you may replace instruction CALL 1218 with DB #ED,#FC and one NOP insctuction
1 you may make some use of them. Using the option /@<time>, the emulator
1 you may edit this file to change something in it (not recommended if you are
1 you have two possibilities:
1 you have some Timex software which uses these features. If you don't have
1 you have received all the blocks press ESC on the PC. In the case of a
1 you have an extremely slow computer, search for Warajevo 1.5.
1 you first start the environment (and only when you start environment directly
1 you first set 'Category' then 'Full name', the database will be sorted first
1 you entered the monitor.
1 you don't make any changes while you are in the environment, after you go
1 you convert ZX48.ROM into SPECEMU.DCK using this option, you will get a DCK
1 you can use option /V<code> :
1 you can use keys 'Shift' or 'Ctrl', and for SYMBOL SHIFT you can use 'Alt'.
1 you can transfer BASIC program from '48 Basic' to '128 Basic'. This is
1 yellow color, dark yellow is replaced with brown, but on VGA card all colors
1 x^y IN m
1 x/y FN
1 x-y COS x
1 x, y, z ... represent numerical expressions
1 x+y CODE x$
1 x*y EXP x
1 x$, y$ ... represent alphanumeric expressions
1 x$+y$ INKEY$[#m]
1 x$([[m][ TO [n]]]) STR$ x
1 x AND y USR {x|x$}
1 wrote) data in it. In such case, IN from the net returns 1 (busy). To prevent
1 written after /C will be ignored.
1 works slower, and needs more computer resources). To get it working in
1 works like SHIFT for destructive operations (in the calculator it generates a
1 working, bad sound quality, worse keyboard reading etc. may appear. A problems
1 working with PC networks, chapter 7.13. describes how to perform this task.
1 working of such time dependent routines like loading from the real tape and
1 working normally.
1 work during AY is emulated, because AY is emulated using PC timer chip, and
1 work at the same speed as on a real Spectrum, if the speed of your computer
1 work as already described. In our calculator mode they generate missing
1 work after loading) if the initial attribute is not black on white (56), so
1 word processors like 'The Writer'). This driver is delivered also as an
1 without parameters assuming the presence of the Spectrum ROM (with the Timex
1 without any limitations, but you must not overrun the stack size limit. The
1 without any conversion, which was not true in earlier releases. Also, snapshot
1 with two paging banks in the upper 32K of RAM, where instructions OUT 31,0 and
1 with the sound card.
1 with the same name as the name of the tape file, but the extensions will be
1 with the reporting of some errors. This chapter describes these events.
1 with the program, etc. This may seem confusing. To help users, we made a
1 with the network emulation. On real Spectrum, sending and reading of each
1 with the name 'run' will be started, and in the case of DCK files, the DCK
1 with the current filenames (the main window in the environment) the current
1 with the algorithm for loading (we thought that reliability of loading is
1 with some features which are not initially included in it. For this, some
1 with same name (in different directories or on different discs). This is
1 with native Warajevo tapes as with Lunter tapes. In short, the tape emulation
1 with loading routines, do not change these constants. However, if you have
1 with flag byte 255. Otherwise, the memory will be saved as 'Bytes' file (with
1 with emulated devices.
1 with content 0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1. 32 Kb EXROM RAM disc cartridge mapped at
1 with an error message. So, you can (if you want) try to load this program in
1 with an OPL2 chip, which needs a very time-consuming protocol to communicate
1 with a space. When you are in the monitor, the keys are mapped PC style, not
1 with Z80 machine code, using so-called 'Escape' sequences (see chapter 5.2.).
1 with Lunter's Z80 emulator (even with the non-registered version), or it can
1 with "wrapping" (see chapter 7.10.) may appear too. Sometimes program may
1 wish single stepping through a subroutine, or if you want to execute a
1 wire. If two computers do transmission at the same time, the state +5V has
1 window. If you have an EGA or VGA graphic card, you will see flashing lines
1 window to the bottom part of the screen (TOGGLE). These are mapped to the
1 will start the earlier compiled program ATICATAC, with the Kempston joystick
1 will start MMINER.EXE in the normal Hercules mode. Also, if you want to run
1 will see on screen a list box for listing the database records (if the
1 will see a new dialog on the screen. The top list box lists the blocks of the
1 will search for a record with the short name 'ATICATAC', run the emulator,
1 will run the active snapshot file (if it is not changed, the emulator will
1 will produce one hires (512x192) stripe in medres (256x192) surrounding on
1 will produce blue_on_yellow stripe across black_on_white screen, in hires
1 will not work with Lunter TAP files, only with native Warajevo TAP files. Use
1 will not work if the emulator is started from the MS Windows environment.
1 will not make the database larger. If you want to edit a previously used
1 will not have the option for switching on multicolor mode, and if the
1 will not be sent, nor received), so every package which is not received in a
1 will move such records to the END of the database), then use this option to
1 will hear a unwanted noise (e.g. "tape recorder" will "play")!
1 will have unusual names, but very often this will work correctly. For example,
1 will go out of working loop, e.g. it will reset, and next time, responds with
1 will get information about appearance of the "signal" on the net not earlier
1 will disable the border if this disturbs you, or if you think that border
1 will create a backup (BAK) file and a new tape (TAP) file. You must have
1 will be usable even on a 50 MHz machine!
1 will be solved in due course. If this is your first contact with this
1 will be same as name of the source tape with a prefix 'L', for example
1 will be related to this file. This option sets the switch /E described in
1 will be related to it. This option calls the file selecting dialog to select
1 will be prompted for the name of the destination (Z80) snapshot file.
1 will be loaded into the HOME bank, so that the DCK file can replace the
1 will be interrupted when you press the ESC key. After the transfer is
1 will be ignored.
1 will be extracted from the source file. The ZXT format is much more complex
1 will be erased.
1 will be encoded as:
1 will be displayed.
1 will be deleted. This is similar to the ERASE command in BASIC.
1 will be converted to an ASCII file and name the output file (default is
1 will be converted to a TEMP.TAP file. Be aware of the fact that the
1 will be assumed. Our emulator will accept MDR files created using Lunter's
1 will be assumed in accordance with the option /D. The directory name must not
1 will be appended to the end of the active TAP file. When loading errors
1 will be acknowledged only after calling the environment. There are 6 subtypes
1 will be 80% of full Spectrum speed. Next,
1 will be (logically) moved to the end of the database, regardless of the
1 will appear on screen, and it will not be corrected even after returning into
1 will also be shown. Double clicking this window will start the emulator.
1 while we waited for a new battle tasks, Samir developed the compression
1 while data bytes will be:
1 which, unlike all other formats, also stores the ROM image.
1 which you have in the form of a binary cartridge dump on the disk (how you
1 which work only with the new version. Some programs (for example, Beta Basic
1 which wasn't present in earlier versions you can still use it.
1 which was a considerable improvment itself over release 1.5.), perfect
1 which want to communicate mutually using the network (for example, if G: is a
1 which use multicolor effects will never work correctly, so on faster
1 which the option /A sets. The default value is 7. If you use option /Y
1 which the Spectrum program needs for correct execution. This field may
1 which may be activated using Alt+S). It is implemented to make running of
1 which may appears with the corresponding program. Activating the checkbox
1 which look like the entered mask will be marked (e.g. logically moved to the
1 which is usually topic of our interest. So, this command eliminates need for
1 which is used in the environment (if you want to write own communication
1 which is stored in the file GAMES.DAT. The user must confirm the selection
1 which is specific to the Warajevo emulator will be ignored. Select the output
1 which is not directly implementable into the emulator (for example, if you
1 which is extremely fast, but this method slows down RAM paging. However, we
1 which is a method which belongs to the session layer of the transfer protocol
1 which file will be started (using the previously described algorithm).
1 which equipment you have, type of program to transfer, what you want to do
1 which emulate the various memory expansions of the Timex Sinclair 2068. The
1 which emulate microdrive cartridges. An MDR file is a sequential file with
1 which do not use the same memory chunks (one LROS and one AROS for example,
1 which device will be used for tape emulation (TAP files, LPT port or Sound
1 which corresponds to the moment when the emulator generates the picture).
1 which correspond to various independent memory expansions out of standard
1 which control routines are based just on this anomaly! As we implement user
1 which contains 8-byte header, in the following format:
1 which are strongly dependent of precise video timing (for example, multicolor
1 which are not supported in the destination database, will be ignored.
1 which are necessary if you want to use the emulator on MS Windows or other
1 which are described below don't work if the current tape is in Lunter TAP
1 which allows more detailed setting of this field.
1 which Warajevo emulator is usable, but as we know only one program which uses
1 whether your machine is fast enough for normal execution of the emulator,
1 whether the file with the name DEFAULT.CFG exists. If it exists, all the
1 whether is it a tape, snapshot, cartridge file, or something else, on which
1 whether a collision happens, which would mean that some other station tries
1 where the parameters have the following meaning:
1 where number after second Z subcommand (5 in this example) determines tone
1 where mentioned constants are located in this routine. If you using the
1 when you start the emulator. It is not necessary to write the extension, but
1 when we solve problem of slow memory paging (see chapter 7.2.).
1 when the processor is in 'V86' mode. Most of above mentioned drivers switch
1 when reading is performed. Warajevo uses an intelligent algorithm which
1 when only short messages are transferred, but in every case the transfer will
1 when formating, not the physical name of the MDR file).
1 when counter of scan lines (see previous chapter) reaches a value set using /Q
1 welcomed (e.g. during the night). This is the reason for the existence of
1 we will give description of possible (or remarked) problems, with codes as the
1 we want to enable possibility of status saving and loading from games which
1 we really have not any method to determine state of PC net on data-link
1 we continued the development (in the rooms where we slept the water was
1 way, these instructions are the most frequently used undocumented (synthetic)
1 way to solve this problem, but the solution requires total reorganization of
1 way that PUSH AF instruction copies bits 3 and 5 of the A register into the F
1 was produced.
1 was not found in the current directory.
1 was first developed to solve these problems. During development, an idea
1 was developed without even a hard disc, because such a 'stable' voltage
1 was created because many users said that using the emulator with command
1 wanted device to be added, the handler must perform only a IRET. If the
1 wanted blocks, you must also manually change the BASIC loaders (except in the
1 want to register SCR files because Windows screen savers have same extension
1 want to organize the database to put arcade adventures at the BEGINNING of
1 want to move files to tape, or similar. The display will be like that in
1 want to add into a game the possibility of saving the High Score table
1 visible again.
1 video system than in release 2.0. (the only one better than this is the one
1 video memory, it is possible that this change will not be visible until the
1 vice versa it will create this file in which all parameters setting will be
1 very stable so it doesn't work from time to time.
1 very simple interface (which is made of some resistors and capacitors)
1 very good, especially X128 by James McKay, and there are a number of
1 very complex formats like TZX, or with huge formats like VOC).
1 versions probably will not be able to read this format, but fortunately, new
1 versions of the Spectrum 128K, and later it was bought as an optional. The
1 versions can automatically upgrade from previous versions.
1 version, this option does not exist. The main difference is the usage of the
1 version to the 128K version without resetting. Other combinations of mode
1 version of the emulator, option /A works either with the Timex Sinclair ROM,
1 version of the emulator has no meaning, but on the 128K version of the
1 version of the DAT file. We can read data up to version 1.32. For very big
1 various versions of WINDOWS etc. The safest method is running on a totally
1 variants, options from this menu work also with a tape recorder connected to
1 variable ERR_LN (23734) will be reset, and the SP register will be restored
1 values) to the output file. Commands which you give will be sent to the output
1 values sent to port 231 (or from port 231) and updates it when it is right time
1 values in the BASIC loader (i.e. the loader which is started using /A),
1 value. For arguments above 127 it will be displayed also as a negative number
1 value to the speaker using direct writing to Sound Blaster DSP processor.
1 value is AUTO). The first three algorithms are related to loading and saving
1 value in address #FFFF. For an explanation about Escape sequences see chapter
1 valid. For details, see the description of the command parameter /J in
1 v, v1, v2 ... represent numerical variable names
1 v SGN x
1 usually in some of the parameters.
1 usually huge (often some megabytes).
1 usual way).
1 using very unusual serial protocol. When we first time connect KEYPAD on the
1 using the usual way.
1 using the switch /&T in the configuration file.
1 using the option 'Catalog'. This option will display only the type of the
1 using the mouse, and the cursor joystick will be emulated using the cursor
1 using the mouse) without left joystick emulation, use the switch /JN (N=none)
1 using the emulator by Pedro M. R. Salas. In such cases, the solution is to
1 using the 'MS Windows' dailog in the 'Setup' menu.
1 using emulated tapes, and last two are related to loading and saving using a
1 using command:
1 using an embedded ASCII screen editor, which contains some additional remarks
1 using a Sound Blaster sound card (option /SB must be used in this case,
1 using SPEC128, except if you have some special reason for do it (for example,
1 using ROM subroutines, compiling with /TAPE option tries to automatically
1 using LPT1, although this device is not initially supported. You can try this
1 using F1 when you are in the monitor.
1 using ALT+F4 (like MS Windows) or ALT+X (like Turbo Pascal).
1 using A register on the address which is determined using HL register. This
1 uses to access data in the buffer is virtually 32-bit pointer. The pointer is
1 user-defined peripheral devices (see chapter 5.), it means that there is a bug
1 used, and for right joystick reading port 758 is used (of course, with R14 as
1 used with the option /O. However, in most situations, 'CONT' mode is the
1 used which achieves nearly equal tone color as on real AY chip. Majority of
1 used too. If you type /TSHOOT /O the emulator will recognize only the tape
1 used in the environment of the Warajevo emulator. For more detailed
1 used in the Warajevo emulator. This algorithm, when decompressing, copies
1 used in the Warajevo emulator, the Z80 emulator by Gerton Lunter, the X128
1 used expanded memory, etc.). You must give the name of the output file. The
1 use. The database which is built-in to the environment automates use of the
1 use the option 'Any Z80 -> 128K without Interface 1' which is described in
1 use settings like SET WARAJEVO=G C:\TEMPDIR.
1 use screen editor)! We use two parallel memory buffers, with identical RAM
1 use mutually complementary values due to inversion which performs the ZX
1 use full screen mode, not windowed mode.
1 use expanded form of /TAPE option in format /TAPE:<filename>. For example,
1 use Hercules, this problem will be solved using option /VX (see chapter 2.1.).
1 use Escape sequences, and you try to go back to normal emulation mode when
1 use COM1 serial port at 2400 Baud, put the following parameters into the
1 usage of the analogue joystick in the very short loop may cause similar
1 usage of IN and OUT instructions (for example, using OUT 239,0 after a few
1 usable). However, there is one hardware device (TurboDrive disc interface)
1 us to the main menu.
1 updating using Shift+F6, and enabling it again after loading is finished.
1 updating Windows registry files is created. Then, the program will ask you
1 unusual effects (which work on a real Spectrum) will work too. You can try
1 until BC = 0
1 unreliable. More information about the 'B G Services' interface and loading
1 unreliable (although it works quite well with the transfer of short
1 unique. So, we append to this field an identification code, which makes this
1 unfortunately promise anything special, except that we will include, in all
1 unfortunately cannot recognize everything. Some loaders don't work correctly
1 understand algorithm, experiment with some compressed ASCII text. Complex?
1 uncompressed. There are no compressed blocks on the original Spectrum. Their
1 ugly (try these effects on Multimachine emulator, it seems that MultiMachine
1 type. These buttons determine the necessary control codes, and maximal usable
1 type of programs have a short header at the beginning which contains the
1 turning on the 'Rainbow' border!
1 turned into PC executables, which uses various tricks described above, and
1 trying to load Lunter's snapshot files with SamRam or Multiface 128
1 try to use the microdrive even though you selected a cartridge file, it means
1 treated as bit 0, and longer pulses will be treated as bit 1. On other words,
1 transparent to Z80 programs (e.g. it is written in PC machine code and does
1 transparent for running Spectrum program (e.g. break point changes content of
1 transmitting, waits a random time, and after this tries to claim the net all
1 transfer will start. The PC will show a horizontal scroll bar of the
1 transfer samples of a tone record from a real tape to a TAP file (sample
1 transfer medium (LAN, modem) etc. Some people may think that this is
1 totally unimportant in BASIC programs.
1 too, which may be very useful. So, if all described features will not help to
1 too, using timer interrupt.
1 too, so now you can see on your PC a long time forgotten 'Running screen'.
1 too frequent access to the shared file, after IN from the net detects signal
1 too complicated for you, or if it is not interesting for you):
1 toggle the markers.
1 together with the name of the file allocated in the sector (or 'Unallocated'
1 today music synthesizers tone color (e.g. simulated instrument) may be changed
1 to zero, corresponding chunk will belong to HOME bank, else the chunk will
1 to use this program for communications, because the Spectrum 128 has enough
1 to use RAM disc after A128 command.
1 to the signal.
1 to the number of different network cards, different transfer media and
1 to the monitor. The field 'BP' displays its address and memory page (S, I or
1 to the first record with a structure like the entered structure. For example,
1 to the emulator, and started (in the case of a TAP file using the parameter
1 to the beginning of the name, so this file will become invisible to the
1 to the appropriate length. The source file need not be a real LROS (with a
1 to the Spectrum using a list box. On the Spectrum, you can select option 'L'
1 to the Spectrum 128 and configure RS232. See also chapter 3.12. about the
1 to switch on hires border emulation (using the F6 key). If this will not help,
1 to some indistinct detail or some bad readable text from time to time. If you
1 to save them to the tape recorder.
1 to release. Currently, this converts to the format of release 1.24. The older
1 to read this chapter):
1 to our treatment of .SLT files. It is important that .SLT files after
1 to load snapshot files which keep content of the ROMs, like snapshots created
1 to keep the whole text in each database record. So, the main database
1 to ignore additions from Lunter's emulator such as SAMRAM, or ROM images from
1 to change the position of many blocks. This option only reassigns pointers in
1 to change the directory from which the file DEFAULT.CFG will be read, set the
1 to build such a solution into release 2.51. We promise that you will soon have
1 to be emulated correctly when you want to run the program using a database.
1 to an ASCII file and name the output file (default is TSWRDCII.TXT) using
1 to all emulators which takes part in the session is necessary. Warajevo is DOS
1 to ROM is ignored, but these things change the contest of ROMs:
1 to JP 1366 for faster loading, but this will not work always.
1 to INVERSE, which was not case in earlier releases of the emulator. Now, this
1 to BASIC. If the parameter <word> is omitted, the monitor recovers some
1 to <word>, else it acts like normal RST 0). Then, when you leave the monitor
1 to 528 bytes and vice versa, because on real microdrive we always have
1 to 128 Basic'. If you not familiar with Spectrum 128 system variables, you can
1 to 1 bit and redirected to PC beeper, where the clipping threshold is adapted
1 timing, even very time-depended sound routines (for example, 'Wham the music
1 timing on Warajevo emulator is not implemented exactly. Instead, it is only
1 times faster than Lunter's emulator (see menu drawing for example, or try to
1 timer interrupt, like on real Spectrum. Using this method, we removed in most
1 time, all standard banks HOME, EXROM and DOCK are implemented, but banks
1 time is passed until previous call of this routine (using PC timer), and, if
1 time in X128 emulator). Drawback in our method is fact that it is extremely
1 through the beeper with speech and noise effects! Working under Windows is not
1 through some restarts if you have /B command line option, the monitor performs
1 through following sequence of states:
1 through Sound Blaster can be found in chapter 2.4. Options from this menu
1 through PC beeper using interlacing of sound channels. Using second method, FM
1 thresholding of emulated real AY output. In some programs it will sound
1 three-channel sound generated by the AY chip using the PC beeper by
1 three bytes correspond to R, G and B value for color 0, next three bytes
1 this will remove screen damaging. These addresses may not be set in the range
1 this will be recognized as a part of LD_EDGE routine. Then the program will:
1 this variables are corrupted, usually after switching from '48 Basic' to '128
1 this time is shorter than a time which would flow on real ZX Spectrum (0.064
1 this table (this is mainly transparent for the user):
1 this special 'Return for...' code. We already told that in Warajevo compressed
1 this sounds quite good, usually better than in other emulators on beeper. If
1 this simply follow the instructions which will appear on the screen.
1 this protected program.
1 this program. 24 Kb long AROS program needs header 255,0,0,0,0,2,2,2,0 in
1 this option will ignore all 128K additions (if they are present), so there is
1 this option only if you haven't got enough space on disc for the backup file,
1 this option is ignored.
1 this mode will not work). However, such a maximum working speed is
1 this method we need not to allocate big DMA buffers, and we prevent great
1 this may cause interaction with some resident programs on 386 (and newer)
1 this is top topic of authors of many Spectrum emulators, and their wounded
1 this is the fact that the clock speed of the computer must be about 33 MHz or
1 this is a file which was not created with 'Warajevo' nor Lunter's 'Z80'
1 this from BASIC to see these effects:
1 this format is only supported by the X128 emulator by James McKay and the
1 this field, instead of an input line like with the other fields? The reason
1 this field contains '2068', the Timex emulator will be executed, and in all
1 this effect (it is complicated for implementation, but not very useful).
1 this effect (Ghost'n Goblins), this effect is partially implemented on such
1 this conversion, tape imploding is highly recommended. Before compression,
1 this conversion is a bit slower than the other conversions, but much faster
1 this category is 'Too fast'. Starting from release 2.0, Warajevo is a
1 this case in detail.
1 this byte, it monitors the net (by reading the state of the line) to check
1 this button, a dialog appears with input lines assigned to records in the
1 this argument in some other instructions, you must know that it is internally
1 this a first aid, not an ideal solution, and we are now searching for a better
1 third and fifth byte of the result into bits 3 and 5 of the F register. The
1 things, like paging subroutines at address 23296 (SWAP, YOUNGER, ONERR, PIN,
1 things will take very little time, practically instantaneous, except with
1 thing to you), but with tested programs there are such programs which are in
1 they were created with Warajevo without the option /E. Also, use this option
1 they may take too much space, and it is not of interest to most users. If
1 they may also represent music or speech records, etc. Various methods for
1 these pseudo prefixes as NOP IX and NOP IY.
1 these programs, and a possibility of crashing some Spectrum programs, which
1 these programs turns processor in so-called 'Virtual 8086 mode' and so the
1 these options may be set using the 'Video' and 'Sound' dialogs in the
1 these modes are not supported by BASIC commands, so you can try them only if
1 these files using the 'MdriveFiles' menu in the environment (see chapter
1 these fields, you can change the start and end address of the sample buffer
1 these features are not very useful, but they illustrate the degree of
1 these account numbers of 'Central banka DD Sarajevo' (former 'Kreditna
1 these I/O addresses are fully decodes, so we implement these ports using this
1 there is some interaction between our methods of sound generation and memory
1 there is nothing more to say. However, in '128 Basic' mode, the KEYPAD keys
1 there is no problems with ROM checking. On the 128 version, the option /A
1 there are no extra parameters, the memory will be saved as headerless block,
1 then switch off totally border emulation (using also F6 key).
1 then it will create an executable program MMINER.EXE which, on Hercules card
1 then 55 letters for the corresponding name. In other cases, a file name with a
1 them when analysing program '3D Labyrinth'). We called them using mnemonics
1 them using the mouse. The decimal number in the corner is the amount of free
1 them using a flag byte and data bytes.
1 their usage. This report will be shown if you try to run emulator with an
1 their own purposes. So, before starting this option remove all drivers which
1 their meaning:
1 the whole sector (543 bytes) including system data (this is dangerous if you
1 the whole emulator and usage of the 386 instruction set, and it is too late
1 the up arrow and 'PageUp' is not possible, because this format does not
1 the type will be 'EAR Sample', and instead of the flag byte, the sampling
1 the times when, in our neighbourhoods, the life was nice and normal.
1 the technical part of the manual. The editor is similar to the editor for
1 the tapes with the names starting with ARC. Another example is that /TSHOOT
1 the tape and try loading the current block again. If the header of the
1 the tape and position before loading the next block. This is necessary, for
1 the structure of DCK files in chapter 7.9.4. In the environment, some useful
1 the stage that it is today (it is written in Turbo Pascal).
1 the speed of the computer on which it is executed (except when the computer
1 the space usually used by DOS. This is space which begins on an address which
1 the source of sound. Yes, we saw such a program). The only question is how
1 the source file and converted. ZXS is more complex than Z80, so specific
1 the sound setting dialog (menu 'Setup') is not 'Tape file'.
1 the sound is bad, you may use /S option. The emulator treats as active channel
1 the so-called history list.
1 the snapshot file with this name doesn't exist.
1 the shortcut Shift+F2.
1 the separate file (ADDITION.DBF) contains text linked to the stored codes.
1 the segment in which Escape sequence was called). For an explanation about
1 the sectors is always 254, and on the end of the file there is always one
1 the second option, every nonnumeric file extension will be assumed to be
1 the screen a horizontal scroll bar which shows the progress of the operation.
1 the same snapshot in different Timex configurations). You can read more about
1 the same ink and paper color to hide strange data on the screen, so in
1 the same computer under MS Windows (this is not very reliable), you will get
1 the same action in the same moment. If a collision happens, the station stops
1 the resulting TAP file is about 8 times shorter than the VOC file, but after
1 the resulting DCK file. This option assumes that this file is a dump of some
1 the resulting DCK file. This option assumes that this file is a dump of a
1 the protocol on such way which guarantee "meeting of sent and received
1 the program loading and its start should be performed invisibly, without any
1 the program MONTY128.EXE from the above example on a computer without a
1 the processor into 'V86' mode, so you can not even start this option in the
1 the problem. We think that we've solved all cases, however this report is
1 the problem happened is displayed in the same way as with "Program finish at
1 the previously described option /J. The key '+' on the numerical keyboard and
1 the previous field says that this program is located on a tape file.
1 the paper length in lines (default 72) and the number of effectively printed
1 the output file. The default name is the same as the name of the active
1 the original value at this address will not be changed.
1 the original Spectrum will flicker on the emulator. The reason for this is
1 the original Spectrum using RS232, or may be used (after conversion) in
1 the options from menu 'TapeFiles'.
1 the option /&T in this file.
1 the older and not so perfect method for emulation of video system. Using such
1 the old Interface 1 ROM.
1 the numerical keyboard, and one of the following keys on the numerical
1 the number of the previous option (second option has number 2, third 4,
1 the number of programs saved in this format grows every day.
1 the network emulation become greater. For example, the BASIC commands SAVE*
1 the net drive.
1 the native Warajevo format.
1 the name of the resulting DCK file. This option will make a DCK file which
1 the mouse.
1 the mouse, and if you give /JA /JA both joysticks will be emulated using the
1 the mouse pointer to the desired item and then by pressing the mouse button.
1 the microdrive on a real Spectrum. This option sets the parameter /#
1 the mark 'F:' (this is useful for using the /F option).
1 the main loop (MAIN_EXEC, address 4770) of the Spectrum Basic interpreter.
1 the load routine as part of the loading routine (we have had no such cases,
1 the last release (3.05.) of Lunter's emulator.
1 the last reading from this port; when the pointer points out of buffer, a new
1 the keys '7' and '8'. The keys '(' and ')' are above '9' and '+'. Instead of
1 the key '~' (depending on the option /J) behave like a fire button on the
1 the interface file, and 3 input lines for entering other emulation
1 the instructions like this:
1 the input line, or by using a directory tree which looks like the following
1 the header type. For the 'Basic' type the line at which automatic start will
1 the graphic pages (this method allows high sound quality). CGA has only one.
1 the game 'Hobbit' saves status into four blocks. If you compile this program
1 the full name of the program. This field must not be empty.
1 the following:
1 the following meaning:
1 the filename. The Spectrum allows 8 microdrives, so the field 'MDV num'
1 the fields in this dialog in the usual way, and there are also the standard
1 the extra bytes will be simply ignored. In the Lunter's emulator, number of
1 the exact behaviour of the AY chip, including the noise generator, digital
1 the environment.
1 the environment, then play the TZX file using the utility PLAYTZX by Tomaz
1 the environment, the file WARAJEVO.EXE must be accessible the whole time, and
1 the environment will use graphical or text mode (this will be described in
1 the environment will never display the title screen.
1 the environment will automatically set this parameter.
1 the environment type EXIT.
1 the environment from the emulator, this option will reset the emulator after
1 the environment (shortcut is pressing F2 too, but in the environment), and
1 the environment (shortcut Shift+F7), and some other options (for example from
1 the environment (shortcut F2 in the environment) sets this parameter based on
1 the encoder bit) will be correctly emulated, including ROM routines. There is
1 the emulator. Options /U4 and /U5 on non-VGA cards have no effect, and the
1 the emulator. However, the 128 version of the emulator also emulates the
1 the emulator. Edit the created file SPECSIM.CFG, and read the number after
1 the emulator. Checkboxes 'Loading method' allow the selection of the tape
1 the emulator. Also, returning to Z80 mode must be performed in the same
1 the emulator.
1 the emulator will support the emulation of Kempston parallel Centronics
1 the emulator itself (F2). This will be discussed more later.
1 the emulator if you used so-called Escape sequences to switch to 80x86 mode
1 the emulator from MS Windows.
1 the emulator can recognize the sequence of instructions which are not part of
1 the emulator and run. Also, right mouse clicking on Warajevo files will open
1 the emulator (like /I and /W), are now obsolete, and there is no need for
1 the emulator 'Z80', written by Gerton Lunter. In even worse winter conditions
1 the embedded monitor (press F3, then give the command S16384 6912 'Filename').
1 the drive when you try to run program. In the input line, which is located
1 the diskette name if the program is located on a floppy disc. This allows the
1 the disc, and the environment calls the emulator from the disc when one part
1 the disc and directory which contains the selected TAP file. Some other
1 the directory was nonexistant.
1 the dialog select the name of the destination tape. The default name is
1 the dialog select the name of the destination tape. The TAP format is simpler
1 the dialog select the name of the destination sample file. Be aware of the
1 the destination tape is in Lunter's format, appending is possible only at the
1 the descriptions of the command parameters /B, /K and /2 in chapter 2.1.
1 the description of the option /#N). On the receiving emulator type and run
1 the database, first mark all such records using the previous option (this
1 the database, due to the limitations of the DOS (sorting indexes, producer
1 the database is split by vertical lines into 9 fields. In fact, there are
1 the database is long.
1 the current tape file, the preview window will not be automatically updated.
1 the current tape file before the highlighted block (or appended to end of the
1 the current directory, or in the directory which was set using the DOS
1 the current Spectrum program is located on a tape file, snapshot file,
1 the corresponding LED diode determines whether the emulation is active. When
1 the converted tape file may be big, and imploding sample blocks is very
1 the conversion, only data related to the snapshots will be extracted from
1 the consequence is frequent retransmissions of packages. The special problem
1 the compiled program. For example,
1 the compiled program with lot of routines which are needed only in a very
1 the command switch /! in chapter 2.1.
1 the command /L described previously. The selected algorithm practically has
1 the command 'Select' from the submenu 'Microdrive' of the 'MdriveFiles' menu
1 the code segment is different when compared with the emulator segment (e.g.
1 the clipping threshold will be adapted to average magnitude of the calculated
1 the checksum (by modulo 255, not 256). After this, follows a new gap, new
1 the chain of the tape file. That's why this option works only with tapes in
1 the category of the Spectrum program (for example, Arcade adventure, Logical
1 the cartridge. Select the file to be renamed in the usual way.
1 the block. The effect will sound like a machine gun. Press BREAK on the
1 the block on the tape using /D, /T and /F, using the option /A you could
1 the beginning of a DCK file, a nine-byte header is located. First byte is bank
1 the argument. For example, if the current instruction is 'LD A,(IX+3)', the
1 the alternative EXROM memory bank).
1 the ZX32 emulator). The emulator also emulates sound; it is not always
1 the ZX Spectrum +2. On the 48 version, this option is ignored. On the Timex
1 the ZX Rainbow database. The converted database will be appended to the
1 the Z80 registers A, BC, DE, HL and SP. The registers AH, BX and SI on input
1 the Warajevo package. It can be downloaded separately from the Warajevo home
1 the Warajevo emulator. By the way, at the moment we only have five usable DCK
1 the Warajevo emulator allows correct working of the program after such
1 the Timex range of computers.
1 the Tape Manager.
1 the TRD file on which you want to copy the program from the TAP file (so, the
1 the Spectrum, etc. The principle of expandion is in fact that if the emulator
1 the Spectrum will report the error. In this case, repeat the transfer.
1 the Spectrum program, and running program may erase the break point). However,
1 the Spectrum program (Ultimate, for example).
1 the Spectrum called Tasword 2 and Tasword 3.
1 the Spectrum BASIC, in the usual form (simplified Backus-Nauer form):
1 the SpecPic data base. The converted data base will be appended to the active
1 the SpecBase database. The converted database will be appended to the active
1 the Sinclair Network. This file must be located on some shared drive and
1 the SLT format. This format is also supported in the WSpecEm emulator, and in
1 the SLOW algorithm, the loading will be just as dictated in the loading
1 the SGD format. The language field is not converted because we only support
1 the EOF marker). If the destination tape is in Lunter's format, copying is
1 the ENTER key again will park the block to the new location and then you can
1 the 48K or Timex version of the emulator, or loading a Timex snapshot file in
1 the 48K or 128K version. Also, this error occurs if the snapshot file has the
1 the 128 version of the emulator.
1 the 'Z80Snaps' menu will be related to it. This option has the shortcut
1 the 'DataBase' menu) will set this parameter.
1 that this program comes from Bosnia and Herzegovina, from the city of
1 that the program uses a lot of extremely slow instructions (for example, RAM
1 that the poor emulator in this routine must transfer even 1610612736 bytes
1 that the dialog for this option changes itself when some options are turned
1 that number as a parameter after the command option /&T in the configuration
1 that modify themselves while loading, routines that use more than one
1 that match the filename mask in the 'Name' input box:, plus the parent
1 that levels starts at address 49152 with length 16384. Then you must replace
1 that it often sounds quite good...
1 that it becomes compatible with Lunter's emulator. Newly created sectors will
1 that increasing this parameter slows down transfer speed, but increases the
1 that cartridge is not formatted. It may be formatted using the FORMAT command
1 than the shared file is updated, which is just right moment) before the sender
1 than the other way around. If you try network emulation with 2 emulators on
1 than the TAP format, so any peculiarities during conversion will simply be
1 than other Spectrum emulators, precisely there are no problems with keyboard.
1 than in release 2.0. Starting from release 2.5, Warajevo allows the user to
1 than in other emulators (see also the description of the next option). Only
1 than a source file for 48K snapshot files and about 15-40 Kb for 128K
1 than TZX, so this conversion usually works fine.
1 than 32 aew removed, to prevent problems with printing this document on a
1 text. Selection of the function keys is performed in such a way that the
1 testing for use of 128K Spectrum features during 48K emulation, or testing
1 test all devices in all programs, so we don't know does this problem appear
1 terrible, you can hear only continual buzz which is mostly independent on real
1 terrible, like in 'Elevator action'). However, sometimes it is better to
1 temporary files SPECSIM.CFG, TEMP.Z80 and TEMP.DCK will be stored, and also
1 temporary directory using the DOS command SET WARAJEVO=<path>, for example,
1 telephone 387 71 526-726 telephone 387 71 543-174
1 tedious to read ASCII file format from a pure assembler...
1 tedious calculations. Command N goes even one step further. When on such
1 technical parts of the manual.
1 technical part of the manual.
1 technical part of the manual for a description of the elements of the header.
1 tapes. Tapes are organized as a double-coupled list of elements called
1 tapes) and the default disc and directory for snapshot, microdrive and DCK
1 tapes in Lunter format (in other words, one-directional compatibility is
1 tape), and on the Spectrum 128K addresses 49152 - 65535 are also forbidden
1 tape with prefix 'W', for example TAPE.TAP becomes WTAPE.TAP). In this case,
1 tape will be appended to the end of the current Warajevo tape. If the active
1 tape which you want to convert. You must be in the directory FILES. You will
1 tape using a real tape recorder directly into the emulator through a Sound
1 tape formats between Warajevo and other PC-based Spectrum emulator format.
1 tape format by Tomaz Kac from Slovenia, which is supported in the X128
1 tape files in Lunter TAP format, with equal placing with native Warajevo TAP
1 tape file. Select the block which you want to add using the file selection
1 tape file. Blocks in TAPE files are an analogue of the blocks on a real tape.
1 tape file the method described earlier. The rules of conversions are:
1 tape file on the block with samples when you don't perform loading, else you
1 tape file is a Lunter tape file, use the dialog to select the name of the
1 tape emulation. In fact, this format is the same as the polish SPC format.
1 talking about, do not change these two input fields.
1 taken at regular time intervals. Blocks which contain samples may be
1 take the minimum value which allows correct emulation on your configuration.
1 systems, works in extended Hercules mode, but it not force Hercules card,
1 system variables (ERRSP, DF_SZ, FLAGX, FLAGS, P_RAMT, PIP, RASP), registers
1 system emulation. The emulator uses files with extension .MDR (we call them
1 synthesis is used on AdLib compatible sound card. Third method uses exact AY
1 synthesis (or PC speaker) for AY sound emulation.
1 synchronous border emulation with the F6 key and by using the same key you
1 synchronizations, and transfer protocol itself makes effective transfer speed
1 synchronization with the picture generation (e.g. Aquaplane, Vectron,
1 switching into a windowed mode during working. If you do it, a strange picture
1 switching in 'protected' mode, so it is not possible to start this option
1 switching cause the resetting of the emulator so as to prevent an 'Incorrect
1 switches was too complicated, and that working with Lunter's emulator was
1 switched on, but off-line. Then switch off the printer, or change it to
1 switched off. Consequently, the cursor becomes an ordinary letter, hard to
1 switch, which will be described later in this chapter. However, such
1 switch) draws the whole picture at once after some delay from the beginning
1 supports special blocks which contain samples of real tape input which are
1 supported in the emulator package).
1 supported in TAP format, so this conversion will work fine.
1 supported formats.
1 supported (there were two different versions of the ROMs). Some ill-based
1 support the compressed ZXT/ZXS format.
1 support or MLT). That's why conversion to or from this format is a bit
1 support a fast and effective way of moving backward through the tape, unlike
1 sufficient, but this is not good practice). The register ES on the 48K
1 sufficient, but the program has many overlay modules, so when you work with
1 such treatment of additional levels), we implemented this feature too, but in
1 such software, you can make one rough test by giving BASIC command OUT 255,6.
1 such programs switching attributes off is not recommended.
1 such instructions do nothing) with the ASCII signature '8086' which must
1 such behaviour.
1 such a block, you must use the DBASE program (or something similar), the
1 subtracted from duration of time compensation in further calls of the
1 subroutine that loads (or saves) from '.TAP' files from the disc rather than
1 subroutine is called which calculates what would be output signal of real AY
1 suboption /VX which activates the extended Hercules mode works only if a
1 stored in this buffer, and DSP picks it periodically from time to time). Using
1 still 5 fields in each record (total of 14 fields), but these fields are not
1 status using the read-only attribute of the MDR file.
1 status saving and loading. If game saves and loads status in only one block
1 station, which can be achieved in BASIC using 0 as station number) still does
1 states, and every 224 T states which is duration of one screen SCAN line (or
1 states (311 scan lines or 70908 T states on 128 version, and 262 scan lines or
1 statements SOUND and STICK. They are implemented in the emulator, and we can
1 state, so keyboard reading is smooth and extremely fast. However, 'matrix'
1 state of sound registers, last selected sound register, 128K MMU port, Timex
1 starts receiving of the package, bit by bit. Due to internal synchronization
1 starts (e.g. after 'vertical retrace' signal), to eliminate problems about
1 starting from release 2.0. Warajevo uses an extended 'TAP' format which
1 start. A horizontal scroll bar will show the progress of the operation. After
1 standard, so you need to change these constants very rarely. But next 3
1 standard sizes. Use '72' for European 12" A4 continuous paper, or '66' for
1 standard screen loading without disturbing the loading process, but any
1 standard Z80 mnemonics, with the addition of some synthetic instructions,
1 standard Timex HOME ROM. For example, if you convert ZX48.ROM into TS2048.DCK
1 standard ROM, 'I' for ZX Interface 1 shadow ROM, and 'D' for 128 Derby ROM.
1 standalone EXE programs which may be executed indepedently of the emulator
1 stack (32 bytes, but in Lunter-compatibility case 36 bytes) and in the
1 speed. Turn the CAPS LOCK off before running the Warajevo on NT, because it
1 speed will not be attained).
1 speed which you want, try the switch /%MAX. This option enables additional
1 speed is about 33 MHz!). But if you want to run at, for example, 60% of the
1 speed (without slowing down). Similarly,
1 specific, because the Timex Sinclair 2068 has two joystick connections (left
1 specific method. This field is linked to a list box. It will contain all the
1 special treatment of pages 2 and 5 which are in fact copies of memory blocks
1 special thing about it. But in 128 version of the emulator, RAMs paging is
1 special meaning when breakpoint is set (it acts like breakpoint if PC is equal
1 speaker on/off, switch error checking on/off and break the loading process
1 spaces or newlines. Obviously, the file DEFAULT.CFG acts like SPECSIM.CFG,
1 space, use the 'Change position' option instead of this option.
1 space to insert appropriate subroutines for saving and loading. For example,
1 source tape. You can select or unselect the blocks using SPACE, ENTER or by
1 source file is not divisible by 8192, the converted file will be filled with
1 sounds incredible, but it is true. We tested many programs with non-standard
1 sound. This option is ignored on the 48 version of the emulator.
1 sound using four different methods. Using first method, emulation is performed
1 sound in this mode is a bit unclear under Windows. Great problem appears in
1 sound effects, speech generation and so on. Option /SX tries to reproduce
1 sound effects and speech synthesis, which is impossible with FM synthesis.
1 sound card, and if you want to instead use AY sound on the beeper, run it
1 sound are ANDed. In this mode of AY chip emulation, noise generator is not
1 sort criteria. The order of setting checkboxes is important (for example, if
1 sometimes). You can read more about this in chapter 7.3.1. However, if our
1 sometimes some messages written after finishing the job and sometimes some
1 sometimes printer emulation may cause problems with some pirate game loaders.
1 somebody wants to make something usable, and these informations are not
1 some unusual steps, but it is not a great problem. Also, monitor will execute
1 some things must be done manually.
1 some programs are sensitive to values of all registers after loading (for
1 some other options (for example from the menu 'DataBase') will set this
1 some not implemented feature. We don't yet emulate completely RS232 etc. We
1 some keys. The active block (i.e. the next block to be loaded, or the block
1 some instruction. If such failure happens, first re-enter the monitor and then
1 some heuristic rules. So, some multicolor effects will not work correctly.
1 some Z80 manuals this instruction is documented). There is yet another new I/O
1 some Timex specificity):
1 some Spectrum programs (for example, The Train) for some mysterious reasons
1 solving some problem, you can patch into program (if you know) a sequence of
1 solving of this problem for next release.
1 solved in a new release of the emulator. Maybe, a idea for successful solving
1 solution...
1 solution). Also, you can determine the loading speed ('Effective speed').
1 solution is, if you have fast computer, to turn on multicolor emulation mode
1 so-called LROS (Language ROM Oriented Software) and AROS (Application ROM
1 so this limitation is natural). Move the highlight to the header of the
1 so that the optimized file has the minimum access time to all logical files
1 so range of machines on which this emulator can work on normal speed is very
1 snapshots which can cause some damage. Using the option /?86 removes the
1 snapshots for XZX emulator uses such mixture), it is only needed to include
1 snapshots etc.
1 snapshots created using the emulator by Pedro M. R. Salas which cause
1 snapshot, with the prefix '1' (for example, SNAP.Z80 becomes 1SNAP.Z80 if you
1 snapshot name is TEMP.Z80 in this case). Renaming allows snapshot saving with
1 snapshot files. We must say that a compiled program is totally independent of
1 snapshot files in TAPE files, we will explain this later in the manual).
1 snapshot files are compatible with the emulator called 'Z80', written by
1 snapshot filename will be given with a full path name, so selecting this
1 snapshot file, activate this option, which guarantee absolute security.
1 snapshot file in which the emulator saves the temporary state before entering
1 snapshot file (by pressing F7 key) during loading program with unusual loading
1 small changes to the emulator's ROM, so that after the emulator starts,
1 slowest computers. However, we hope that the time of slow computers has
1 slow operation). Slow paging causes disturbing of precise timing, so it will
1 slow machines.
1 situation.
1 single-step through everything. For example, you can single step even through
1 single stepping through instructions) the content of the front panel may
1 simultaneously, and waits (simultaneously) for a another station receives this
1 simply highlight it using the arrow keys or a letter key. But if you want to
1 simply copied from input to output file). When the signature bit is 1, this is
1 simply browse data in the database, but you can also start programs using
1 simplified example, BASIC program
1 similar to the previous dialog. After you select 'OK', you must give an
1 similar to real sectors on microdrive cartridges. We will simply call MDR
1 similar option in the emulator kernel.
1 similar method) that one part of the screen has one video mode, other part
1 significantly speeds up loading using non-standard loaders (the speed up is
1 signatures will be (binary):
1 signatures if yyyy is less than 10, or in both signatures and data bytes if
1 signature bit is 0, corresponding data byte is simple data byte (it may be
1 signature 'USER' before the start of the handler code. Using a signature is
1 signal of changing the video memory by using:
1 sign ':'. The registers F and F' are displayed in binary form too, with an
1 sign '0'). The keys 'Delete' (grey) and 'Scroll lock' in '128 BASIC' mode
1 shown with register pair BC, throws away the result, but updates flags (in
1 show the active RAM page, active video page and status of the 48K lock bit.
1 should your favourite game not work in release 2.51. due to some new-made bug
1 should manually enter the size in the input line. The second group of radio
1 should contain the microdrive number. This microdrive will be the current
1 should be decimal or hexadecimal. One register is active, and marked with a
1 shortcut keys, and the 'Start' button (like Windows 95). You can also select
1 shortcut Shift+F2.
1 shortcut F7 in the environment too.
1 shortcut Alt+F2. The display is as described in chapter 3.2.2.
1 short (executable file is 92 bytes long) and the source file has very
1 shared drive, and SHARED is a shared directory, use a command option like
1 shading (BRIGHT is not implemented). On the CGA card the FLASH attribute will
1 settings, add the numbers of all the options which are turned on, and use
1 settings separated by spaces or by a new line. It must be located in the
1 settings in 'TZX conversion setup'. 'Hardware Info' checks whether the
1 sets up the tape SHOOT.TAP for the active tape, but the other tapes may be
1 sets the initial values of the registers for program execution, state of the
1 set before loading) will be restored. This extremely useful option
1 servers (like BITFTP) which can send you files from FTP servers as UU-encoded
1 seriously, these examples may be useful for you.
1 sequences which allow temporarily breaking emulation of the Z80 processor and
1 sequence header/block/header/block etc. However, the environment has commands
1 separately.
1 sensitive to requirement that emulated 228 T states must have duration which
1 sends ACK again. If the sender does not receive ACK, whole procedure will also
1 sending simultaneously to all stations, and receiving from an unspecified
1 send it to us!
1 selection of this option. Any previous ZX Rainbow database will be erased.
1 selection dialog. For more details, see the description of the command /#N in
1 selection dialog will appear. This option has the shortcut key F2, like the
1 selection bar and pressing ENTER. The 'ChDir' button changes the current
1 selecting print options contains two groups of radio buttons, an input line
1 selecting between B G Service's interface, the Spanish interface, and Sound
1 selected, the type of emulation will be automatically determined from the
1 selected file.
1 selected cartridge file not exist). All operations in the 'MdriveFiles' menu
1 select which fields will be included in the report, select the output device,
1 select whether you want to print all records, only marked or only unmarked
1 select whether you want to change only the actual sector data (512 bytes) or
1 select this option, you will see on the screen the dialog for selecting the
1 select this option, you will be asked for the name of a DCK file which will
1 select the position in the active tape file where this block will be included
1 select the name of the tape which you want to convert. All blocks from this
1 select the highlighted item by pressing SPACE, ENTER or by double clicking
1 select the block using ENTER, SPACE or double clicking the mouse, any further
1 select register above R15, it seems that most significant 4 bits will be
1 select blocks with a list box using the way described earlier. The radio
1 segment as the segment in which switching to 80x86 mode occurred, e.g. the CS
1 seems that the code for turning off CAPS LOCK which is built into the Warajevo
1 seeks to any block in the tape (further detail in: Tape Manager). On the top
1 seeking to any desired block in the tape, which will be active after entering
1 see this splitting. More precisely, the emulator calls the environment from
1 see the description of the command parameter /P in chapter 2.1.
1 see that the disc lamp indicator will flash, and the emulator will continue
1 see chapter 2.4.
1 sectors per file, the created file will be compatible with Lunter's Z80
1 sectors file length, the file format will be compatible with Lunter's format
1 section 5.3. if you want emulation of a parallel Spectrum interface for the
1 seconds all sectors will become bad). A newly formatted cartridge always has
1 seconds (with default value 30 this is about 2 seconds), which gives chance to
1 second parameter (its value is not important), the jump to NEW will be
1 scrollbars which show the progress of the operation.
1 screen. Warajevo emulator starting from release 2.0. has synchronity between
1 screen. This enables working of very time-dependent graphic routines, like
1 screen, because standard BASIC does not support this mode). You can switch
1 screen when the border is changing too fast (this is especially visible
1 screen mode, and in windowed mode screen is frozen. The beeper sound is really
1 screen memory (at address 22500). By changing the addresses which are written
1 screen if the emulator notice that there is no changed bytes into the video
1 screen generation using Shift+F6 is needed more often. Saving on a real tape
1 scope (it's use is intended mostly for the interchanging of necessary
1 sciences (the emulator was originally Samir's graduate thesis). Even in
1 scan line on border will always has one color. More precisely, during calling
1 saving. If game saves status in more than one block, or with header, situation
1 saving too) will be performed using a real tape recorder, with the help of a
1 saving to TAP file from such programs, you must hack using built-in monitor.
1 saving snapshot files using menus directly from the emulator. The environment
1 saves the snapshot file TEMP.Z80 and configuration file SPECSIM.CFG as
1 saved from one Timex version cannot be loaded in any other version, due to
1 saved Sarajevo of fall. In this time we had not leave the army building, and
1 satisfy us has still not been achieved. At the moment, broadcasting (e.g.
1 satisfactory results no matter what settings these parameters have (Hercules
1 sampling of very long blocks or during sampling at a frequency of 44100 Hz.
1 samples. Sometimes, when you single step through load (or save) routine, and
1 samples. Its structure is like:
1 samples, which we will describe later in the manual. Such blocks can also be
1 samples in any form, or blocks which contain other non-standard records will
1 same way as 'Software producer or distributor'.
1 same name as the name of EXE program, with extension '.DAT'. For example,
1 same meaning as in DOS). Then, click the 'OK' button, and you will be moved
1 same effect can be achieved by using ALT+F4 (as in MS Windows).
1 running the emulator again, because after this option the memory image will
1 running is performed by passing a file to the 'Start' button which is
1 run Spectrum 128 emulator using switch /SB, and type the following command in
1 row' (1 = pressed, 0 = released). After first row, KEYPAD controller scans a
1 routines. This problem is coded as 'T' too. However, you can save such
1 routines, whether they have a header or not. However, many programs use
1 routines, and especially to not change the algorithm while loading. This may
1 routines with #ED #FC and #ED #FD instructions. So, blocks which will be saved
1 routines and we very rarely had problems. There were problems with routines
1 routine, or during writing on ZX Printer, when you load snapshot file back
1 routine, including correct updating of all registers. In some very rare cases
1 routine which scans the KEYPAD will fail (and exit with NOTDONE status)
1 routine which is more or less similar to the routine in the Spectrum ROM, so
1 routine for time compensation (see previous chapter), the emulator paints
1 routine (32 bytes) which is located in the screen memory (at address 22240)
1 rights as native the Warajevo tape format.
1 right time will simply be lost (retransmissions will not be performed). As our
1 returning to the environment or DOS will occur. For more details, see the
1 returning to Z80 mode, the registers AL, CX, DX, DI and BP will be copied into
1 return you to the monitor. The original value of this address will be then
1 return codes as with ordinary number keys (except if you give command like
1 results. The original tape file will be saved in a backup (BAK) file. The
1 results. However, all 8 combinations is fully implemented in the emulator,
1 result in noticeable degradation of sound quality. This problem will be solved
1 restored. Obviously, such implementation on the break point is not fully
1 restart may have many different inline parameters. Monitor will disassemble
1 respectively. If it is P, V or J then follows four letters for a code and
1 respectively.
1 resolution mode (512x192 pixels in two colors). Also, it is possible to
1 resizing. While you hold the mouse button, you can move the mouse pointer to
1 resized to fit the whole screen. Press here again, and the window size will
1 requires a bit of a faster computer, synchronous border emulation enabled
1 requirement is not satisfied, sound degradation will occur. That's why the
1 requests ACK from it.
1 represents the value of control register (#FF). After the sign 'MC', eight
1 represent identification cone which allows you to have more files with same
1 represent bug into the emulator. Also, some of them are obsolete.
1 report width. If you select an ASCII printer, control codes will not be sent.
1 replace ZX48.ROM with his own, so key F8 is mostly useless.
1 replace Timex HOME ROM with ordinary Spectrum ROM (e.g. you will achieve Timex
1 repair unformatted or bad sectors, or sectors which have been damaged by
1 renaming, then give wanted name). So, this option is certainly an improvement
1 removing the cartridge from the microdrive on a real Spectrum).
1 removed and emulation of various multicolor effects are possible. This option
1 remove screen damaging. After loading of the last block, a short machine code
1 remembered because these labels are not written on the PC's numerical
1 relocate the video memory in the standard video mode from address 16384 to
1 reliable way for joystick reading), bits in register R14 have following
1 releases up to 3.03. (including), but our emulator always saves snapshot files
1 release 2.6. with perfect sound, better than in emulator X128 and that it
1 release 2.0. the VGA dark yellow is really yellow (in earlier releases it was
1 release 2.0, the environment may work in a graphics mode too when using an
1 release 1.5. Releases 2.0. and newer are Real-Time emulators, but the price of
1 release 1.5. Newer releases are not yet optimized to adapt themselves to the
1 release 1.24 (it was introduced in release 1.32.). The command line field is
1 relatively complex ZXT (or ZXS) format for tape emulation. This format, in
1 related to this tape (tape file). When you call this option, a file
1 registers. You can put some values in registers including PC and then execute
1 registers too, but they have not block filename as inline parameter. Instead,
1 registers are emulated. There are even some instructions which are not listed
1 register. This is useful for examining high and low byte of 16-bit registers.
1 register, and reading from this port will always return 255. Some of the sound
1 register values, and three groups of radio buttons (for selecting the
1 register must not be changed. In 80x86 mode all DOS and BIOS functions are
1 register must contain a number which will be returned through the IN
1 register is shown in the middle of the line. On the left side of the line are
1 register if after last POP AF instruction was performed some arithmetical
1 register Stack address'. Using these fields, advanced users may totally
1 register R14 acts as input port (bit D6=0 in register R7, this is the only
1 register H or register L, this instruction will work with a higher or lower
1 regardless of the silly implementation), so whenever possible, transferring
1 regardless of silly hardware realization, but claiming protocol, various
1 refreshing of the front panel.
1 refresh screen garbage after a task switch, and whether the emulator should
1 records. Also, the record deleting will not delete the assigned memo block
1 records, and select the dimensions of the paper.
1 records which are not used very often at the end of the database. Also, using
1 records called sectors. Sectors are 543 bytes long, and their organization is
1 recorder is not possible using Sound Blaster, because it will cause conflicts
1 recorder is always as with non-standard routines, i.e. slow. This algorithm
1 record. This field must not be empty.
1 recommended with this option, because very precise timing is needed. Try it...
1 recommended to keep the emulator in 'AUTO' mode. You should note that it is
1 recommended if they are not really necessary.
1 recommended (if not necessary) to set <block_delay> to a value above 350,
1 recognizing non-standard loading routines and loads such programs! This
1 receiving station to receive content of sent package (the receiving station
1 receive, using the commands 'L' (for blocks with headers) or 'H' (for
1 receive special meaning. Because most of the users had no opportunity to see
1 recalculated on each reading from port 254 in according to passed time from
1 reasons, the Warajevo emulator cuts these records into a series of blocks no
1 reasons, if the active tape is in Lunter's format, saving will be performed
1 realize necessary synchronity between sender and receiver station. Of course,
1 real-time emulator, so this problem no longer exists.
1 real tape recorder.
1 real ZX Interface 1 switches all 16K. If you want to emulate this, use the
1 real Timex. This program on Warajevo emulator produces something extremely
1 real Spectrum. This format may include textual program descriptions,
1 real Spectrum too (in this case use option /% to increase emulator speed), or
1 real Hercules card is detected. For example, if you use
1 reads KEYPAD is long (and slow, that is reason why KEYPAD emulation slows down
1 reading from this port returns value of active sound chip register. When A14=0
1 reading and writing) to all net users (such rights you must seek from your
1 readability):
1 read/write instructions like RRD and LDIR do not affect this field. If the
1 read which values of the time constants are needed for successful loading of
1 read using "moving microdrive reading head" (this effect will not work on
1 range 0-63. Why this file is binary instead of ASCII file? Because it is very
1 range 0 to 255. In most cases, the user need not change these parameters
1 quite stable on Windows 95 (much more stable than under Windows 3.11.). In
1 quite satisfactory speed, this means that the program already was slow on the
1 quite complicated, because the Timex computer has a loading routine stored in
1 quickly, if everything is OK. But, if this doesn't happen, stop both
1 quick help about monitor commands with the syntax and a short description
1 put these instructions in the program (using our internal monitor) at
1 purpose is memory expansions (ROM or RAM) using cartridges which you can plug
1 protocol has no correct synchronization, the probability that such sent
1 progress of the operation. The indicator that communication is working is if
1 programs. This problem can be solved using the /Y switch, which is described
1 programs. However, such loading has two small restrictions. One potentially
1 programs work perfectly (Overscan demo, Echologia, MDA demo) or nearly
1 programs work on natural speed. If you have very slow computer, search for
1 programs will not work with the new version, but there are also programs
1 programs which frequently perform memory paging on Spectrum 128 (extremely
1 programs which are loadable on a real Spectrum, including speedlock protected
1 programs using the BREAK key, and try changing the parameters <block_delay>,
1 programs to your PC. Generally, there are four ways:
1 programs request the +2 ROM's. This option enables operation of such programs.
1 programs on real tape using 'B G Services' interface on LPT1 port. If you want
1 programs may be loaded with picture generation enabled (screen loading,
1 programs like the music synthesizer where the ZX printer styli is used as
1 programs like OS_64). The option /A is very powerful, but also complex to
1 programs in such a way that it includes all possible cases which appear on a
1 programs from the tape will be written later in the manual). However, tape is
1 programs from the database.
1 programs cannot be loaded directly into the emulator. Instead, use the option
1 programs 'Strip Poker 2' and 'Killed until dead'.
1 program? The command parameter /&O described in chapter 2.1. is used. For
1 program. After running this program, RANDOMIZE USR 40000 will save the
1 program, use X255 command. Command X without a parameter is the same as X0
1 program, a short story about the development of this program follows.
1 program' (see chapter 3.2.4.).
1 program you can also keep some additional text (e.g. POKE's for infinite
1 program with name KTYME.EXE which can save and load status into a block with
1 program which you want to convert. After this, using the other dialog select
1 program uses 128K or Timex features and in that case switches the emulator
1 program tries to write some data to any Spectrum 128 port. The address will
1 program on the tape, in the case of MDR files the program on the cartridge
1 program on Spectrum, e.g. on Spectrum 48K). Surely, corresponding program on
1 program length etc. The second block, with a shorter leader but usually with
1 program is very user-friendly.
1 program is not in SLT format, but in mixture of Z80 and DAT files (some
1 program is loaded correctly, the program name will appear in the loading
1 program is good or no. If the sound disturbs you, simply switch off it using
1 program has performed an illegal operation and will be shut down', and under
1 program exists (but they are rare) which will not load correctly (or will not
1 program displayed on the screen and wait until the transfer finishes. After
1 program categories used earlier. If you want to select an existing category,
1 program WARAJEVO), or from the emulator (by pressing F10, or using the right
1 producers entered earlier, so the selection of a previously used producer
1 producer name, highlight it, then press the right arrow. You will enter edit
1 produce dump out of paper is 32, 320, 896 and 1664 for modes 0 (or 1), 2, 3
1 processor is working in 'virtual 8086' mode (this doesn't mean that a
1 processor is needed. This option initially allocates a 1-Mbyte buffer out of
1 process, we will first explain the meaning of each field, from left to right.
1 procedure SendToSpectrum(Addr,Size:word; Flag:byte);
1 procedure ReceiveFromSpectrum(Address:word; var Size:word; var Flag:byte);
1 problems, execute option 'Restart the computer in MS-DOS mode' in Windows 95.
1 problems! The same is true for load routines which perform loading from the
1 problems with the emulator.
1 problems will probably disappear. The parameter /Q is machine independent,
1 problems which appear with some programs. Unfortunately, our emulator is not
1 problems see chapter 8.
1 problematic thing is screen loading and loaders which change video memory
1 problem. In case of such problems, first try to remove all 386 memory
1 problem, when colors of 2 square-like object differ only in brightness which
1 problem, we also included appearance of 'ghosts', the parts of the screen that
1 problem, the PC will interrupt the transfer.
1 problem will occur). The option /! prevents the displaying of this warning
1 problem may sometimes be "wrapping problem" (see chapter 7.10.). If you have
1 problem for you.
1 probably, something is wrong with the filename, or the filename doesn't
1 probably the name was omitted completely, or the extension was different from
1 printing will be redirected to a text file. The dialog for this option is
1 printer. Initially, the ZX or TS2040 printer will not be emulated, because
1 printer interface (more precisely, the variant Kempston S of this interface)
1 printed on a new line. If you select too many fields in the report, some
1 printed as a coded string, using the abbreviations described in chapter 8.
1 previous releases of the emulator, a frequent problem which users place into
1 previous option. After this option the active database will be the database
1 prevent any access to the printer. The last two options work only if the test
1 pressing of these keys differently depending on whether the computer is in
1 pressing of the BREAK key or a function key (be patient). It is not
1 pressing a mouse button, or using the scroll bars. For some commands you must
1 pressing F5. On EGA and VGA cards the option /M is ignored. However, some
1 press F9 for reset the emulator.
1 present in release 2.0.), emulation of the MIDI interface on Spectrum 128,
1 presence of these drivers (an error message will appear).
1 precisely, filename will represent hexadecimal values of IX and DE registers).
1 precisely, depending of bit 0 in system variable FLAGS3 (address 23398).
1 precisely, after loading the first header), all ROM changes are cancelled, so
1 precedence over the 0 state. So, when a station wants to send data package
1 practical reasons):
1 power, water and food (in this time we loosed 1 kg weekly), when only miracle
1 possible. So, in April 1993, we started the development of our Spectrum
1 possible, because levels loading is in different programs implemented on quite
1 possible, and intensively access internal resources of the computer (like
1 possible types of programs, so such informations are now superfluous. If you
1 possible to manually set them for better control. If you are not familiar
1 possible that the emulator may take about 10 seconds to recognise the
1 possible only on to the end of the tape.
1 possibility of patching 80x86 code into Z80 code (in such cases, any presence
1 position where this record is normally located. Using marking you can put
1 ports depend of other address bits.
1 port who has all bits from A0 to A7 identical to 1 (most frequently, port 255)
1 port 65533) writing to this port selects active sound chip register, and
1 port 254) according to the content of the sampled data at the exact moment
1 popup menu with following additions:
1 polyphonic, sounds very well. Starting from release 2.0, accurate timing is
1 political and economical situation is still very bad. At the moment, our
1 pointer. It is possible to drag the pointer using a mouse too.
1 pointer, moves the pointer one page left. The same effect as the key
1 pointer' and 'Value of current marked register'. The arguments are separated
1 pointer up and down respectively. The keys Up and Down have same effect.
1 pointer to the first block. Then follow four bytes with pointer to the last
1 pointer to left and right respectively. The Left and Right keys have the same
1 point). So, don't use Warajevo emulator for developing of multicolor demos
1 playing a logical game (why not chess if you are feeling ambitious) using 2
1 place in memory which you can guarantee to be empty. If you are a skillful,
1 pixels. For input, the bit D0 is connected to READY of the printer, bit D6 to
1 pixels color attributes, every byte has own color attribute), and extended
1 pixels (depending of dump mode). So, if <word> is 256, dump is moved right for
1 pixel height of chars redefined to look like high resolution graphic. Such
1 pirated programs (which were very popular in former Yugoslavia). Probably the
1 pictures, and even some commands (a kind of macrolanguage). At the moment,
1 pictures look blocky when you turn off attributes. Also, some programs set
1 picture drawing. This delay is determined using the parameter <line> which
1 picture drawing may cause problems. These problems can usually be removed by
1 permanently onto disc. For this purpose, the emulator uses files with the
1 performs some thing as a previous example but the block will have name
1 performs division by zero.
1 performed assuming the presence of the Spectrum ROM.
1 perform saving of snapshot files exactly in the moment when Z80 interrupt
1 perform STC and RETF 2. For expanding the IN instruction, on exit the AH
1 perfectly. Namely, on real Timex it is possible using very dirty interrupt
1 perfectly (Shock Megademo) without having to set these parameters. We have
1 perfect, so it is good idea to keep in the database the types of problems
1 perfect to us): emulator ZX32 for Windows 95 by Vaggelis Kapartzianis.
1 perfect (but not always). So, you will often get perfect 3-channel AY sound
1 patching sequences of instructions which will be executed under full control
1 patches are made to produce an executable program. If you want to use ZXCOMP
1 passed, so this will probably not be a problem. To make a rough test as to
1 particular parameter argument may be omitted.
1 partial conversion from (or to) some unsupported formats which are similar to
1 part of the screen is written the name of the active tape which can be
1 parent directory must contain the file TAPES.ZX (which could be empty). This
1 parameters. The input line for entering the name of the interface file is
1 parameters. Almost all options may be set using the environment (so the user
1 parameters will simply be redirected to the environment, so syntax errors
1 parameters will display a short message about compiling syntax. The syntax
1 parameters is very important because then the describing of the many options
1 parameters from this dialog will be ignored if the MIC/EAR device selected in
1 parameters <delay> and <extra>. Parameter <delay> introduces an additional
1 parameters (for example, /JK /Q100) which are needed for the Spectrum program
1 parameter. In opposite to Lunter's emulator, our emulator will not update
1 parameter. However, you must be carefully when use J command to execute
1 parameter.
1 parameter must have value 48 or 128 with meaning 'Abort to 48 Basic' or 'Abort
1 parameter /C (e.g. WARAJEVO /C) the command parameters will be read from the
1 parameter 'Speed in % relative' may be changed by directly entering the
1 parallel with other applications (although not absolutely clear, there are
1 parallel printer interface (see section 5.3.) in form of the source file
1 paragraph, some things (like Interface 1 paging, etc.) will not work. Any POKE
1 panel (in slightly modified format, and without memory bytes around register
1 palette, like in earlier releases (some users didn't like this palette, so we
1 palette changing of one pseudo color which makes a frame around the screen.
1 paging on the Spectrum 128, which causes very ugly sound distortion. In such
1 paging may sometimes cause problems in programs which intensively swaps memory
1 paging in the emulator is slow, so it will disturb the loading process. Such
1 paging and whether you want the old or new ROM. A similar effect has the
1 pages. The worst case is like in following case, which sometimes appears into
1 pages (see technical part of the manual). In such cases, use AdLib FM
1 packed length will be equal to the normal length. Regardless of the current
1 package, and so on. Often, package interchanging in a right moment is more a
1 package" and which retain I/O level of the emulation, always causes a
1 package will be correctly received is not great. But, any attempt to improve
1 package until release 1.2, and later on was integrated into the environment)
1 package is like what it expects, it then sends to sender acknowledge signal in
1 package (e.g. waits forever). This problem is still open, and maybe will be
1 over the system it is possible to perform anything that a PC computer can do!
1 over again.
1 output signal. This mode was introduced purely experimentally, but we noticed
1 output filename using a file selection dialog.
1 our secondary school days, about ten years before, we began to build an
1 our emulator instructions #ED #FB and #ED #F6 (the monitor will display them
1 otherwise, the database will be sorted by the 'Short name' field. Using this
1 otherwise SBST mode will not be available for selecting). To accomplish such
1 others, except maybe Lunter's program. We think that it is a great success,
1 other video mode, etc. For example, BASIC program
1 other four colors are combinations of the first four. Using this option you
1 other format (option 'Full name in Path field'; in this case automatic
1 other emulators)! Our emulator (version 128) in '128 Basic' on slow computers without EMS memory works many
1 other cases, the 128K emulator will be executed (emulation of Spectrum +3 and
1 original value of the changed instruction will be restored, except if you
1 original load routine, but not all (for example A, B and C registers). During
1 original effect of collision (Vectron). However, we decide to not implement
1 original Timex ROM the lowest usable value is 26900. On the Timex version,
1 original Spectrum speed, run the emulator with the option /%60. Similarly,
1 or, alternatively:
1 or with the ZX Spectrum ROM (but will not work in presence of LROS or AROS
1 or one program in DOCK and second in EXROM bank, etc.).
1 or lower byte of IY. These instructions have the mnemonic like LD XH,5. By the
1 or if you don't know anything about modern operating systems. This chapter is
1 or if the option 'Delete' would take too much time. The selecting of the 'OK'
1 or deactivating some switch-type options, and their usage is similar. You can
1 or TS2068 /ETS2048) you will get Timex Sinclair 2048 emulation!
1 or TEMP.TAP (depending on whether the selected file is a snapshot or tape
1 or Shift+F5 (alternatively you may use Ctrl+F5 or Alt+F5 instead of Shift+F5)
1 options which allow you to start programs by name using data from the
1 options from this menu for the first time may take some time, especially if
1 options for manipulating DCK files are implemented (see chapter 3.5.).
1 options /D, /T, /F and /A and makes working with the emulator very simple.
1 options (which are not recommended under Windows). Any working with real tape
1 options (for example, 3-channel sound). If you give the /?128 option, any
1 options (for example from the 'DataBase' menu) may set this parameter.
1 option. You must first load onto Spectrum the blocks that you want to
1 option. First, select the desired Spectrum program using the list box. Then
1 option) on the Epson or HP Laser Jet printer. If D1=0 (motor works fast), the
1 option you will see a dialog with checkboxes in which you can define other
1 option will not set parameter /D (e.g. will not change active directory).
1 option on the PC and then press 'S' on the Spectrum (transferred blocks will
1 option is useless, because nearly all users use only VGA compatible graphic
1 option is similar to the 'Delete' option, but unlike 'Delete', this option
1 option in the emulator kernel).
1 option in a database) if you are sure that this program works fine in
1 option corresponds to number 1, and every option has a number which is twice
1 option correctly saves (loads) status, it is good. Else, if compiled program
1 option a dialog similar to the 'Seek' option. After selecting OK, all records
1 option /U:
1 option /JM will read this port from the mouse. The MOUSE.SYS or similar driver
1 option /EX, but the switching will be slower. Using the option /# will
1 option /E, the ZX Interface 1 is emulated. In that case, the file ZXI1.ROM
1 option /D is omitted. The directory name must not contain the character '.'.
1 option /A). If LOAD fails, for any reason, the consequences are the same as
1 option /?86 which prohibits the use of Escape sequences, and causes an error
1 option ('Test for 128K programs'), nor 'Escape' sequences and drivers for
1 option 'Edit' will be described first, because the database must be created
1 optimizations which allow maximum possible speed of the emulator (hires
1 optimally.
1 operations in the 'MdriveFiles' menu will be performed on it. The shortcut
1 opens a main menu. If you now select '128 Basic', in many cases you can
1 open, you will see double prompt '>>' instead of single prompt '>'.
1 only when you try to load a program from a created TAP file into the
1 only redirects the pointers in the tape file to forget that this block
1 only one block, using standard routines at address 1218 and 1366 (or some
1 only if you select analogue joystick with manual calibration). You can set
1 only for 2-3 hours during the night. However, we did not quit and caught
1 only due to memory requests, but they act like one program, so you can not
1 only at Warajevo emulator (that's why program Insane, which on most emulators
1 online help for this option. It has shortcut key F5. Be aware of the fact
1 one page up, like PgUp. It is similar with the part below the pointer.
1 one or two bad sectors.
1 one of two states: marked or unmarked. It's state may be set using the
1 one of the files 'ZX128_0.ROM' or 'ZX128_1.ROM' was not found in the current
1 one of the 3 following ways:
1 one full dump width in this dump mode. This is useful when you make game maps.
1 one emulator exists which has a better emulation of multicolor effects (seems
1 on which program messages are displayed (this allows you to make a
1 on the tape file using the method described earlier. The rules of conversions
1 on the real Spectrum using a real tape recorder, then select the option
1 on the left joystick emulation, and the second will act on the right joystick
1 on the floppy disc. This field may be empty only if you don't want to run
1 on the border during loading, just like on a real Spectrum.
1 on the 128 version of the emulator it could be as much as 50%). This has
1 on screen. All eventual problems which belong to this category may be removed
1 on receiving emulator the command
1 on real Spectrum appears when the jet of electrons is on the top of the
1 on paper, because it was in hardest days of summer 1993, without electric
1 on or off. For example, if the border emulation is not set to 'Rainbow', you
1 on it. The original file will be saved with the extension .BAK.
1 on faster computers. In all other cases, the option /QX will be ignored.
1 on every transient of a KEYPAD clock pulse. It is implemented on the emulator
1 on an original Spectrum, which in conventional cases results with 'R Tape
1 on Sound Blaster speaker too, try the command:
1 omitted, the assumed names are those given by the option /D, or the active
1 omitted, register receives a value of the memory pointer. The marked register
1 omitted (soft abort), monitor restores printer channel "P" too, because 48
1 omit these parameters, 30, 5 and 5 will be assumed, so
1 off, i.e. the recognizing of non-standard load routines. In very rare cases
1 off border emulation too (except in color CGA mode). From the environment
1 of this option. Any previous SGD database will be erased. The SGD database
1 of this file is described in chapter 7.9.6.). The default WARAJEVO.PAL file
1 of these three effects mentioned will work on Lunter's emulator. Of course,
1 of these instructions).
1 of their working are slim, though, due to changed ROMs), but snapshot files
1 of the whole screen content may take a lot of time, which may cause loading
1 of the snapshot.
1 of the screen, the program counter, the hexadecimal values at this address,
1 of the option F7 in the emulator kernel, that's why this option has the
1 of the games problems with flickering and 'ghosting'. However, real Spectrum
1 of the files 'ZXP2_0.ROM' or 'ZXP2_1.ROM' was not found in the current
1 of the emulator. The only difference is that if the parameter <word> is
1 of the emulator, and if you used some 80x86 instruction which puts a 16-bit
1 of the emulator this effect is not implemented.
1 of the directory which is determined using the DOS environment variable
1 of the blocks on the tape, and it should be equal to the compressed size. If
1 of the Z80 interrupt. Programs that rely on the very precise timing used in
1 of the TAP (Z80, MDR) file, and the input line 'Path' must contain the drive
1 of the ROM of the ZX Spectrum. Firstly, you can select whether you want
1 of the 80x86 processor. This is one of the most powerful options in the
1 of some archivers, optimizing compression speed (it is still slow, but
1 of short packages (using combination OPEN#/PRINT#/CLOSE#) is recommended.
1 of self-modification. Namely, while many Z80 manuals declare that instruction
1 of real Sinclair Network is necessary. On real ZX Spectrum, the network uses
1 of patching various 'Trojan horses' and 'Viruses' into Z80 snapshot files
1 of patched 80x86 code will cause an error message). Include the option /?86
1 of option /! in chapter 2.1.
1 of network emulation problems will come from some of users of Warajevo
1 of many Spectrum emulators, including:
1 of extracted blocks will be automatically derived according to their position
1 of emulated sound.
1 of conversions are:
1 of bytes in the record. For files created using the PRINT# command, the sign
1 of binary image of standard ZX Spectrum ROM, you will get DCK file which will
1 of binary image of Timex HOME ROM, you will allow writing in the HOME ROM!
1 of all processor registers and the states of some emulated I/O devices. They
1 of all command line options which you may use with a compiled program.
1 of a tone record of some totally non-standard saved program, but principally,
1 of a tape file, snapshot file, cartridge file, or even another file in the
1 of a game on only one page of paper!
1 of Imploding (LZ77) algorithm. It depends on copying of some byte sequences.
1 of /& parameters:
1 occurrence of previously given sequence).
1 occurred to us that we could also integrate the programs ZXTOOLS and ZXSHELL
1 occur is written along with the pure BASIC program size, without variables.
1 obviously can not have net control on such low level. Therefore, the sender
1 obvious at a first look (this is a reason why it was so expensive). KEYPAD
1 obsolete options.
1 numerical variable names have the form
1 numerical keyboard behave like pressing the keys CAPS SHIFT + 5, 6, 7 and 8.
1 numeric value, or using the horizontal scrollbar. Activate the 'Maximal speed
1 nothing happens, but the driver will be loaded and activated). After this,
1 not, you should linearize the tape file, because there are excluded blocks
1 not, and the border color). In the case of the 128K or Timex snapshots the
1 not work, and some machine routines which use the Sinclair Network (for
1 not want recognition of non-standard load routines, which is very often the
1 not use any bytes in Spectrum RAM as workspace). After you press this key,
1 not understand a lot of things.
1 not true for most of the inhabitants. However, we hope that these problems
1 not the emulator kernel. The emulator itself does not parse them. These
1 not tell you anything special about them. On extended video modes the Timex,
1 not supported, conversion will fail; if a peripheral which the program uses
1 not support this port.
1 not related with the emulator itself, but with operating systems.
1 not recommended to call Tape Manager while loading with non-standard
1 not found in the current directory.
1 not forget our Spectrums. We had great interest when, in June 1991, we got a
1 not experienced Windows user) and update it later. When updating is finished,
1 not exist (although some projects made by independent authors do), so it is
1 not exactly the same as in the program, because characters with codes less
1 not emulated, but this is not important.
1 not emulated on the Timex version of the emulator. Instead, option /E on the
1 not emulate the Kempston joystick interface.
1 not be saved. The stack size is limited to about 1000 bytes. For example, a
1 not be present (the 'pure machine' will be activated). That's why this option
1 not be performed correctly (instead, use F255 255).
1 not be formatted.
1 not be compressed but only copied. The ESC key is checked only between
1 not be all-powerful. The best is to try it. If compiled program using this
1 not always on MS Windows and never on NT), and many melodies, simple or
1 not allow exact emulation of all AY chip features, including speech
1 not affect registers H or L, this prefix will be ignored. Monitor will display
1 normally generate CAPS SHIFT + 5, 6, 7 and 8, but this can be changed using
1 normal situations (but faster than using a real tape) and looks very like
1 non-standard routine, and most of them work. However, our 'EDGE RECOGNIZER'
1 non-standard loaders. When loading is finished, the original speed (that
1 non-standard load routines (for example the running screens, faster loading,
1 non-standard load routine, and edge recognizer will still work without any
1 non-standard access to screen (for example in loaders with counters) will
1 no programs on this site use the extra features of ZXS format which are not
1 no more problems with loaders which have more than one LD_EDGE routine.
1 no loading errors will appear. Incorrect loading will cause a loading error
1 no influence on the speed of the emulator. However, in most cases, it is
1 no guarantee that the converted program will work (if a converted program
1 next row, and so on. If clock pulse is set for a long time, KEYPAD controller
1 next chapter), so the full syntax for setting the DOS environment variable
1 newspapers that came from the enemy's territory, we got some information about
1 new releases of the emulator, the list of donators with values of donations.
1 never compressed. Also, special blocks exist which contain tone record
1 network administrator, if you don't have them). If you don't know about
1 net file is read in a buffer, and it will be read from the buffer (using IN)
1 negative number (if greater than 32767), and finally its high and low bytes
1 needs other part (the calling method is CHAIN, not EXEC, due to better memory
1 need to manually force loading of the wanted overlay level. Do not leave the
1 need space for the backup file, and the job is much faster if you don't want
1 need not worry about command line parameters), but describing command line
1 need not be seen at screen dump.
1 necessary to use the FAST algorithm. You need to use this algorithm if you do
1 necessary to change the graphics mode it uses due to incorrect detection,
1 necessary informations (start address etc.) for their execution. The Warajevo
1 necessary due to 'File name' being the key field, that's why it must be
1 necessary because this prevent calling these interrupts if there were no
1 near addresses), you must replace CALL 1218 and CALL 1366 with CALL SAVE and
1 native Warajevo format. So, empty tape have a format:
1 native Warajevo format, so options from this menu will not work when the
1 native Warajevo format, not with Lunter TAP files.
1 names, and file names are stored into the RAM to speed up working with the
1 names are not beautiful, nor descriptive, but this is price of automatization.
1 name, will be displayed a warning message "Non-Warajevo tape!!!" if the
1 name' is only an alias). The input line 'Volume label' may optionally contain
1 name on the destination cartridge file.
1 name of the tape you may use wildcards '*' and '?', but it is not very useful
1 name of the output file in the usual way.
1 name of the active snapshot file will always be TEMP.Z80, because it is a
1 name if they are in different directories.
1 name can be any valid filename). Set the emulators correctly, using the
1 name KTYME.DAT. If you are not happy with this convention of names, you may
1 must not select the same file for two different microdrives. (on a real
1 must not be visible, and a case when some parts of the sprite is not visible
1 must map net drive to be accessible by a letter, like ordinary local drive.
1 must be present. The ROM switching is done only in the lower 8K, while the
1 must be installed in this case.
1 music instrument. So, connect your synthesizer with PC (using Sound Blaster),
1 multicolor emulation. For details about using this option look at the
1 multicolor emulation mode, the emulator paints a picture simultaneously, not
1 multicolor effects. Unfortunately, such routines are extremely dependent of
1 multicolor effects even on medium fast computers.
1 multi-part program). The 'Home' and 'End' keys seek to the beginning and the
1 much slower.
1 much more data contains the actual program (or data, memory image, screen
1 much easier. The most important remark was the impossibility of loading and
1 much better characteristics. We should mention that we were known as quite
1 ms) a time compensation will be performed. On the other side, if passed time
1 moving of the highlight through the list box will move the block too. Pressing
1 move the next block using the same method.
1 mouse, the same effect is possible by pressing CTRL+F5 then using the arrow
1 mouse, emulation of the Kempston parallel interface for the printer through
1 mouse button). The emulator and the environment are split into two programs
1 motor is again off, the buffer is sent to the printer. One pixel on ZX printer
1 most probably indicates existence of a bug in the emulator. The address when
1 more. These programs are very dirty written, to be as many efficient as
1 more. Compression uses an Implode algorithm, similar to many archivers (ZIP,
1 more than one joystick emulation simultaneously, but not all combinations are
1 more than 64Kb long. So, one sampled record may be split into ten or more
1 more like brown). However, EGA still uses the old color palette, because EGA
1 more important). If you must save something to a real tape and you only have
1 more for correct operation, otherwise the emulator will work much slower than
1 more details, see chapters 2.8. and 7.9.4.
1 monochromatic modes. With 128K emulation you can determine whether you want
1 monitor, and return to monitor when PC reaches value <word>). If parameter
1 monitor log file.
1 monitor find a loader of some protected program, it will probably look like
1 moment, only the Warajevo emulator tries to emulate this. Such emulation (at
1 moment of screen updating in partial video emulating mode, mode of border
1 modified), as does the CS register. The registers SS and SP point to the
1 modified loaders, and surely, with absolutely non-standard loaders. There is
1 modern operating systems (the file WARAJEVO.ICO with MS Windows icon is also
1 mode. This will not work correctly on Warajevo. Also, it is possible (using
1 mode. The picture is not in color (/VC) or with very strange colors (/VW), it
1 mode. See description of the command option /!.
1 mode. If you want to delete the highlighted item, press 'Delete'.
1 mode' checkbox if you want to use the maximal possible speed of the emulator.
1 mode without any problems. Ensure for them about 500K of memory or more. The
1 mode which is implemented, so there is no need to make multicolor effects on
1 mode to IM <byte2>, if <byte2> is present. Parameter <byte1> may be '?', with
1 mode allows very fast updating of video memory, which allows implementation of
1 mode (more precisely, depending on bit 0 of the system variable FLAGS3
1 mode (although it is not frequent occurrence). The emulator updates screen
1 missing empty blocks will be created. The MLT support which is implemented in
1 minutes of tone record sampled at 22050 Hz needs about 800 Kb). So, you must
1 microdrive. The default value is the first unselected microdrive. In a window
1 microdrive motor is not active. This effect is implemented too (only F9 will
1 microdrive is marked with an asterisk. If you don't want severe problems, you
1 microdrive in the input line. This option will delete any file with the same
1 microdrive emulation is in chapter 2.5. This option does not work on the
1 method (including claiming, etc.). If the sender does not receive ACK in
1 messages), and sometimes needs tedious adjusting of some parameters before
1 messages like 'Incorrect hardware version' or 'Incorrect snapshot file'.
1 message so that you can use this with some program (typically as a initial
1 message if such a sequence appears in the code. So, if you do not trust some
1 merges Warajevo 1.5. format and Lunter's format into a practically unique
1 menu. Before this, you must first select the active tape. The shortcut for
1 menu, or using some commands from the 'DataBase' menu.
1 menu in the environment (shortcut F8), and some other options (for example
1 menu are the most powerful options in the whole program.
1 menu 'MdriveFiles'. This is all you need to know about microdrive emulation
1 mentioned problems. Some of them must not occur anytime, because they
1 mentioned earlier, TAP files are used for the emulation of real Spectrum
1 memory pointer is incremented by one after each byte. If any of values is '?',
1 memory image, a new 9-byte header for next bank follows, and so on.
1 memory for transferring long programs, a built-in RS232 interface, and this
1 memory expansions, and information which chunks of extra memory are RAM chunks
1 memory after the last screen updating. This feature allows very high quality
1 melody. Emulation of AY chip using beeper works (except with /SX), but using
1 means that all command parameters will be loaded from the file SPECSIM.CFG.
1 meaning, as you can see from following examples:
1 meaning), Ctrl+PgUp (move to top of the list) and Ctrl+PgEnd (move to the
1 meaning of the fields. These fields maybe have strange names, because names
1 meaning 'No change'.
1 meaning 'Kempston interface not present'. Timex version of the emulator does
1 may lay in range 0 to 311, or in range 0 to 261 on the Timex version of the
1 may have the following values:
1 may flicker when multicolor mode is not enabled (although rarely). In this
1 may cause crash.
1 may cause a loop such that the RESET key (F9) will not help. In such cases,
1 may be very useful if you call the environment from the emulator (current
1 may be printed on the printer, screen or a text file. Using a dialog, you may
1 may be loaded either in 48 or 128 Basic, on Warajevo emulator must be loaded
1 may be combined with setting the directory for temporary files, so you may
1 maximum working speed during loading programs from TAP or TZX files using
1 maximal allowed pulse width (e.g. these constants are proportional with these
1 matter what option /J is active.
1 material status is much better than 2 years ago, but unfortunately this is
1 marking you can select which records will be included in a report (see
1 marked as '?' (unknown), like S flag after BIT instruction. We discovered
1 many programs use this method for hiding some strange data on screen, and this
1 many editing commands which are seen in the Borland compilers.
1 manually in this case.
1 manual. For example, OUTI inscruction don't acts like this:
1 manual, so read the help file when you have problems!
1 manual of your music instrument. We want more to say that on the most of the
1 manipulations are sometimes necessary with multi-level games, because after
1 managers. Read about 'Virtual 8086' drivers in chapter 7.10. and description
1 managers (QEMM, EMM386, 386MAX, especially MS Windows). Also, very intensive
1 management, if this fact makes any sense to you).
1 management unit. This port is write only:
1 making external drivers for additional peripheral devices. Also, some
1 make a new release of the emulator soon!
1 main game! The emulator usually succeeds (by analyzing Z80 machine code) in
1 machines, is slower when KEYPAD emulation is active.
1 machines which use 'virtual 8086' mode, usually EMS drivers like EMM386,
1 machine, with unpractical emulation of the tape recorder etc.). It's origin
1 m, n, p ... represent numerical expressions which are rounded to the
1 lowest block (addresses 0-8191).
1 lowest allowed value of the parameter <word> is also 23900. but with the
1 lossing of time needed to update big buffers (this is the biggest lossing of
1 look at parameter <word> as 9-bit number. Bits B0 to B7 correspond to memory
1 long, but there are not that many different producers. It would be irrational
1 long, and changes the R register differently (for example, the program
1 long ago, to round off all the ideas from the legendary Clive Sinclair
1 logical structure of the sector, but changing the whole sector needs manual
1 logical block structure of each tape. There is also a file which keeps
1 locations in the buffer. Unfortunately, there is no guarantee that some
1 located in the directory FILES, but in the directory where the ZX emulator
1 located (on which tape or snapshot file), in which directory, on which
1 loads and automatically starts the program in '128' mode. On the Timex
1 loading. There is another time when you need to use the SLOW algorithm.
1 loading. However, there are some difficulties with using this option.
1 loading. Calling the environment using F10 while loading will nearly always
1 loading, you must use your external MIXER program (which is supplied with
1 loading with counters etc.). This is a great improvement over Lunter's
1 loading the main programs sample loading mode will be switched off, so you
1 loading speed of emulated tapes which retain full compatibility. For more
1 loading process, and change the base address of the Sound Blaster sound card
1 loading problems, you can try (if you want) to slightly change the last 3
1 loading on the original Spectrum including sound and border effects (use F4
1 loading error', but which with headerless files need not be the case. If SAVE
1 loading algorithm (described in chapter 2.4. too). If you select the option
1 loader that contains one primitive game which you can play while loading the
1 loaded from tape in the original program (so called MultiLevel Load Trap
1 lives). Also, it is possible to assign data about where the program is
1 little gap, 12 bytes follows (10 zeros and 2 #FF bytes) which represents
1 listed in the technical part of the manual.
1 list of sectors. The logical number of each sector will be displayed,
1 linked with this field will open a second dialog (will be described later)
1 linked to a 'Browse' button, which allows you to select the file using a file
1 lines on the paper (it should be slightly smaller, default is 66). The line
1 line" using OUT (more precisely, negated values, because receiving and sending
1 line on border has many different colors, but on Warajevo 2.0. emulator one
1 line long enough to detect whether some other station already transmits data
1 limited number of cases. Otherwise, nearly all the emulator code would be
1 like the main configuration file). If you start the environment with the
1 like in the ZX32 emulator (although it is much better than in release 2.0.
1 like in Windows 95 (this is not real button, but a field in the status line,
1 like combination of U and E commands.
1 like RRP (IX+nn),r etc. These instructions rotate or shift the indexed
1 like Aquaplane will cause ugly border flickering. In such cases synchronous
1 level). After "claiming", IN from the net returns 0 (free), except when shared
1 level part) of the sync bit.
1 letters are displayed which represent the active memory bank for all eight
1 letter to reach it.
1 letter E in this option (e.g. use /EO or /EOX), and the emulator will use
1 letter 'R' shows the currently active ROM with the following meaning: 'S' for
1 length of the tape file. The 'Compressed size' is the sum of the sizes of all
1 length of the compiled program. It will typically be about 10-25 Kb longer
1 least possible side-effects on the screen. After loading the program (more
1 least five equal bytes by a 4-byte code #ED #ED #xx #yy, which stands for
1 lead-in signal, then a 528 bytes long data block. First 15 bytes of the data
1 lead-in signal, then 15 bytes of the sector header, last byte of the header is
1 later in this chapter.
1 last byte, their length (as shown in the emulator) is not always an integer.
1 language, tape file, snapshot file, cartridge file, or other-type file
1 known that Spectrum 128 has built-in one-way MIDI interface (output only).
1 knowledge of machine language is necessary, for both the Spectrum and the PC.
1 knowledge of machine code). These instructions have a following form:
1 know that our implementation of Sinclair Network don't work in the program
1 keys. Press ENTER when finished.
1 keys. A warning message will not be displayed if the processor is in 'Virtual
1 keys locks up). However, there is a limit that (on VGA card) the emulator must
1 keys could be mapped to be like some labels on the PC's numerical keyboard,
1 keys 'Delete' (grey) and 'Scroll lock'.
1 keyboards). Its keys have the same labels as the PC, except that 'NumLock'
1 keyboard. The keys are mapped in this way:
1 keyboard too:
1 keyboard interrupt, which keeps keyboard state in similar way as on real
1 key. The option /JA will read this port from the PC analogue joystick. The
1 key. Such single-stepping is much more powerful than on real Spectrum, you can
1 key is analogous to the meaning of the keys in the emulator kernel itself.
1 key above another. The layout of the other keys is the same. But on the
1 kernel. Sound is often as good as the X128 emulator by James McKay or even
1 kept for a case of the unexpected interrupt 0DH. If this report occurs, this
1 keeping timing data in a snapshot file.
1 keep control bytes (parity bytes) of the blocks, but the emulator calculates
1 joystick emulation (these options are /JK, /JM or /JA), the first will act
1 itself to them, so a lot of multicolor programs will work correctly.
1 itself is located (e.g. the parent directory of the directory FILES).
1 itself by pressing F10 (or clicking the right mouse button). Starting from
1 itself (it is important only for ROM routines), because emulator only buffers
1 its real effect is:
1 items such as list boxes, the 'OK' and 'Cancel' buttons, input lines, radio
1 it must be transferred to the Spectrum using the option 'Send communication
1 it may be impractical and slow on floppy disc.
1 it is slightly different. This emulator is an illegal prerelease of the
1 it is not recommended to run programs designed solely for the Spectrum 48K
1 it is not recommended to keep switching from 'Database' to other options.
1 it is not possible to load non-standard saved programs. This option simply
1 it is minimal allowed width of the bit 1.
1 it allows implementation of ROM expansions), but these "side effects" are not
1 is written. If the block represents any header, the name of the block is
1 is written, and the type is 'Headerless' or 'Compressed' if the block is
1 is when the receiver expects data package, but the sender sent a header
1 is very slow). However, this compiling has the following limitations:
1 is very large this may be rather slow, so it is recommended to use some
1 is very flexibe, there is only the question on how to transfer Spectrum
1 is used, not after self-modification. One Spectrum program ('Batman') rely on
1 is used for appending a new record (it is only a valid option when the
1 is unnecessary.
1 is unknown to us (we suppose that the program is from the Slovenia Republic,
1 is the value at the address shown by the field 'ARG'. The complex implicit
1 is the same as
1 is the only format which this emulator supports, we allow partial conversions
1 is selected, you may also select which device will be used for AY chip
1 is possible only on very fast computers, so with the Sound Blaster disabling
1 is performed using the command /A (it will be automatically inserted for you
1 is often useful to put some of these in the configuration file DEFAULT.CFG
1 is not supported, it will be ignored. From 'Emulation Info' blocks only bits
1 is not recommended with this option because very precise timing is needed.
1 is not possible. Instead, you must use the command LOAD* from BASIC.
1 is not painted smoothly, sound is distorted, the system is relatively slow -
1 is not longer that duration of 228 T states on real Spectrum. If this
1 is not emulated on these cards. We founded such problem on some places into
1 is intelligently, in meaning that the blocks may be overlapped.
1 is in the background, than vice versa.
1 is impossible under any version of MS Windows.
1 is greater than on real machine (for example, due to performing some
1 is frequency modulated signal, and it contains of a lead-in signal, a sync
1 is emulated with a one pixel (or with a square of four pixels, depending of /P
1 is due to interaction between sound generation and switching of 128K memory
1 is disabled, for the same reason.
1 is different, mainly for joystick reading. Then address bits A8 and A9
1 is described etc.). The entered text will be stored in the file SOFTWARE.DBT.
1 is called the header. The header keeps the program name and information about
1 is as follows. The text which describes the producer name may be relatively
1 is also supported by Lunter's Z80 emulator, X128, SP_UKV and Wspecem
1 is almost identical, with small differences. The keys '*' and '/' are above
1 is a sixteen-bit value too.
1 is a bit complex, but if you understand this example, this will not be a great
1 is a 'bus idle' port. This port keeps (unintentionally) the current value that
1 is Zebra OS_64). AROS programs may be or may not to be autorun programs. Both
1 is 64 Kb above the first megabyte of RAM (linear address 1114112). No DOS
1 is 1. This means "Return for xxxx bytes and copy yyyy". Now, we will explain
1 introduced). So, the format of the TAP files starting from release 2.0.
1 introduced which works better under MS Windows. At the moment, this parameter
1 introduced user-definable palette). The WARAJEVO.PAL file is optimized for
1 introduced in release 2.5. is the possibility of switching from the 48K
1 introduce the possibility of changing these parameters directly from the
1 into the executable program MONTY128.EXE in which the AY sound chip will be
1 into the emulator, program will not be continued correctly in all cases. We
1 into the cartridge dock on Timex computer. Although the EXROM bank is not
1 into our emulator.
1 into an endless loop (of course, F10 will return into the environment). This
1 into 48 Basic, like on real Spectrum).
1 into 128 or Timex mode; if the computer for which the program is designed is
1 interrupt mode, and interrupt flip-flops IFF1 and IFF2).
1 interprets the keys differently depending on '128 Basic' or 'Calculator'
1 interpreter. We must remark that the Spectrum Logo programs may have more
1 internal two-character identification code, which allows you to have 2 files
1 internal stack 1000 bytes long (you may change SS and SP if this space is not
1 internal purposes).
1 internal monitor will disassemble these instructions:
1 internal code (due to space saving). The full text which correspond to the
1 interlacing the channels. This often sounds very good (but sometimes is
1 interfaces, Multiface 128, AMX mouse, full emulation of the RS232 socket or
1 interface, you can use options in this submenu to send and receive tape
1 interface net file is locked or changed, which means that sender writes (or
1 interest in computers thanks to the ZX Spectrum. For this reason, we are a
1 interchanging was not successful.
1 intelligent algorithm fails due to any reason, you may force sample loading
1 instructions. Returning to normal mode (Z80 emulation mode) may be performed
1 instructions. If you have the prefix #DD (or #FD) before an instruction which
1 instructions, which would not be possible with full emulation of these bits.
1 instructions, for saving and loading blocks directly from the disc. You must
1 instructions that the program keeps on the screen while the next block is
1 instructions on addresses 1388 and 1232 in the LD_BYTES and SA_BYTES routines
1 instructions (MOVSD instead of MOVSW) for speed up RAM paging twice. Slow RAM
1 instruction: 'OUT (C),0'.
1 instruction. Instruction pair POP AF and PUSH AF will update these flags
1 instruction, and for expanding OUT instruction the handler is called with the
1 instruction which is very slow on the emulator), time excess will be
1 instruction in standard ROM (calculator) is only partially smart. This
1 instruction after EI together with EI in one step.
1 installed handlers (else this would cause a system crash). On entry to the
1 input fields 'Lowest linear address' and 'Highest linear address'. Using
1 input box is the place where you enter the name of the file to load, or the
1 inline parameters which follows RST 40 instructions as 'DB n' until monitor
1 inline parameters see description of D command). This is useful when you don't
1 inline parameters if current instruction is RST (for more informations about
1 initialization of the Timex computer is finished (an example of such software
1 initial values for the command parameters (see chapter 2.1.) will be picked
1 initial test sequence.
1 initial test sequence, states is grouped in groups of four states for more
1 initial attribute from 56 to 7 may cause incorrect operation of some
1 informations does the Timex has contended RAM), please send it to us!
1 informations between the emulator and the environment, but DEFAULT.CFG acts
1 informations about video timing on Timex, so if you have such infos (and
1 informations about actual color palette which will be used (the organization
1 information about which tapes exist (filename TAPES.ZX). These files are not
1 information about the files (type, length, etc.) which may be useful if you
1 indexed arguments in fact have eight different codes.
1 increases or decreases the parameter <delay>, and pressing F11 or F12
1 incorrect use of the option 'Edit'.
1 includes Lunter TAP format as a special case. So, Warajevo can work with
1 incident than planed action. This is a reason why broadcasting don't work yet.
1 in two's complement form.
1 in this moment. If no pulses are detected, the station transmits a single byte
1 in this menu. At this moment, the rules of conversions are:
1 in this case).
1 in this case), and when the program is on a cartridge file, automatic running
1 in these 2 input lines, you may change this convention (at your own risk) and
1 in the tape file. The 'Percentual result' displays compression efficiency
1 in the same directory as the environment.
1 in the official Z80 manuals, which behave as on the original machine. Our
1 in the list box using the arrow keys, PgUp, PgDn, Home, End (with the usual
1 in the environment will be much easier. Square brackets mean that that
1 in the destination tape file (or appended to end of the file if you highlight
1 in the assigned program flicker too much. For an explanation of possible
1 in the 48K version, but when the parameter <word> is omitted, the system
1 in the 'Setup' menu.
1 in snapshot files, due to more flexibility (such organization allows running
1 in snapshot files, but in separate DCK files due to necessary flexibility.
1 in register R14 have following meanings:
1 in register R14 have following meaning:
1 in programs which access video memory during making hires border effects (for
1 in many cases this implementation works quite good.
1 in it. The 'Original size' is a sum of the uncompressed sizes of all blocks
1 in interrupt mode 2, else this address is given by formula DPEEK (256*I+255)
1 in hexadecimal and decimal form, then will be eventually displayed as a
1 in graphics mode, a window showing the content of the screen in the emulator
1 in fact, a format for disc emulation, not for tape emulation, but since this
1 in chapter 2.1.). All options from this menu will open a dialog which allows
1 in an Army's camp, with an improvised generator, and a voltage that varied
1 in addition to the classic video mode (256x192 pixels with 8x8 pixels color
1 in a window, but also to display the progress of some long job:
1 in Sarajevo. We sent a general request and in June 1994, we got Lunter's
1 in ROM, '(Standard ROM)' or '(Derby ROM)' will be displayed, depending on the
1 in Derby ROM (128 version only) are executed in one step. This accelerates
1 in 'TZX conversion setup' dialog, then load created TZX from 'Start' button.
1 impuls' determines maximal allowed width of the bit 1. Maybe the most
1 impossible on real Spectrum 128!
1 important. We fully emulate paging of RAM addresses above 49152 (including
1 important constant is 'Const threshold'. Negated value of this constant
1 implemented.
1 implemented, so even very time-dependent routines (like in 'WHAM the music
1 implemented only on EGA and VGA graphic cards.
1 implemented in the ZX32 emulator), which can be activated using the /QX
1 implemented if you want (for any reason) to cancel autostart of a program
1 implemented following features:
1 implemented (HOME, EXROM and DOCK) which are divided into eight 8-Kbyte
1 implementation needs complete reorganization of whole emulator, so we prolong
1 immediately started with the screen displayed, then the emulator will enter
1 images, but first buffer contains standard ROM, and second buffer contains
1 ignored. This conversion does not support the compressed ZXT/ZXS format.
1 ignored (can anybody confirm this to us)?
1 if you want to run three times faster than the real Spectrum (of course, if
1 if you want to move to the record with short name PENETRATOR, you may enter
1 if you want to be 100% secure when running a snapshot file with unknown
1 if you use the emulator with these programs. Probability of this problem is
1 if you know about working with a real microdrive. The MDR file format is
1 if you are afraid about such problems, put the switch /Y56 into the
1 if the sector is not assigned to any file). If the sector is allocated, you
1 if the sector is good, else you are asked 'Adjust this sector?'. Select OK if
1 if the 48K program supports AY sound). Starting from release 2.5. snapshot
1 if sound disturbs you). It is recommended that you switch on full,
1 if some other option requires additional memory space. If you want to use the
1 if it is written it must be '.TAP'. Omit the names of the drive and
1 if it is in ROM. If there is no breakpoint, this field will be empty.
1 if BC <> 0 then
1 identification number 5 will be stored in the TAP file as a fifth block.
1 i.e. if corresponding mask bits is one, else they will return zeroes. When
1 i.e. if corresponding mask bits is one, else they will return zeroes.
1 however want to know principles of such cracking, search for a documentation
1 how to do it. For loading levels from tape, automatization is usually not
1 hospitals didn't have power for two months!). When we had electricity it was
1 horizontal MMU register and control register may be changed.
1 hold the mouse button, you can move the window to a new position. Without the
1 him for permission - we hope that he will not be angry with us). We decided
1 highlighted words or phrases in the help window, this means that you can get
1 hexadecimal, it must be preceded by a hash (for example #3EC0). The special
1 help, or using the monitor to skip critical I/O instruction).
1 headerless blocks). When you have loaded the desired blocks, select this
1 header, but we allow manual entering of emulation type (this is necessary if
1 header). Extra parameters represents ASCII byte values of a file name.
1 header according to the header information), and then data dependent on
1 head". After a few seconds all the cartridge will be erased. Only this effect
1 haven't got enough space, use the 'Exclude' option instead of 'Delete'.
1 have these options (for example, all adventure games), and possibility of
1 have these constants modified. Constant 'Const delay' determines minimal
1 have the extension .Z80 and they are compatible with Lunter's snapshot
1 have the correct structure. These sectors may be created only by improper
1 have the character CHR$ 0 as the first character of the name (hidden files).
1 have changed the settings enter the emulator using F10 then immediately exit
1 have at least 2 Mb of RAM. Also, linear addressing of memory space is needed
1 have additional functions. Unfortunately, the way they are mapped must be
1 have a computer on which the emulator works at the natural speed.
1 have Sound Blaster compatible sound card (it is important to say that we use
1 has the following meaning:
1 has shortcut F9.
1 has settings which is very close to the colors on the real ZX Spectrum. If the
1 hardware) so we will not keep it into MDR file. That's why, sector length is
1 hardware version' error message.
1 hardware configuration saved in the snapshot file (e.g. whether the
1 handler the CX register contains the address of the unrecognized I/O port.
1 handler may perform direct changing of memory content (even ROM content, so
1 handler for emulating some memory expansion for the Spectrum from 48K to 80K
1 greatly reduced starting from release 2.0.
1 greatest package length on the Sinclair Network). Try, for example, to type
1 greater under DOS than under Windows).
1 greater priority than our handler if processor is 80386 (or better), because
1 graphics mode, set the variable WARAJEVO in the DOS environment to G using
1 graphics card is not 'VGA' or 'Autodetect' you will not have the option of
1 gradually line by line, so programs which don't flicker on real Spectrum still
1 got such a file is not important) into a valid DCK file which is usable in
1 good sources of money (although much better than 2 years ago), so every
1 good programmers, especially in assembly language.
1 giving four 'silly' video modes.
1 given name doesn't exist). All operations in the 'TapeFiles' menu will be
1 given in the technical part of the manual.
1 generation, digital sound effects, exact emulation of noise generator etc.
1 generation will be smooth enough to allow correct loading, so practically all
1 generation (so interrupts occur 60 times per second), extended video modes,
1 generates the signs '6', '+', '1' and '2' respectively. The key 'Insert' also
1 games, hints for solving a game, name of the magazine in which this program
1 games which load levels from a tape (this is firstly implemented in XZX
1 games erase the sprites and repaint them synchronously with interrupt which
1 game, Painting program, etc.).
1 functions. The ROM routine which reads from the KEYPAD interprets the
1 fully transparent to Spectrum programs), where the program immediately jumps
1 fully decoded, so its image repeats itself 8 times (e.g. at addresses 0-8191,
1 full screen mode, except if you install task switch handler using option /!1.
1 ftp.nvg.unit.no/pub/sinclair/snaps/games/by-letter/d/diagram.zip
1 ftp.nvg.unit.no directory /pub/sinclair/snaps
1 ftp.gns.getronics.nl directory /pub/os/sinclair
1 frozen), hoping to get this emulator to compare our program and his program.
1 front panel) on the screen until you pressed a key. On Timex version of the
1 front of binary image of it to become a valid DCK file. 64 Kb DOCK RAM disc
1 from this file. For example, if you want to work on a 486 machine with a VGA
1 from the top to the bottom of the screen). The emulator (without the /QX
1 from the real tape. This works well for the programs that use standard load
1 from the operating system). The file SPECSIM.CFG will automatically be
1 from the database, because using the database automatically sets option /A.
1 from the address 65535. We wrote the handler for this interrupt routine.
1 from the BLASTER variable in DOS environment). If the 128K or Timex emulation
1 from the 'DataBase' menu) will set this parameter.
1 from the 'DataBase' menu will be related to the database in this directory.
1 from some of earlier releases of the emulator.
1 from real tapes using a real tape recorder, either indirectly in the
1 from original tape, using audio samples. It was developed by Creative Labs,
1 from Zagreb, Croatia (we don't know where is he now exactly, so we didn't ask
1 from Timex ROM.
1 from TRD format to TAP format, and vice versa. To complete the conversion,
1 from RAMTOP (use this only if you know exactly what you are doing).
1 from DOS giving this name as a parameter, the given program will
1 from BASIC, or using 'Format' option from the 'Microdrive' submenu of the
1 from 28 countries, from all 6 continents (Argentina, Australia, Austria,
1 from 150 V to 300 V! The greatest part of ZXTOOLS (which was presented in the
1 frequency will be displayed. Since such blocks may have unused bits in the
1 frequency and input device, and whether the program produces sound during
1 frame. The emulator in this mode draws the picture in a one time. So, programs
1 fourth 8, etc. and last option has number 16384). To keep permanent TZX
1 found sequence of bytes.
1 found on the Internet.
1 formats of other emulators.
1 format. If the active tape file is a Warajevo tape file, use the dialog to
1 format. Also, easy conversion from one format to another is possible (and to
1 format, we do not put in snapshot file some things that are important for
1 format, there are two parts: signatures and data. In our example coding of
1 format, storing is possible only at the end of the tape.
1 format similar to format used in PKLITE, but unlike PKLITE where signature
1 format of such files is described in chapter 7.9.4.
1 format of some other emulator, on which the Spectrum program is located.
1 format is also implemented in the Z80 emulator by Gerton Lunter and in the
1 format doesn't contain data about program paths, so they will be ignored.
1 format (for example, SNA, SP, BLK, SNP, TZX, LTP, VOC, SIT etc.), the
1 form of short one-byte ACK package (this is simply byte 1), using the same
1 form accepted by '48 Basic' MOVE x$,y$. That's why in '+3 Basic' some
1 force the startup routine and startup stack to be located at an arbitrary
1 for viewing some data. One element is highlighted. You can move the highlight
1 for viewing and changing a whole sector area (see chapter 3.4.2), so the
1 for this size distance can be maximally 255). If yyyy differs from 2, the next
1 for this option is Shift+F8.
1 for the tape emulation. In fact, this format is the same as Lunter's TAP
1 for the presence of 'Escape' sequences. Also, you can set a time after which
1 for the left joystick, e.g. /JN /JM. The Timex version of the emulator does
1 for the emulator. Then, you must to know that the applications SPEC48.EXE and
1 for solving this problem without EMS memory or DOS extenders, but its
1 for serious applications you must search for B G Services interface. With a
1 for manual entering of the paper size, and the 'OK' and 'Cancel' buttons. The
1 for loading headers with corresponding blocks or 'H' for loading headerless
1 for here so you must look at the technical part of the manual (chapter 7.14.).
1 for a files created using SAVE* command, not using PRINT# (so-called non-PRINT
1 for XWindows by Erik Kunze and Des Harriot). This extra byte on Lunter's
1 for Windows 95 has a better emulation), so a small number of programs still
1 for 'virtual 8086' mode is disabled. For more details, see the description of
1 following: the real Spectrum draws the picture sequentially (line by line,
1 following way:
1 following the header (or, more precisely, the block which should follow the
1 following order: 5, 4, 1, 2, 3. If controller detects that keys positions
1 following machines: 25 MHz Laptop 486, 33 MHz 386, 66 MHz 486, 100 MHz
1 following a single #ED is not taken into a block, for example #ED #00 #00 #00
1 following BASIC program (we assume that you know something about the syntax
1 follow immediately after. The signature is necessary because we noticed that
1 flowchart in TRANSHLP.DOC which will explain which method is the best in each
1 flip-flops like command A48, but it also recovers system variables COL,
1 flip-flops IFF1 and IFF2 are displayed below the signs 'I' and 'J'.
1 flickering on real Spectrum (like Spectres) will be removed.
1 flickering in some programs, try increasing or decreasing this value, and the
1 flickering in programs which don't cause flickering on a real Spectrum is
1 flexibility, so saving is possible only at the end of the tape. For these
1 flashing lines appear on the Spectrum border. If the communication fails,
1 five byte LROS header at address 0), the only important thing is that the
1 firstly expects package which contains a header. If it conclude that received
1 first. After selecting the option 'Edit' (which has the shortcut F6), you
1 first legal change of the video memory (using regular Z80 instructions),
1 first group of radio buttons are for selecting paper length. There are two
1 first byte of the instruction at address <word> will be replaced with 199, a
1 first access needs some time). The pointer table will be removed from memory
1 finished, it is not bad idea to exit the environment and reboot the computer.
1 fine in majority of programs with hires border effects (like 'Vectron', 'GU!',
1 files. If the directory does not contain any tapes (i.e. a TAP file), and if
1 files, so if somebody has a binary dump of any LROS or AROS program, please
1 files) contain additional informations about the file:
1 files may be selected in the usual way.
1 files from the 48K version can be loaded into the Timex version (the chances
1 files from 48K versions of the emulator may be loaded into the 128K version
1 files created with this emulator. If the name is omitted, the assumed name is
1 files are files which contain a Spectrum memory image, including the contents
1 files "cartridges".
1 filenames and current status parameter settings. If you start the environment
1 filename will be automatically created depending of IX and DE values (more
1 filename mask to use as a filter for the Files list box (for example, *.*).
1 filename including path and extension, and in this case the name in 'File
1 filename in the usual way.
1 file. The TZX format is much more complex than the TAP format, so some
1 file. Some examples will help understanding of such organization. 16 Kb long
1 file. For 128K snapshots, you must previously select the page (16K long) to
1 file. Extra features of the ZXS format will simply be ignored.
1 file. During conversion, only details which are related to tape emulation
1 file. After this, converted programs will not work, because loading from
1 file, until you close this file by giving command O again. When output file is
1 file, but if such a file doesn't exist in the given path, it will be
1 file), passes this converted file to the emulator, and starts it (all these
1 file) marker. Every block contains following:
1 file'. Due to their complexity, every button will be explained separately:
1 file will be stored before the highlighted block in the destination tape
1 file will be loaded, but started only if it contains auto-boot programs like
1 file which emulates the well-known Spectrum emulator cartridge for the Timex
1 file using the 'Parameters' dialog in the submenu 'Tapes' of the 'TapeFiles'
1 file types which you want to register (default is all, but you maybe don't
1 file to the printer, in two columns with page breaks. The dialog for
1 file names if the database is too huge, what is the case with the WOS archive
1 file lengths are between 4887 and 138465 bytes.
1 file is not divisible by 8192, the converted file will be filled with zeros
1 file is always "OK". In Lunter TAP files, the parity byte is also kept in the
1 file into TZX, turn on checkbox 'Sample normal blocks rather than copy them'
1 file information panel, the standard button 'Cancel', one other action button
1 file if you highlight EOF marker). If the active tape is in Lunter TAP
1 file descriptor follows.
1 file and name the output file (default is CASCII.TXT) using the method
1 file SPECSIM.CFG instead from DEFAULT.CFG (this is implemented mainly for
1 file DEFAULT.CFG. Alternatively, if you don't want to calculate it, after you
1 file (with prompt '>' to indicate that is a command) including eventually
1 file (or appended to the end of the file if you highlight the EOF marker). If
1 file (during writing this file is locked). Just here is the greatest problem
1 file (default is PASASCII.TXT) using the method desribed earlier. The rules
1 file (BASIC, CODE, etc.). Finally, for EOF records the symbol EOF will be
1 fields may be truncated (due to limited paper width) but this will be done
1 field unique when the filenames are the same. 'Browse' automates entering
1 field should contain the name of the company which produces or distributes
1 field of the record is set (we say that this record is marked), this record
1 field during record editing.
1 field 'ARG' will have the value of IX register incremented by three. '(ARG)'
1 features which make it unique, like:
1 faster execution of BASIC programs, and the display of the inverted cursor in
1 faster computer.
1 faster computer). This routine will take about 20 seconds even on 133 MHz
1 fast must the computer be on which the emulator is run to achieve 100%
1 fast enough computer (100 MHz and faster), turn on synchronous border
1 fast computers /SB is often better), or with programs where /SB gives harsh
1 failed. Most probably, the file WARAJEVO.EXE wasn't found.
1 failed. Most probably, something is wrong with your snapshot file name, or
1 failed for any reason (for example if the disc was write protected) the
1 fact that net claiming always success fictively, but this will not always
1 fact that VOC files may be huge.
1 extremely fast computers. We want to say that recently we discovered a method
1 extra video modes in the technical part of the manual.
1 extra byte. If you create MDR file from the environment of the Warajevo
1 extension in name <filename>, '.DAT' will be assumed.
1 extension .TAP, but his format is rather poor in comparasion with the native
1 extension .TAP (we will call them simply tapes).
1 extenders (like DPMI) are needed, the environment directly accesses memory
1 explanation of these parameters, see the chapters about network emulation
1 explanation of all the bits. The marked register may be changed using TAB.
1 experience shows that on all machines with clock frequency above 33 MHz most
1 expected time, it repeats whole operation (of course, including net claiming).
1 expansions, LROS and AROS programs. The contents of these banks are not keep
1 expansions on the Timex 2068 computer (only on Timex version of the
1 expanded a bit to allow aborting of programs in the Spectrum environment.
1 exists, but it still occupies the space in the file. That's why, this option
1 exist, an empty tape with this name will be created. The active tape may be
1 executing will be continued with updating the front panes, until the program
1 executing a decryption routine, you may use command X followed with <byte>.
1 executes quite an ugly routine program execution, especially on slower
1 executes command P with a rest of parameters (see command P).
1 excess parameters are ignored.
1 except with option /O. Starting from release 2.0, the emulator now recognizes
1 example, the game TT Racer) don't work either. Maybe these things (and better
1 example, some calculations in BASIC). In such cases, key autorepeat may
1 example, let it be G:\SHARED). This directory must allow full rights (both
1 example, it is possible to implement emulation of an AMX mouse using the PC
1 example, if you want to sort by category and then by full name, put the
1 example, if any program after its start expects loading of any block (for
1 example, ZX printer) is not emulated good, due to bug into emulator or due to
1 example some data) which is somewhere else. This mode can be very efficiently
1 example some COPY programs), and then we recommend the use of the SLOW
1 example in 'Four soccer simulator', 'Vectron' and 'Top gun'.
1 example 'Aquaplane').
1 exact timing of interaction between Z80 processor and Spectrum ULA chip. This
1 exact sequence of events will be as follows (you may skip this part if it is
1 exact AY sound using only the PC beeper using a method of adaptive
1 everywhere, there was little electrical power (at one time even the
1 every word, the memory pointer will be incremented by two.
1 every sector is 543 bytes long. If the file length is not divisible by 543,
1 every moment when the electricity was on to develop the program. It was often
1 every channel which has volume greater than 7 (including envelope effects),
1 every byte which will be stored in memory.
1 eventually, in accordance with 'filters' set by the option /O), and the
1 even two #ED's are encoded into #ED #ED #02 #ED. Finally, every byte directly
1 even theoretically on some Spectrum emulator (if we exclude quite morbid
1 even more so than Lunter's program. Nearly all programs will work, and some
1 etc.). After this, file WARAJEVO.REG which contains registration entries for
1 etc.) to program WARAJEVO.EXE using utility MAKEREG.EXE. First, unpack file
1 estimated, so some programs still will not work quite perfect. However,
1 establish automated starting of the program on the tape. This option makes
1 essentially different and expanded ROM (24K) which also contains some new
1 especially if you don't install task switch handler (without handler it will
1 escape sequences. Each program has the documentation which describe which
1 errors. We mainly solve this problem by using various methods. If you have a
1 error messages. After this, influence to the output file depends of the given
1 environment. Namely, every option has its corresponding number. The first
1 environment, or directly into the emulator kernel (more about transferring
1 environment, although it can be used independently. Giving the option /C
1 environment will perform automatic conversion into a Warajevo file TEMP.Z80
1 environment variable WARAJEVO).
1 environment screen a main menu appears. You can access the menu options using
1 environment in separate files named for example LEVEL1.OVL, LEVEL2.OVL, etc.
1 environment in one compact logical unit. That's how the environment got to
1 environment directly modifies one COM port, if you used 'Communication'
1 environment creates in a report files. During testing we don't found all
1 environment as the emulator's 'main menu', not as a different program!
1 environment and start it again.
1 entered the monitor. You must make difference between Q and E commands. Q acts
1 entered the monitor.
1 entered the monitor (e.g. undo changes of memory pages). Parameters <byte1>,
1 entered in either decimal or hexadecimal system. If the number is
1 enter the environment of the emulator, which will be described in detail in
1 enter new data (this is only solution when the database is empty), press the
1 enough space on the disc for the backup file. If you do not have enough
1 enough fast computer, do not think about executing of Spectrum programs in a
1 end of the tape.
1 end of the tape, respectively. You can leave the Tape Manager by pressing
1 end of the database). As in the 'Seek' option, the wildcards ? and * are
1 emulators, and by the XZX emulator for XWindows.
1 emulators which don't support snapshot files.
1 emulators through the network. When greater packages are used, problems with
1 emulators include this effect too.
1 emulators for the Windows platform (We want to point out ZX32 by Vaggelis
1 emulator...
1 emulator. This only affects the program when you start the emulator kernel
1 emulator. Release 2.51. allows direct loading from tape of practically all
1 emulator. From documentation we got information about many Spectrum emulators
1 emulator, symbolically called 'Warajevo Spectrum emulator' which should have
1 emulator, so Microsoft UNC convention about names is not supported. So, you
1 emulator, or due to some not implemented feature (which is unknown to us) in
1 emulator, for anybody who knows to use it, because by taking full control
1 emulator, else it will not be.
1 emulator, created file will always have one extra byte, so if you select 254
1 emulator, content of all eventual memory expansions (DOCK etc.) are not kept
1 emulator, and Lunter's Z80 emulator also supports this feature). Since
1 emulator, all video modes will be displayed correctly.
1 emulator). Their length may vary from 10 to 254 sectors, and if you select
1 emulator). More about DCK files can be found in chapters 2.8. and 7.9.4. The
1 emulator). Clearly, using this kind of conversion, after copying all of the
1 emulator) you can test whether a 48K program supports some Spectrum 128K
1 emulator with no active snapshot file will cause the activating of the
1 emulator will substitute them with /U0 and /U2 respectively. During
1 emulator will deal with this file like in previous cases. But, if the archive
1 emulator will create a temporary directory called ZIPRUN (as a subdirectory
1 emulator will be ignored. Select the output filename in the usual way.
1 emulator will be executed when you run this program from the database. When
1 emulator was not started with the /E option (i.e. the Interface 1 wasn't
1 emulator up to release 3.03. This message will also be displayed when you try
1 emulator treats any bytes which follow after this sequence like 80x86
1 emulator too. The option /# will automatically activate option /E. More about
1 emulator to produce an error message if you insert the wrong diskette into
1 emulator this byte has no meaning. Our emulator determines write-protect
1 emulator that although war in our country finished two years ago, the
1 emulator must be 48 or 128 to specify the abort in '48 Basic' or '128 Basic'.
1 emulator itself, due to the purely heuristic nature of them. So, pressing F5
1 emulator it points to the parallel memory bank (see chapter 7.2.). The
1 emulator is very slow. But, ROM paging is extremely fast (this is not case in
1 emulator introduces special DCK files which keep content and configuration of
1 emulator in which the user must disable screen generation to allow loading!
1 emulator if the break point is in a data area instead on the beginning of the
1 emulator has no full control of situation. The consequence is conflict with
1 emulator gives a chance to next active channel. So, if it is only one active
1 emulator generates the interrupts using quite different method than release
1 emulator draws the picture like the real Spectrum, so any possibility of
1 emulator did not successfully detect a Sound Blaster compatible sound card.
1 emulator determines whether the cartridge is write-protected, but in our
1 emulator detects the presence of 'Escape' sequences which patch 80x86 machine
1 emulator by James McKay, the XZX emulator by Erik Kunze and Des Harriot, the
1 emulator by James McKay from Great Britain) and conversions to and from the
1 emulator but this is not a great pity because Timex has a native multicolor
1 emulator automatically recovers values of the segment registers (including
1 emulator also emulates the TS2040 printer (similar to the ZX printer), and
1 emulator acts as Escape sequence. For details, see chapter 5.2.
1 emulator about the presence of the newly created tape.
1 emulator SP_UKV uses the SPC format too.
1 emulator (this number means the number of the scan line on the real Spectrum
1 emulator (but it works very good, in opposite to network emulation). It is
1 emulation. For example, if you give /JK /JM the left joystick will be
1 emulation, the sequence of bytes with codes #ED #00 (on a real Z80 processor
1 emulation, switching on multicolor emulation, and parameters related to
1 emulation, but satisfies, and it is implemented without slowing down other
1 emulation). However, emulation is still not perfect (only the ZX32 emulator
1 emulation with any program which supports this interface (for example, better
1 emulation where AY behaviour is fully emulated by software, and calculated
1 emulation of the video system and interrupt system. However, except in
1 emulation of the tape recorder will be written in the chapter 2.4. In the
1 emulation of the delay introduced by interaction between the Z80 processor
1 emulation of the bits 3 and 5 in the F register, emulation of the disc
1 emulation of the Spectrum +3, which are supported in some other emulators.
1 emulation of an ordinary Spectrum 128 or Spectrum +2. For more details, see
1 emulation of a bicycle using a helicopter, but we say that emulation works,
1 emulation needs more computer resources, so it is not suitable for slow
1 emulation needs more computer resources, and it is not recommended on very
1 emulation is recommended. Also, asynchronous emulation may cause "snow" on
1 emulation is not active. This is done because with this bit as zero ROM
1 emulation is not active).
1 emulation is enabled. We know only two programs in which we can not achieve
1 emulation is active the grey keys have the following meanings:
1 emulation but don't want a warning on 386 virtual mode, and finally if you
1 emulation and, if you do, whether you want only 8 K paging or full 16 K
1 emulation and, if the device is the PC beeper, which AY channels will be
1 emulation (F6) and multicolor mode (F5). Using such settings, picture
1 emulating the KEYPAD, the keys on the numerical keyboard and some grey keys
1 emulates these effects correctly). Implementation of such effects needs more
1 emulated. For more details, see the descriptions of the commands /U, /S and
1 emulated using the cursor keys, and the right joystick will be emulated using
1 emulated using the PC analogue joystick, and the program will run at full
1 emulated using the AdLib compatible sound card.
1 emulated by shadings on mono cards are unreadable. This fixes option the /VX.
1 emulated AY output is redirected to the speaker with help of Sound Blaster
1 emulate only one channel (playing the main melody) or two of three channels.
1 embedded into a compiled program...
1 else you can totally lock the emulator. Principally, <block_delay> should
1 else should not crash (on MS Windows it mainly results with message like 'This
1 elj), and when starting it displays the
1 elementary knowledge about machine code programming and load routines.
1 either ENTER or ESC. If the active tape is in Lunter's format, moving using
1 eight-bit values. Square brackets mean an 'Optional argument'. You may get
1 efficient.
1 efficiency too) will be implemented in some future release of the emulator.
1 effects, and the result is ugly border flickering. Since starting from release
1 effects, although such effects was very popular on Commodore 64.
1 effects) will not work quite good. Also, flickering is still possible in this
1 effects slow down working too much. Most of the other effects are implemented
1 effects are implemented, except changing of noise pseudofrequency, digital
1 effect. Clicking on the part of the scroll bar, which is on the left of the
1 effect is not emulated, so CAPS SHIFT + SYMBOL SHIFT + Z will not generate
1 effect in the emulator (NOPD), but they have special meaning in ZXCOMP program
1 editor. Editing of compressed blocks is not allowed, because their size
1 editing, so it will be described in detail.
1 editing snapshot files, so it allows decimal, hex or ASCII editing.
1 easy modification of parameters.
1 earlier, and this trick slightly speeds up interrupt routine when KEYPAD
1 e.g. this program will normally work on a VGA card.
1 e.g. if some game on one computer works fine with /Q30, it will work fine on
1 during loading from the samples. This will be explained later (chapter 7.15.).
1 during emulation of tape loading, see chapter 2.4.). However, synchronous
1 during claiming the net simply returns with IN values which are sent to "net
1 duration limits of the pulses of leader tone. Negated values of these
1 due to the reliability of loading at segment boundaries, so at least a 80386
1 due to the reasons mentioned in the manual. In such cases, try to convert TAP
1 drive, command line parameters, etc. If correctly used, the options in this
1 drive and directory if the option /D is omitted. The directory name must not
1 draws picture gradually, line by line, and this process take 60% of interrupt
1 double clicking the mouse. The selected block will be denoted with '>'. The
1 double clicking on Spectrum related files will automatically load them into
1 donation is welcomed. If you like this program, and if you want to help the
1 don't work correctly, you must do manual modifications. Of course, if you know
1 don't want unwanted side effects. The ports for the joystick and ZX
1 don't specify otherwise). The new snapshot file is a dedicated 128K version
1 don't make task switches except when it is really necessary. Archive file
1 don't know what you are doing). The organization of the sector is given in
1 don't exist, or it will open this file for appending if it exists. After this,
1 don't emulate all border effects correctly (look at the program MDA DEMO on
1 don't contain any usable values, nor will their contents have any meaning
1 doesn't recognize some OUT or IN instruction, it calls the handlers for the
1 doesn't have two intensities of yellow color. Some color combinations
1 doesn't exist, and left and right brackets are present. The keyboard layout
1 does not work on NT, so the keyboard will be locked...
1 does not emulate this delay exactly, instead this delay is estimated using
1 documentation given with Lunter's Z80 emulator release 3.5. When you try to
1 documentation files how to crack protected programs and transfer them to the
1 do you want automatically updating the registry file. If your answer is no,
1 do not use the same memory space. This option is the equivalent of making a
1 distinguish from other letters. Option /K changes the ROM, and the cursor is
1 distinction between programs which display messages on English and Spain, for
1 displaying of border effects which are located on topmost part of the screen
1 displayed. In this case, also shown are: the type (it can be 'Basic',
1 displayed. If the block represents data, instead of the name, the flag byte
1 displayed too.
1 displayed inverse. As a negative effect, programs that contain a check of the
1 displayed in the same way as with "Program finish at address #nnnn".
1 displayed in the list box. Before the explanation of the creating and editing
1 displayed as '.'.
1 diskette, etc. and which command parameters the program needs. There are
1 disc. We recommend splitting into several databases if you have more than
1 disc. So, how does the program know the sorting criteria when you rerun the
1 disc and directory this file is located, and the diskette name if the file is
1 disassembled like 'DB n'; after RST 40 instruction in Derby ROM and after RST
1 directory. After unpacking, if the archive contains only one file, then the
1 directory, so it must be accessible simultaneously by all running emulators
1 directory, and use the option /D. If a tape with the defined name does not
1 directory).
1 directory that all emulators which want to communicate have access to (for
1 directory once you've selected or typed in the new directory name. The
1 directory name may be given, but if you omit it, default drive and directory
1 directory in which the emulator is located, if users don't specify otherwise
1 directory and all subdirectories. e.g. (when mask is *.PAS) :
1 directly to the disc, etc.). That's why we've supported so-called Escape
1 directly load programs from a real tape into the environment using a
1 directly from a CD ROM. WARAJEVO also has a function for determining whether
1 directly from DOS using SPEC48, SPEC128 or TS2068. Calling the emulator from
1 digital sound. Routine which performs this task is very dirty and efficient,
1 different: the emulator simply returns value of the tape input bit (bit b6 in
1 different ways. On the Warajevo home page, you can find a lot of programs
1 different transfer protocols), so we perform emulation using a shared file,
1 different periods:
1 different methods. By default, the grey cursor keys and cursor keys on the
1 different in some details: the Timex has a built-in AY sound chip (like the
1 different Spectrum emulators, including:
1 dialog. After this, a new dialog appears on screen. The radio buttons
1 dialog in the submenu 'Tapes' of the 'TapeFiles' menu. This dialog has the
1 dialog in the submenu 'Tapes' of the 'TapeFiles' menu. This dialog has
1 dialog in the submenu 'Tapes' of the 'TapeFiles' menu (shortcut Shift+F2).
1 dialog in the 'Setup' menu. We should say that if you want to put the switch
1 dialog in the 'Setup' menu. Also, the option /E will be set after using
1 devices (options /J and /E) are not active.
1 device address is recognized, after the necessary processing the handler must
1 determines whether left or right joystick will be read (01=left, 10=right,
1 determines a threshold value. Pulses shorter than the threshold will be
1 determine whether the program produces sound during loading from cassette
1 determine the treatment of the flag byte. It can be extracted from the first
1 determine the position of the Spectrum program (block) in a tape file if you
1 determine maximal allowed duration of the sync bit and the first part (low
1 detects 'end-calc' inline code (#38) or 'jump' inline code (#33). In many
1 detect presence of 80386 processor, and if it is present, we use some 80386
1 details, see the descriptions of the options /%, /%MAX and /%LMAX in chapter
1 details, see the description of parameters /F, /L, /A, and /Y in chapter 2.1.
1 details will be simply ignored during conversion. Blocks which contain tone
1 details during conversion will simply be ignored. This conversion does not
1 detailed comments, so by analysing this file you may learn much more about
1 destroyed it. We progressed very well, and in November 1993, reading some
1 destination tape (the default name will be same as the name of the source
1 desired position.
1 designed for expansions, cartridges exist which are mapped into this bank.
1 descriptions see the explanation of the corresponding options in the previous
1 descriptions of the commands /V, /M, /Q, /QX and /U in chapter 2.1 and the
1 descriptions of the commands /?128, /?86 and /@ in chapter 2.1.
1 description of meaning of all bytes into a sector may be useful:
1 described loader. So, by comparing original and protected loader, you can easy
1 described later in this chapter.
1 described in the documentation of the Spanish Spectrum emulator by Pedro
1 described in later chapters, then enters the environment if it is present.
1 described in chapter 3.9.). The input line 'File name' must contain the name
1 described in chapter 3. which is dedicated to environment.
1 described in chapter 2.1.
1 described earlier. The rules of conversions are:
1 depends dynamically on the data in them.
1 depending on /J options. This port is read only:
1 dependent on the content of their string arguments.
1 demo and No More Intelligence 3). It should be said that at this moment only
1 delay per one scan line, and may be in range -128 to 128. Parameter
1 delay (which allows sender station to finish claiming the net) the station
1 define the new dimension. The same effect is possible by pressing CTRL+F5,
1 default name is the same as the name of the active snapshot, with the prefix
1 default is 254). An unformatted cartridge will be created. If you select 254
1 dedicated 48K version of the snapshot. Including the details mentioned above,
1 decreases or increases the parameter <extra> assuming that multicolor
1 decrease the autorepeat speed using, for example, POKE 23561,100:
1 decoded fully, or partial like ordinary Spectrum.
1 decimal form. If it is between 32 and 127, will be also displayed its ASCII
1 debugging. So, compressed data bytes starts with signature bytes, then follows
1 deadlock. This is situation in which for example both stations sent packages
1 databases, this conversion may take a lot of time (15 minutes or more).
1 databases! Now, we included 3 checkboxes to ignore sorting, producer names and
1 databases (it is possible for each data base to be located in a different
1 database. Without sorting and producer names Warajevo can handle not only
1 database. Enter the lines assigned to fields which you want use for seeking,
1 database, so the emulator will automatically set the appropriate directory,
1 database). When the Warajevo is developed, we simply did not expect such huge
1 database management program like DBase if you want to delete a big group of
1 database is not empty, the current record is highlighted). The list box may
1 database is empty). The procedure for entering and changing the records will
1 database has a format which is compatible with DBASE programs (see chapter
1 database format which consists of the files SPECBASE.DBF and SPECBASE.DBT.
1 database format which consists of 8 files with the names DATABASE.TBL,
1 database format which consists of 10 files with the names DATABASE.TBL,
1 database format from release to release. The received data depends upon the
1 database again, the index table is recreated, but it will take some time so
1 data will be read from the tape, and the pointer will be adjusted accordingly.
1 data in the database. 'Run' gives this facility (shortcut Shift+F10).
1 data etc.).
1 data byte contains yyyy-10. That means: maximal string size is 265 (255+10).
1 damage the sector structure, you can correct it using the option 'Verify'.
1 d represent a single digit (0..9)
1 customize the rules of the conversion, using the option 'TZX conversion setup'
1 currently active ROM. If the stopping occurred on an address greater than
1 current scan line on border with the last value sent to ULA port. This works
1 current instruction has no memory arguments, these fields will be blank.
1 current algorithm for tape emulation (displayed inverted). Below the tape
1 current Z80 interrupt handler. This is, in fact, always 56 if processor is not
1 creating such blocks exist (see chapter 3.). Loading from such blocks is quite
1 creating a backup (BAK) file and new tape (TAP) file.
1 created on every emulator-environment call and vice versa, so it has local
1 create a backup (BAK) file and a new tape (TAP) file without the selected
1 crash without clear reason. If you however use the emulator under MS Windows,
1 country, we wanted to remove the dark thoughts from our heads as much as
1 counter receives the value <word>, or breakpoint, or until you press the SPACE
1 correspond to the time when the real Spectrum update this segment of the
1 correspond to RGB for color 1, etc. First 24 bytes are related to BRIGHT 0
1 correctly. VGA and EGA display all of the Spectrum colors including BRIGHT.
1 correctly, like as EX AF,AF' instruction. Of course, this is not exact
1 correctly, and use BORDER, PAPER and INK instructions with the corresponding
1 correctly with command O, or there was some error during writing to the
1 correctly used, this option makes some operations easier. For example, if you
1 correcting of some control bytes in the sector, to retain integrity. If you
1 correct behaviour of the KEYPAD keys in the 'Calculator' mode.
1 copyright message '(C) 1991. Roman & easy inc.'. When the war started in our
1 copied (e.g. lower byte of xxxx). If yyyy=2, higher bit is always zero (so,
1 converting snapshot files to TAP files, etc.
1 converted to inverse character. This is because we realized FLASH by changing
1 converted to dummy normal block with zero size. This will switch off sample
1 converted to an ASCII file and name the output file (default is TLWASCII.TXT)
1 converted to an ASCII file and name the output file (default is FORTHASC.TXT)
1 converted tape file.
1 converted programs will be appended to the end of the current Warajevo tape
1 converted program will be appended to the end of the current Warajevo tape
1 converted into SIT format. All data which is specific to the Warajevo
1 converted file will be mapped at address 0 in the DOCK bank. For example, if
1 converted TAP file may be used in the emulator itself, may be sent back to
1 conversion will create the necessary .H and .B files based on the active
1 conversion will create a new tape in the native Warajevo format.
1 conversion of a TZX file will be performed according to the rules which may
1 conversion into Warajevo format will work. In other cases, when multi-level
1 conversion (for more details, look chapter 7.1.). The destination Z80 and TAP
1 controllers) directly on I/O level. So, executing of these programs under MS
1 controller is a (hardware) finite automate with time-outs, which changes state
1 controller goes through following sequence of states:
1 control the emulation (these parameters are almost all parameters described
1 continue working with Basic program who was present in memory. By using
1 continue working as if the environment had not been called). Calling the
1 continously, so they works much slower than on real Spectrum, except on
1 content of the screen directly onto the disc in file named SCREEN.DAT.
1 content during loading (for example, loaders with counters). Namely, updating
1 content and source.
1 contains the length of the source file. The field 'Compiling:' shows how many
1 contains only internal codes (for example, U002 instead of 'Ultimate'), but
1 contains more files, a new dialog appears which allows the user to select
1 contains a print preview of the document about tape content. If you change
1 containing the station number (bit by bit, and slowly). During transmitting
1 contain the values of the Z80 registers A, BC, DE and HL respectively. After
1 contain the following:
1 contain the desired number of sectors in the file (from 10 to 254, the
1 contain the character '.'. If you omit the extension from <filename>, .MDR
1 contain the character '.'.
1 contain sequences like #ED #00 etc. Therefore, after sequence #ED #00 '8086'
1 contain samples of real tape input. These samples usually represent samples
1 contain a pure snapshot, and the TAP file will contain the additional levels.
1 contain '16', '48', '2068', '128', '+2', '+3' or 'SAM' (the last means Sam
1 construction kit'), and our emulator unfortunately will not recognize such
1 constants, which are important for tape loading process. Psychical tape format
1 constants is needed very rarely. The last three constants will be
1 constants are very important, because they determine duration of the bits 1
1 constants (in two's complement sense) determine respectively minimal and
1 constants (especially the constant named 'Threshold').
1 considers as the signal that it is time for package reading. In such case, the
1 considering the conditions where the program was developed and the quality of
1 considerably slower (about 60%) than the maximum speed of release 1.5, so if
1 considerably improved, so many programs which change the border in
1 connection using simple pair of wires: the signal wire (0/+5V) and the ground
1 connected via pull-up resistor (so reading from it will give #FF). Its
1 connected to the LPT1 port. You can buy this tape interface from the company
1 configuration file DEFAULT.CFG. These options may be set from the environment
1 configuration file DEFAULT.CFG.
1 computers. That's why in the absence of the /QX switch the emulator uses
1 computers using a cable (see chapter 3.12.), load the communication program
1 computers the switch /QX is recommended.
1 computers may cause slower working than natural speed. Sometimes switching
1 computer, working with a big database (above 500 records) may be rather slow.
1 computer, don't use releases 2.0 or newer. Instead, search for Warajevo
1 computer will produce a warning sound.
1 computer is twice as slow as is necessary for correct emulation.
1 compression, the TAP file is usually 50-100 times shorter than the source VOC
1 compression reduces the occupied space on the disc by about 30-60% or even
1 compression of two blocks, not during compression of the one block.
1 compression is a long process, so you will see on the screen two horizontal
1 compression efficiency (according to ARJ convention). The header blocks are
1 compressed. Tapes created using the Warajevo emulator are NOT compatible with
1 compressed, so they will be shown in a similar way to compressed blocks, but
1 compressed using the submenu 'Implode'. Data blocks will be displayed like
1 compressed data of a 16K block. The structure of a memory block is:
1 compressed (very efficiently). The environment will show such blocks like
1 compressed (the compression may be executed using the environment). For the
1 complex item is group of the radio buttons with the name 'Purpose of tape
1 complete loop without single stepping. Also, it is most efficient to use J
1 complete emulation of this effect would increase minimal computer speed on
1 compiling games which load levels from the tape. So, we implemented two new
1 compiles the snapshot file MONTY128.Z80 (the game 'Aufwidersen Monty 128')
1 compiles the snapshot file ATICATAC.Z80 into the executable program
1 compiles snapshot file KTYME.Z80 (game 'Knight time') into a executable
1 compiled program will save (load) status into (from) four files with filenames
1 compensation, and good equality with speed of the real Spectrum, which allows
1 compensation routine. Using this method, we realized very stable time
1 compatible cards, which allows exact emulation of the AY chip (which was not
1 compatibility...
1 compatibility, including whether the emulator shows a warning in 'virtual
1 communications, so every time the emulator is called from the environment and
1 communication program.
1 communication between two emulators even through the Internet!
1 communication begins to work. With some effort, it is possible to make
1 commands, as on a real Spectrum (automatic loading is possible, see the
1 commands) nor ZX Interface 1 extensions, and no longer accepts wrong syntax
1 commands like LOAD, CAT, MOVE, COPY etc. have meaning which is strongly
1 command you can normally work with RAM disc. However, this will not work if
1 command parameter /E as mentioned in chapter 2.1.
1 command line option /#N;G:\SHARED\TRANSFER.NET or using the environment (see
1 command instead of I when stepping over Z80 commands like LDIR (due to nature
1 command Y (for unlocking a 48K lock bit) and then A128 command, in many cases
1 command SET WARAJEVO=G (for example, in the file AUTOEXEC.BAT). This option
1 command O first time, this command will create file 'MONITOR.OUT' if this file
1 command N will automatically display destination of this jump instruction.
1 command COPY TO, or some memo file packer.
1 command /&OCF into DEFAULT.CFG.
1 combined and stored in the destination SLT file (which is determined in the
1 combinations. Also, the color CGA mode emulates only four colors, and the
1 combination Ctrl+Left. It is similar with the part to the right of the
1 colors, and next 24 bytes are related to BRIGHT 1 colors. All values are in
1 color or black and white TIFF picture file.
1 color monitors, so if you have a monochrome VGA monitor, removing of
1 color attribute into the input line named 'Initial color attribute'. For more
1 color CGA mode).
1 color (in range which is instrument dependent).
1 collision with these drivers ('Elite', 'Rocky horror show' etc.).
1 coding). So, the size yyyy depends on next 2-4 signature bits:
1 codes #ED #FC and #ED #FD which save and load block described by IX and DE
1 coded as 65535.
1 code is stored in the file ADDITION.DBF. In the field TRAKA last 2 characters
1 code in Z80 code (for details, see chapter 5.2.). The address will be
1 code for returning. In our example, four zeros in signatures means that four
1 clicking. The help file is detailed, sometimes more detailed than this
1 clear if no other application execute in the background. The only severe
1 circumstances and with which program it occurred.
1 chunks. Every chunk may behave like ROM or RAM, depending of settings. For
1 chunks only due to limited (64K) buffer size. So, the pointer which emulator
1 chunks in the bank. Organization of each byte is as follows:
1 chunks at addresses 0-8191, 8192-16383 etc. respectively. When a bit is equal
1 chip, memory management, RS232, KEYPAD and MIDI ports). True meaning of this
1 chip registers have length smaller than 8 bits (extra bits is always zero).
1 chip at this moment. We thought that it would be enough to sent calculated
1 checks its surroundings and contents of the stack, and if all looks like this:
1 checked only for joystick items.
1 characters, so often it can't be descriptive enough. That's why you can store
1 characters). However, FLASH is not used if the emulation of attributes is
1 character at the cursor position (DELETE RIGHT) and switch the editor's
1 chapter 3.6.6.).
1 chapter 3.3.3.
1 chapter 3.2.3.).
1 chapter 3.2.2.).
1 chapter 3.10.
1 chapter 3.1.). Unless the database is empty, you can see that every record in
1 chapter 3. From the environment you can start the emulator by pressing F10,
1 chapter 2.1. so this option can change the active directory.
1 chapter 2.1, and the description of the network emulation in the user and
1 channels which the sound card uses for 8-bit transfer (range 0-3, default is
1 channel, sound is totally clear, else you can hear interlacing. Very often,
1 changing time delay between the beginning of the interrupt and the moment of
1 changing the records will appear. Different fields need different methods for
1 changing of this speed allows loading of many protected programs saved using
1 changes, or 'Cancel' to discard changes. Esc acts like 'Cancel'.
1 changed it in the mean time, for example with basic POKE instruction. Command
1 changed from the emulator itself by pressing F2. More about tapes and
1 changed by pressing TAB or F2 (in the directory defined with /D, and
1 changed border effects, loading with the counter etc.). For example, see
1 change or remove anything from the package. However, we still don't have very
1 chance of a successful transfer. With greater values of this parameter, it is
1 cause trash on the screen)! Even if you install such handler and if it works,
1 cause loading errors. In such cases, the last solution is disabling screen
1 cause incorrect loading. However, you can call the monitor even while
1 cause incorrect loading when you go back to the emulator. During loading from
1 cases, use option /SA. For an explanation, see chapter 7.6. We discovered a
1 cases when the TAP file is created using the special case of converting
1 cases this is correct, but sometimes this is not. If you specify parameter
1 case with protection cracking.
1 case transferring instructions for users will not be fully correct.
1 case of compressed blocks, the compressed size is also written, and the
1 case in programs '3D Game maker', 'Neverending story', 'TT racer', 'Copy de
1 cartridges) for emulation of real microdrive cartridges. The user can select
1 cartridge on a real Timex which has everything stored on two other cartridges
1 cartridge file.
1 cartridge file (in this case automatic running is not possible), or in some
1 cartridge (64K of empty RAM) may be described as only 9-byte long DCK file
1 cards as a thin frame around the screen, and on EGA and VGA on full screen).
1 card. Fourth method is similar like third, but emulated AY output is truncated
1 card, sound card, analogue joystick, if you want high-quality border
1 cannot access options from the main menu. The dialog window usually has many
1 can try option /TAPE!. This option acts as replacing calls to save and load
1 can see which record of the file is allocated in the sector, and the number
1 can disable the emulation of attributes (or change the four base colors in
1 can be used if you want the slow loading, for example to read some
1 can be changed using TAB key.
1 calling the program PKUNZIP.EXE (which must be located in the currently
1 calling the environment using F10 will help. Also, sometimes changing the
1 calling the 'Parameters' dialog is Shift+F2 in the environment.
1 called the active item. You can move through the items using TAB and
1 call the environment using F10 from those programs too.
1 call is not recommended because it is expensive for you. It is best to use
1 calculator restart (RST 40 in standard ROM), because breakpoint will not
1 calculated address lays jump instruction JP or JR (which is often case),
1 calculated AY output is truncated to 1 bit and redirected to PC beeper, where
1 c represent any character
1 bytes. The parity byte is not kept in the file, it will be calculated, so the
1 bytes, usually like:
1 bytes on addresses from <rr>-6 to <rr>-1. On the right side of the line are
1 bytes on addresses from <rr> to <rr>+5. The used registers are: PC, SP, HL,
1 bytes of additional information in the first record, which may be seen by
1 bytes have been compiled. After compiling, the field 'Code:' contains the
1 bytes from the source file, or returns back for a few bytes, and copies some
1 bytes from a destination file. Used algorithm is described at the end of this
1 bytes can be simply copied (#3D, #18, #2E, #42) to output buffer. The next bit
1 bytes are mixed with data bytes, we divided them in two parts, for easier
1 byte will be performed in same moment, but this is impossible on the emulator.
1 byte of IX. Similarly, if the prefix byte is #FD, it will work with a higher
1 byte in the standalone file or from it's file extension. If you selected
1 by modulo 255). The lead-in signal is used only for synchronization (with real
1 by experimenting can you decide which parameter using /S is best for you
1 by executing the 80x86 instruction INT 250.
1 by entering Tape Manager, moving to desired sample block, and exiting Tape
1 by changing the DOS environment variable WARAJEVO (look chapter 3.).
1 by Gerton Lunter. While loading, the emulator keeps compatibility with
1 by 'Category' and then by 'Full name'. To help you, the dummy input line
1 buttons, checkboxes, static text etc. One of the items is focused and it is
1 buttons determine the treatment of the flag byte. It can be the first byte in
1 buttons determine the port to which the printer is connected.
1 button will exclude the highlighted block from the chain.
1 but not in such a way that we would like. Emulation is still slow and a bit
1 but not as more obvious sequence:
1 but like this:
1 but it works! The Hercules, EGA and VGA mode MS Windows does not emulate
1 but it is too hard for inexperienced users. So, we implemented option /TAPE in
1 but it is possible if you want to torture the emulator). In these cases it is
1 but in a new order. The list box for this option is very specific. When you
1 but if you omit it, the emulator tries to determine this address for itself
1 but because the KEYPAD is emulated on an I/O level, and the routine in ROM
1 but DEFAULT.CFG has global scope. The environment reads this file only when
1 buffered, and when whole package is collected, it will be written in the net
1 buffer takes four rows of pixels. When D1=1, buffer takes only one row of
1 browser either) allows the user to enter some text up to 512 bytes long,
1 broad for today criteria. Unfortunately, timing of collisions between ULA chip
1 box') work quite good. Many other polyphonic tones sounds excellently, for
1 box') sounds quite good too. Problems with the sound are now a rarity if you
1 box will be explained later.
1 box when you browse the database, but in this field you can enter the command
1 bottom of the list). Faster access to any element of the list can be got by
1 bottom list box lists the blocks of the destination tape file. All selected
1 both cases error will cause warning sound.
1 border effects, multicolor effects and sampled sound using Sound Blaster in
1 blocks. You must have enough space on the disc for the .BAK file. If you
1 blocks. When you have selected all of the desired blocks, select 'OK'. The
1 blocks. The first, with a long leader signal but with little data (17 bytes)
1 blocks. Precise organization of tapes will be given in chapter 7.9.1.
1 blocks, but it puts every Spectrum file in separate files with the extension
1 blocks with one header.
1 blocks will be created), so you can transfer absolutely any programs into a
1 blocks to and from the Spectrum. You can also send the communication program
1 blocks may have different values.
1 blocks from the source tape file will be stored before the highlighted block
1 block. The next four bytes contain #FFFFFFFF, which is characteristic of
1 block type, the current block position in the tape will be displayed after
1 block to any place (more about tape organization see below) and can be
1 block the emulator automatically calls Tape Manager, enabling you to change
1 block is loaded into various memory banks (in one part) of the Spectrum 128.
1 block is loaded into the buffer. Note that each continous sequence of EAR
1 block in separate files named ZXTnnmmm.H and ZXTnnmmm.B in the directory
1 block are block descriptor (with structure similar like sector header), next
1 block ('STOP' mode) or not ('CONT' mode). In 'STOP' mode, after every loaded
1 bits differently, depending of active mode ('128 Basic' or 'Calculator'), more
1 bits D2-D7: reserved (all zeros)
1 bits D0-D2 may be useful:
1 bit, and a data bits, where bits 0 and 1 are represented as square pulses with
1 bit sentimentally tied with this computer. This computer reminds us of all of
1 bit is switched on (128 version only).
1 bit by bit.
1 bit D1: 0 = memory image for corresponding chunk is not present in DCK
1 bit D0: 0 = read-only chunk, 1 = read/write chunk
1 between processor and ULA chip, to allow correct generating of border effects
1 better, with considerably lower hardware requirements. Working under Windows
1 better results when the sender program is in foreground, and receiver program
1 better if you run the receiver program before running the sender program,
1 best working under Windows 95.
1 best solution for the Warajevo emulator, so unpack this file to achieve the
1 best loader was published in one computer magazine 'Svet kompjutera': The
1 belong to DOCK or EXROM bank, depending of bit B8 (0 = DOCK, 1 = EXROM).
1 behaviour is slightly different than in other emulators, but this is adapted
1 behaviour (trapping) for internal use into the emulator if these instructions
1 before. You must type into the Spectrum (in 128K mode) the short BASIC
1 before the block who will be saved next) is changed with the up and down
1 before saving), but organization of the Lunter TAP format does not allow such
1 before first argument of the instruction, and it will always be fully emulated
1 before extracting.
1 beeper, but by using an AdLib compatible sound card (which includes Sound
1 beeper is emulated toggling the 'enable' bit of PC speaker, so AY and beeper
1 become trashed. In such situations, type '_' and ENTER to force the
1 become intolerably fast due to the increasing of the execution speed, so
1 because you pressed F3 by mistake.
1 because the letters to Sarajevo are delayed quite a lot. Also, a telephone
1 because the emulator does not know that the video memory content is changed.
1 because the Warajevo emulator recognizes characteristic multicolor routines
1 because selected shades for color emulating are not mutually compatible.
1 because many programs for ZX Spectrum need correct emulation of this register.
1 because it varies from program to program. On the 48 version of the emulator,
1 be started with option /VC or /VW (see chapter 2.1.) to initialize CGA graphic
1 be scrolled in all four directions using the method described earlier (see
1 be restored. The same effect can be achieved using ALT+F5.
1 be replaced with inverse character, and all other cards emulate FLASH
1 be repeated. Pure sending of data package is incredibly fast (above 80 Kbit/s)
1 be rather slow (by the way, the real Sinclair Network was incredibly fast,
1 be prompted before appending each block.
1 be performed without seeing what you type on screen). You can read more about
1 be merged with the current DCK file. This is possible only if two DOCK files
1 be edited (0-7). This option has shortcut F3.
1 be downloaded from the Internet URL address:
1 be displayed in the same way as with "Program finish at address #nnnn".
1 be displayed '(HOME)', '(EXROM)' or '(DOCK)', depending on the currently
1 be described soon.
1 be customized using the 'TZX conversion setup' option described earlier and
1 be correctly changed by these instructions. However, R register is really
1 be converted into Warajevo sample blocks. The TZX format is very complex, so
1 be cancelled, because the memory image is in this case superfluous. Also,
1 be appended to the end of the current tape file). The transfer will then
1 be OK. But, if you got a sound which had duration of 20 seconds, your
1 batch files. The same is also true for the options /%MAX and /%LMAX.
1 based routines to make more than two colors in 512x192 mode. As extremely
1 banks (for example, expansion to 1 MB) are not implemented.
1 banka DD Sarajevo').
1 bank). LROS programs always have autorun and they will be started after
1 bank switching, see chapter 7.2.). Such cases are however a rarity. Our
1 bank initially contains only 8 Kb ROM (called EXROM ROM). This ROM is not
1 bad characteristics (it was slow, quite incompatible with the original
1 back to the emulator it will continue normally. So, you may look at the
1 back to normal mode using OUT 255,0. Multicolor mode may be turned on using
1 b represent any BASIC command
1 automatically switches into sample loading mode when a block with samples
1 automatically stops working after <time>/50 seconds and exits to DOS.
1 automatically running programs from the database. If you run the environment
1 automatically loaded. If you use automatic loading, you can enter the initial
1 automatically created.
1 automatically be loaded and started using the data from the database. For
1 automatically adjusted when you change the effective loading speed, but it is
1 automatic mode switching works correctly.
1 authors, pay the desired value to one of the following banks:
1 attributes), possesses a multicolor video mode (256x192 pixels with 1x8
1 attribute to read-only, so this file will be protected when working in the
1 attribute emulation on monochrome cards, default palette in color CGA mode,
1 attribute emulation off (using F5) help, but true solution is only usage of a
1 attempt to write to any Spectrum 128K port will cause the emulator to stop
1 at address 40000, that register A before calling contains level number, and
1 at I/O level on the Epson (or IBM) compatible printer or on the HP Laser Jet
1 asynchronous/synchronous/none border emulation). Options /M1 and /M2 switch
1 asynchronous border emulation hires border effects will not work, so programs
1 assumption. We have no informations whether other ports (like ULA port) is
1 assumes Lunter's TAP format which is simply linear sequence of blocks which
1 assumed value is value of the marked register.
1 assumed extension is '.DCK'. If the names of the drive and directory are
1 assigned program. For example, activate the checkbox 'Flickering' if sprites
1 assigned input lines. The field 'Command line' is not displayed in the list
1 assigned checkbox. For the meaning of this field, see chapter 3.6.5.
1 assembly listing (PARALLEL.ASM) for you to analyse.
1 assembler (for example, GENS) enter the following program on the (emulated)
1 asked whether you want to extract the ROM image to a separate file. If you
1 as sequence (assuming that PC is increased by three):
1 as release 2.0. of Lunter's emulator. This format is as follows (be aware of
1 as paper color will be treated as a reset pixel. This is implemented because
1 as a software finite automate. KEYPAD controller communicate with Spectrum 128
1 as a combination of M and P commands, e.g. sets a memory pointer and then
1 as MLT) load from the active TAP file block which ordinal number is determined
1 arrows. Using the 'PageUp' and 'PageDown' keys you can move to the previous
1 around the displayed picture. On VGA and EGA cards, it is realized using
1 around Europe, but we thought that our program was surely better than all the
1 argument field 'ARG' is not blank. It will contain the effective address of
1 argument and then put a result in a register, which is second argument. For
1 argument (the lowest allowed value is 23900). The monitor will restore RASP,
1 argument '?' is used in some instructions as a wildcard sign, but if you use
1 are valid, although using experience we notice that Warajevo emulator works
1 are those given by the option /D, or the active drive and directory if the
1 are on specific address. Specific instructions and addresses are listed in
1 are not supported by the emulator in form of resident PC programs. For
1 are more rare, and in these cases you must use the monitor.
1 are mapped on the PC keyboard as normal (only the brackets are missing), and
1 are like on real ZX Spectrum.
1 are interchanged, so you can make a program (or adapt an existing one) for
1 are implemented too.
1 are described into database. The author of the program SGD changes the
1 are created in memory after the first use of the database (that's why the
1 are always by default in decimal system, and byte values of the memory are
1 are acronyms or words in Bosnian language.
1 arbitrary place on the tape (all you need to do is seek to the desired point
1 arbitrary names, if their formats are the same as this file. The russian
1 appropriate places before you save a snapshot file (this needs elementary
1 appended to the end of active tape file, which must be in Warajevo format
1 appears, so any manual intervention (like 'Start the tape' in X128 emulator)
1 appear. If you select a Warajevo file (TAP, Z80, MDR, DCK), it will be passed
1 appear, you will see a 'Tape loading error' message. In this case, rewind
1 appear belongs to the past. However, screen updating on Hercules, CGA and
1 apologise if any message remain unanswered because E-MAIL in Sarajevo is not
1 any other computer. However, with this method of picture generation, programs
1 any name (first press F10 in the emulator to call the environment, select
1 any loading from real tape is impossible if you start the emulator under MS
1 any following actions in the monitor will send results of actions into this
1 any file in this emulator package, and may be distributed without the
1 any emulator. This format is also richer than TAP format, but it seems that
1 any argument is greater than 255, it will be splitted to low and high byte, so
1 answer yes, select the filename of the extracted ROM image. After this, you
1 another. Select the file which will be copied, and enter the destination
1 and will perform the necessary changes in the TAPES.ZX file to inform the ZX
1 and which has corresponding bit in register R7 with value 0. Beeper will still
1 and which chunks are ROM chunks. Such files have relatively simple format. At
1 and to the next block of the BASIC header (typically the loader of any
1 and they must be written in machine code. AROS programs are mapped at address
1 and the name of the tape file. All compressed blocks will be decompressed
1 and the mnemonic of the current instruction are displayed. The mnemonics are
1 and the first emulator that used this format was JPP by Arnt Gulbransen. This
1 and the dialog 'Video'. The shortcut for this dialog is pressing F5 in the
1 and the calibration constants for the analogue joystick (this makes sense
1 and the Spectrum ULA chip, which is a very hard task. The Warajevo emulator
1 and the ROM files, and which has an execution speed which is independent of
1 and the 'Video' dialog (shortcut F5), or from the emulator itself, also by
1 and that the author is Peter Kro
1 and started, or ignored (depending on settings), and the remaining blocks
1 and size of the selected file, like here:
1 and select the TS2048.DCK file as the active DCK file (using the environment,
1 and right). So, if you simultaneously give two options which act on Timex
1 and reading real tapes from a real tape recorder directly into the emulator
1 and pressing F10 again (or right mouse click) will go back to the environment.
1 and play the tape. Feels like a real Spectrum! You can load nearly all
1 and on sending emulator something like:
1 and meaning of BASIC commands which use the Sinclair Network if you decided
1 and leaver the other lines empty. Wildcards ? and * are allowed (with the
1 and it will be disassembled like 'DW n'. However, disassembling of RST 40
1 and it is typically 255 for data bytes, although non-standard headerless
1 and from formats of many other emulators) using various options in the
1 and directory on which the file is located (with the option 'Full name in
1 and defining the new size using SHIFT with the arrow keys. Press ENTER when
1 and continue executing of the program, incoming of this instruction will
1 and checked byte and value <byte>. This also works with front panel display.
1 and automatically load and run the program 'Atic Atac' using the data in this
1 and automatically adapts itself to them, so many well-known multicolor
1 and Z80 processor is not emulated exactly, but only estimated (by the way,
1 and Shift+Tab, or by moving the mouse pointer to the topic and then double
1 and RAM expansions.
1 and MIDI which work through register R14 of sound chip). When A14=1 (usually
1 and LOAD* perform transfers using 255-byte packages (this is also the
1 and EGA cards use a special mode. It is text mode with one (or two at EGA)
1 and 4 respectively. If you are skilful, in some cases you can make whole map
1 and 0, e.g. they determine effective loading speed. Most of protected loaders
1 and /V. These options will have override any options which are embedded in
1 and /V with the same meaning as in the emulator (/SB is not allowed - use
1 and 'Compress selected'.
1 an extracted file or it can become the file extension. If you want to ignore
1 an ASCII file and state the name of the output file (default is
1 an ASCII file and name the output file (default is MLSCII.TXT) using
1 always, regardless of what really happens on the net (this is not reality, but
1 always shown as hexadecimal, due to lack of space on the screen.
1 always on the end of the tape, regardless of the position which is set using
1 always generate the moving of the cursor (CAPS SHIFT + 5, 6, 7 and 8), no
1 always be put on correct place. It is better to specify parameter <word>
1 although one program exists which uses problems with I register to make a
1 although not completely. Namely, on real Spectrum is possible that one scan
1 alternative page on 128K version of the emulator, depending of V field on
1 also have different size (if you wrote own communication program), but in that
1 also contains 2 input lines, called 'Startup Routine address' and 'Startup
1 already compressed blocks and blocks where the compression will give worse
1 almost no negative effects. For details, see the technical part of the manual
1 almost exclusively with option /A. Of course, the seeking may be done from
1 allows you to have more than one database (in different directories) on the
1 allows not only screen viewing, but also saving the screen onto a tape using
1 allows it (this is true on majority of today computers; the minimum required
1 allowed width (duration) of the bit 0. Negated value of constant 'Const max
1 allow the requested speed, nothing bad will happen, just that the requested
1 all of the blocks you want to remove, select the 'OK' button. This will
1 all Z80 snapshots (their formats are slightly different), but the program
1 all DAT blocks into a TAP file using the environment, and such program will
1 algorithm...
1 algorithm. We tested about 100 loaders. We had problems with some self
1 algorithm.
1 algorithm for recognizing of non-standard load routines we called EDGE
1 after the conversion, you must manually change all BASIC loaders on the
1 after starting the emulator type this command in BASIC :
1 after returning to Z80 emulation mode. The register DS points to the emulated
1 after every updating of the net file stops working for about <block_delay>/18
1 after every RST 8 instruction in every ROM (and after RST 32 instruction in
1 after certain line idle period. When the signal is detected, after some time
1 after CALL instruction. In other words, argument nnnn before self-modification
1 after 'Input name' field and is marked as ( ), you may optionally type an
1 affect the behaviour of the cursor keys:
1 affect network emulation: <block_delay>, <free_len> and <busy_len>. If you
1 advantage is that such blocks occupy much less space on disc. Blocks may be
1 adequate, you may ask us for the necessary instructions.
1 addresses 0-16383, and the rest of the 48 Kb is filled with RAM. The EXROM
1 addressable using the SS: prefix. We will not describe such things, because
1 address will be nearly always ignored (else these instructions will not be
1 address 561 in Derby ROM. This will prepare screen editor for working, and
1 address 32768 may be described also using 9-byte long DCK file with content
1 address 24576. All of these features are emulated in the Warajevo emulator
1 address 1388 (274 in Timex version) in LD_BYTES, and emulation of the tape
1 address #nnnn". In the case of this report, please inform us under which
1 additional help about these topics. You can select a topic using the keys Tab
1 additional effects on the screen (if you are too pedantic and this disturbs
1 additional drivers may be found on the Warajevo home page:
1 addition to tapes, may contain snapshot files and many other things.
1 actual data bytes, immediately after signature bytes. Remember basic elements
1 active, the emulator also performs some estimations of timing of interaction
1 active tape is not in Warajevo format (the emulator assumes Lunter's format
1 active tape is in Lunter TAP format.
1 active register). When R14 acts as output port (bit D6=1 in register R7), bits
1 active path set using the DOS command PATH) unpacks the archive into this
1 active memory bank.
1 active cartridge file to 254 sectors (if it was shorter than 254 sectors), so
1 active Warajevo database.
1 active TAP file (it must be a block with an extension like .nnn). After this,
1 active (the KEYPAD is activated or deactivated by pressing the 'NumLock' key).
1 activating the Sound Blaster card as an input for loading programs from real
1 activated. In these cases, the solution is the same as in previous case.
1 activate or deactivate a checkbox by using the SPACE key or a mouse.
1 activate option /E too.
1 according to the system variable MSTBOT (23744), not from RAMTOP. The label
1 according to the snapshot file. When the program is on a tape file, autorun
1 accomplish inserting which is described in previous section. Block will have
1 access memory above 1 Mb like QEMM, EMM386, RAMDRIVE, VDISK, SMARTDRV, HIMEM,
1 accepts is:
1 acceptable, although decompression speed is very high), and he worked mostly
1 above, and the buttons 'Edit', 'Append', 'Delete', 'Seek' and 'Close'.
1 about the Spectrum program (for example, POKE's for infinite lives in some
1 about one of them, /C. The full syntax of the command line which WARAJEVO
1 abbreviations:
1 a very inflexible device, so it is good idea to transfer Spectrum programs
1 a tape file to a real Spectrum 128. For this purpose you must connect two
1 a specific kind of network card, transfer protocol (Novel, IPX, TCP-IP etc.),
1 a small problem with ROM routines that will wait forever if the printer is
1 a separate file with the extension .001, .002 etc.
1 a real tape, pressing any function key will surely cause a loading error.
1 a real KEYPAD, we will describe it in more detail.
1 a program which works only with the old ROM, add the letter O after the
1 a numerical keyboard. This is implemented in the emulator too, and the keys
1 a multitasking operating system (for example, Windows 95) in CGA mode.
1 a method, it is possible that some programs which did not cause flickering on
1 a higher speed. The loading routine is similar to the loading routine for the
1 a bit different and looks like:
1 a big '+' key, on the KEYPAD there are the keys '-' (up) and '+' (down), one
1 a artificial gap will be "added" between sectors, and between header and data
1 a TIFF file and name the output file (default is COLORTIF.TIF) using the
1 a TIFF file and name the output file (default is BWTIFF.TIF) using the
1 a Sound Blaster, save it to a tape file, convert this file into a TZX using
1 a Sound Blaster is much more unreliable than loading using a LPT1 port, so
1 a Printer or into a disc File.
1 _ -------------------------
1 ^<byte1>|<word1> <byte2>|<word2> BINARY XOR
1 ^$ #FFAA Performs a binary XOR between value of currently
1 [A] means 'A can be omitted'
1 [A...] means 'A can be omitted or repeated many times'
1 [$]...]])=x|
1 [$]...]])=x$}
1 [$](m[,n ...])
1 [$]()|SCREEN$}] (but this is a bug)
1 [$]()|LINE q|SCREEN$}]
1 Zeljko Juric and Samir Ribic. We are engineers of electronic and computer
1 Zeljko Juric Samir Ribic
1 Z[<byte> [<word>]] DUMP SCREEN
1 ZXSHREP.TXT Report file created using environment
1 ZXS tape format (storage format used on the Russian Internet site ZX Museum)
1 ZXS (ZX32), ZXT (ZX32), VOC, SLT, SNA (48), SNA (128), SP (VGASPEC),
1 ZXP2_1.ROM ROM file for the emulation of Spectrum +2 (Standard ROM)
1 ZXP2_0.ROM ROM file for the emulation of Spectrum +2 (Derby ROM)
1 ZXI1.ROM ROM file for emulation of Interface 1 (new and old ROM version
1 ZXCOMP.EXE Compiler for converting snapshot files to EXE programs
1 ZXCOMP recognizes only those snapshots generated from Warajevo without
1 ZXCOMP program which in many cases can automatically solve problem of game
1 ZXCOMP MONTY128 MONTY128 /SA
1 ZXCOMP MMINER MMINER /VX
1 ZXCOMP KTYME KTYME /TAPE:POSITION.STS /JM
1 ZXCOMP KTYME KTYME /TAPE
1 ZXCOMP HOBBIT HOBBIT /TAPE!
1 ZXCOMP ATICATAC.Z80 ATICATAC.EXE /JM /JC /! /Z7 /%80
1 ZXCOMP <z80_file> [<exe_file> [<initial_switches>]]
1 ZX48.ROM ROM file for 48K version of the emulator
1 ZX128_1.ROM ROM file for 128K version of the emulator (Standard ROM)
1 ZX128_0.ROM ROM file for 128K version of the emulator (Derby ROM)
1 ZX interface 1 activated, but the file 'ZXI1.ROM' is not present, or when
1 ZX JAM emulator by Juan Antonio Moreno, the SPECTATOR emulator for QL by
1 ZX Interface 1 statement extensions:
1 [email protected]
1 Z80, TAP (Lunter), TAP (Warajevo), BLK, SPC, LTP, TZX, ZXS (Museum),
1 Z80 code of instruction RST 0, when you leave monitor. This instruction have
1 Z7 Make a medium size bit-map dump of screen, with
1 Z4 512 Make a extremely small bit-map screen dump from a
1 Z4 256 Make a extremely small bit-map screen dump from a
1 Z4 Make a extremely small bit-map screen dump
1 Z2 Make a medium size bit-map dump of screen
1 Z Make a nice shadow dump of screen
1 Yugoslavia), with greetings, questions, new ideas and bug remarks. We
1 Your synthesizer will play C-major scale. If you don't want simultaneous sound
1 You must give the cartridge name.
1 You must confirm the selection of this option. Any previous SpecBase database
1 You could use the value of bytes or wildcard '?' with meaning 'any byte'. If
1 You can select any of these options using the arrow keys (or by pressing the
1 Yes, it is. Samir spent more than 30 days in developing algorithm, analysing
1 Y[<word>] MEMORY PAGES (Timex version)
1 Y[<byte1> [<byte2> [<byte3> [<byte4>]]]] MEMORY PAGES (128 version)
1 Y? ? ? 0 Only reset 48K lock bit; this is impossible on
1 Y? ? 0 Switch off alternative video page
1 Y? 4 Set RAM page 4 as active RAM
1 Y385 Put EXROM bank in address space 0-8K and 56K-64K,
1 Y3 Put DOCK bank in address space 0-16K, and HOME
1 Y257 Put EXROM bank in address space 0-8K, and HOME
1 Y2 Set Interface 1 ROM as active ROM
1 Y1 ? 1 Set Standard ROM as active ROM and set usage of
1 Y1 0 0 1 Set Standard ROM as active ROM, select RAM page
1 Y0 7 Set Derby ROM as active ROM and select RAM page 7
1 Y0 Put HOME bank in address space 0-64K
1 Y - Year of production
1 Y Undo changes of memory pages
1 Y Undo changes of memory configuration
1 Y Switch on/off ZX Interface 1 shadow ROM
1 Y SWAP ROMS (48 version)
1 X[<byte>] SET XOR BYTE
1 X30 Set xor byte to 30
1 X128 emulator by James McKay. VOC is in fact an audio format, so it is
1 X Undo effect of X
1 With the option /C usage of other command options is possible, but any option
1 Windows may cause some problems. Sometimes a problems like non-continous
1 Windows 95 uses ZXT (or ZXS) format. This format may contain tapes,
1 When you load the communication program onto your Spectrum you have three
1 When the emulator switches into sample loading mode, the current EAR Sample
1 We were not able to check it.
1 We were critizied due to a bit of an odd color palette, so starting from
1 We implemented this ports on the following way:
1 We have RESP too, but instructions BITP do not exist, so instructions BIT with
1 We can not say any special if game don't use ROM routines for loading and
1 We can not have network control on a PC using such a low level technique (due
1 Warajevo tape, one .ZXT file with the same name as the active Warajevo tape,
1 Warajevo release 1.5.
1 Warajevo is the best emulator for pure DOS. We want to tell you that the
1 Warajevo format.
1 Warajevo format, appending files to the current Warajevo tape file. When you
1 Warajevo emulator. It supports three internal 64 Kb memory banks called HOME,
1 Warajevo emulator, and newer releases, allow mixing of 80x86 machine code
1 Warajevo emulator still does not have a good emulation of the video system
1 Warajevo emulator recognizes well-known multicolor routines and it adapt
1 Warajevo emulator has indirect support of .SLT snapshot format (which needs
1 Warajevo database. This conversion also looks at the content of the SGD file
1 Warajevo database unfortunately has limitations of the number of records in
1 WINDOWS
1 WARAJEVO.REG Registration entry update file for updating Windows 95 registry
1 WARAJEVO.PAL file which is supported with the Warajevo 2.51 contains
1 WARAJEVO.PAL file is strongly recommended.
1 WARAJEVO.PAL file is not present, the emulator will use the default VGA
1 WARAJEVO.PAL Palette file, may be customized to change palette colors
1 WARAJEVO.ICO MS Windows icon
1 WARAJEVO.HLP Help file for the environment
1 WARAJEVO.EXE Full environment of the emulator
1 WARAJEVO.DOC Documentation in English
1 WARAJEVO), erases its content if it was previously created, and then, by
1 WARAJEVO is:
1 WARAJEVO [<short_name>] [<tape_name>.TAP] [<snap_name>.Z80] [[<mdr1_name>.MDR]
1 WARAJEVO ATICATAC
1 WARAJEVO /S<any_Spec_file> [/C[<code>]] [/G]
1 W<word1> [<word2> [<word3> ...]] POKE WORDS
1 W50 ? 400 Poke words 50 (e.g. bytes 50 and 0), 65535 ('?'
1 W40000 #C500 $ 44200 Poke words 40000, #C500, value of currently
1 W'ZX' Poke following sequence of bytes: 'Z',0,'X',0 at
1 Vaggelis Kapartzianis (author of ZX32 emulator) say that ZX Spectrum +3 disc
1 VRSTA Category of the program AN 4
1 VGA card), the screen is updating in a small chunks at the moments which
1 VGA card (the last computer is included more due to curiosity). On this place
1 VERIFY x$[{CODE [m[,n]]|DATA
1 VERIFY *x$[{,|;}m[{,|;}y$]][{CODE [m[,n]]|DATA
1 VERIFY *x$,[c...]
1 VERIFY !x$[{CODE [m[,n]]|DATA
1 V - Views all blocks in memory. While viewing you have these suboptions:
1 V - Too slow on EGA/VGA
1 V View the screen
1 V VIEW SCREEN
1 Using this program you can transfer all programs saved with the normal speed.
1 Using this method the main database made smaller. The list box contains the
1 Using the option /P you will activate ZX or TS2040 printer emulation:
1 Using the option /J this may be changed:
1 Using it, you will force Windows to work like DOS, so you will not have any
1 Unlike the CAT command in BASIC, this option will show some additional
1 Unfortunately, this allows the patching of 8086 'Trojan horses' into Z80
1 Unfortunately, everything is not as perfect as it sounds: in certain programs
1 Unfortunately, emulated border above and below paper is too thin to allow
1 Unfortunately, DSP have too slow response for this purpose. That's why we use
1 USEROUT: CMP CL,31 ; Address checking
1 ULA reads from the screen memory and sends it to the video device. We emulated
1 U Undo all changes of registers
1 U UNDO REGISTER CHANGES
1 Treasure Island, 4D Terror Daktil, GU! etc.) now work correctly (synchronous
1 To solve this problem, you may, after returning to Z80 mode, force the
1 To be more clear, these bytes will have following values:
1 To allow correct working of such programs, we have introduced the optional
1 To achieve this, perform following steps:
1 Timex version of the emulator.
1 Timex version of the emulator has a totally different meaning, which will be
1 Timex specificity.
1 Timex Sinclair 2068 statement extensions:
1 Timex BASIC interpreter allows the running of BASIC programs from the DOCK
1 Thunder') rely on this fact.
1 This will switch on extended resolution mode (you will get trash on the
1 This will start the microdrive "motor", but also the "microdrive erasing
1 This will start the microdrive "motor" without other harmful effects. You can
1 This will interrupt many programs.
1 This speed must be about 1500 Bd for programs saved using a normal speed, but
1 This program will start the microdrive "motor" and will display the bytes
1 This numbering of banks is in according to convention used in various routines
1 This is recommended if you have a sound card and a not-very-fast machine (on
1 This is mostly unessential, because with these instructions high byte of I/O
1 This is brief table of sound chip registers:
1 This feature is now implemented also in the emulator. To try this, you must
1 This feature is especially useful in compiled snapshot files (see chapter 6.).
1 This effect is fully emulated, because some Spectrum programs (like 'Rolling
1 This command will display result in same form as command '?' (see below).
1 This can be due to bug in the emulator, or due to interference with 386 memory
1 These options may be used for various kinds of batch testing, etc.
1 These options define the input and output device.
1 There are two functions on the keypad (on the brackets) which delete the
1 There are a few reasons for using these options:
1 Then, if parameter <word> is present, monitor acts like CLEAR <word>-1: NEW in
1 The window can be shown without some of these elements.
1 The trap routine that loads a block returns most of the registers like the
1 The signatures are bits which describe what to do with data bytes. When the
1 The side effect is that pressing of these keys in the 'Calculator' mode
1 The second problem is with programs which have very long blocks where one
1 The required buffer length is:
1 The preferred method for transfer depends on many things: which machine and
1 The original tape file will be saved in a backup (BAK) file. You will see on
1 The option /JK will read this port from cursor keys and the grey '+' or '~'
1 The option /A is ignored if the option /R is given too.
1 The option /@@<time> is similar, but after the given time limit the emulator
1 The option 'Hide' changes the name of the selected file by appending CHR$ 0
1 The only exception is sequences consisting of #ED's; if they are encountered,
1 The numerical expressions (in all Basic forms) have the following form:
1 The numbers have the form d[d...][.[d...]][{E|e}[{+|-}]d[d...]], and a
1 The necessary data about us is:
1 The meaning of these parameters is as follows:
1 The meaning of the function keys in the environment will be described in
1 The maximum usable report widths in characters are:
1 The main reason for not supporting something is that we don't want to fill
1 The loading of the program with a non-standard routine is much slower than in
1 The hexadecimal address of the instruction which was interrupted is written.
1 The handler must check this address, and if it is not the address of the
1 The first letter of REDPODAT is P, V, J, T, S, M or O, for producer, category,
1 The first 4 constants are not dependent on loading speed, and changing these
1 The file DEFAULT.CFG is a simple ASCII file with parameters separated by
1 The fields 'M', 'V' and 'L' are meaningful only in the 128K version, and
1 The directory tree enables you to move through directories by using the
1 The different archivers (PKZIP, LHARC, ARJ etc.) differs on way of encoding of
1 The difference may be noticed only when SP points to the location immediately
1 The dialog for this option contains an input line for entering the name of
1 The described command parameters have priority in relation to the parameters
1 The default value when /Q is not given is 150. If you have problems with
1 The cursor keys on the numerical keyboard, like the grey cursor keys,
1 The conversion rules will be described, so you can use these options for
1 The bits D5-D7 when reading return valid values only if they are not masked,
1 The bits D0-D4 when reading return valid values only if they are not masked,
1 The alphanumeric expressions have the following form:
1 The Timex Sinclair 2068 also introduces two new numerical functions:
1 The 48K version displays asterisks ('*') instead.
1 The '128 Basic' no longer accepts some incomplete syntax forms accepted by
1 The '+3 Basic' doesn't accept '128 Basic' extensions (except the commands
1 Tape Manager described in chapter 2.4. The list box 'Tape position' allows
1 Tab: CAPS SHIFT + SYMBOL SHIFT (EXTENDED MODE)
1 T[<word1> [<word2> [<byte>]]] TEXT LIST
1 TZX format. If a TZX file contains a 'Snapshot' block, it will be extracted
1 TZX blocks, read the documentation about the TZX file format, which may be
1 TVPARS, WIDTH, BAUD, some undocumented editor variables in page 7 of RAM
1 TSWRDCII.TXT) using the method described earlier. The rules of conversions
1 TS2068_X.ROM ROM file for the TS2068 version of the emulator (EXROM ROM)
1 TS2068_H.ROM ROM file for the TS2068 version of the emulator (HOME ROM)
1 TS2068.EXE Kernel of the TS2068 version of the emulator (without env)
1 TS2068 basic also doesn't accept incomplete syntax forms for ERASE x$,
1 TRD file must exist, and it must be properly formatted using the SP105
1 TRANSHLP.DOC Flowchart diagram which helps the user to transfer Spectrum
1 TRAKA Tape (or snapshot etc.) name AN 10
1 TR-DOS disc is performed using different commands from loading from tape. So,
1 TLL bas 180+0 This is BASIC program called TLL. It's length
1 TEMP <- (PC-2)
1 TELEPHONE chr a$(), 12123 This is an alphanumeric array stored with
1 TAPE_ZX.SPC.
1 TAPE_ZX.SPC for tape emulation, but we support conversions from files with
1 TAPE.TAP becomes LTAPE.TAP.
1 TAP file which is not in native Warajevo TAP format. The emulator in this case
1 TAP file is mixture of EAR Sample and normal blocks in any order, e.g.
1 TAP file (you can store in a TAP file ordinary music using this option).
1 T40000 50000 10 Displays HEX and ASCII memory dump from address
1 T1000 2000 Displays HEX and ASCII memory dump from address
1 T$ Displays HEX and ASCII memory dump from value of
1 T#C000 Displays HEX and ASCII memory dump from address
1 T - Tape name and position
1 T - Tape emulation problems
1 T Displays HEX and ASCII memory dump from current
1 Surrey KT9 1JX
1 Suppose the shared file for package transfer has the name TRANSFER.NET (this
1 Summarily: the network emulation works, but to point to which it can to fully
1 Such programs are extremely rare, one example is Barbarian 2 128. Memory
1 Statements:
1 Starting from release 2.0, the border implementation on a VGA card is
1 Started from release 1.5. this is not frequent problem, and it is reduced only
1 Start this program before starting the emulator for first time (virtually
1 Speed measuring is incorrect under NT, so use /%200 for nearly real Spectrum
1 Spectrum. Of course, file access time is shorter on shorter cartridges.
1 Spectrum. Later, when the program reads keyboard ports, emulator reads this
1 Spectrum, independent of PC computer speed), and Warajevo still has a lot of
1 Spectrum, KEYPAD controller goes through following sequence of states (this is
1 Spectrum this is physically impossible). This may cause data damage.
1 Spectrum style.
1 Spectrum programs easier, and not only programs in Warajevo format (TAP, Z80,
1 Spectrum program which is not fast enough, but you want fast execution (for
1 Spectrum memory (ROM and RAM, ROM in the direct 80x86 mode may also be
1 Spectrum is complementary:
1 Spectrum interrupt will be called after 312 scan lines, e.g. after 69888 T
1 Spectrum file which you want to convert into SPECEM format.
1 Spectrum emulator. The monitor can be started by pressing F3, and it is fully
1 Spectrum emulator, which, without underestimating anybody's work, had very
1 Spectrum database format, including:
1 Spectrum and ESC on the PC and try again. You may need to leave the
1 Spectrum ROM, and it is based on the routine written by Rui Fernando
1 Spectrum C programs may have more blocks with one header.
1 Spectrum 48K, Spectrum 128K or Timex Sinclair 2068. If a snapshot file is
1 Spectrum 128K), two ATARI joystick connectors, changed timing of picture
1 Spectrum 128 with the TR-DOS disc interface. It uses the TRD format. This is,
1 Sound Blaster, loading with synchronous border emulation and multicolor mode
1 Some of these options may exist together, for example, you can use /JC and
1 Some keys on the PC keyboard have a special meaning:
1 Some fields (but not all) may remain empty.
1 Some destructive functions are activated if you simultaneously press '0' on
1 So, we hope that you now understand why 'Infinite pause' TZX block is
1 So, if you execute POKE 23432,128 from BASIC, ROM routine will not scan the
1 So, if you are not an advanced user, you may skip this chapter, except
1 So, connect the tape recorder to the interface, type LOAD "" in the emulator,
1 Slovenia, which is planned to be a universal format for keeping Spectrum
1 Sinclair Network emulation, and other parameters of the network emulation.
1 Sinclair 2048). At the last, if you put a header 255,3,3,0,0,0,0,0,0 in front
1 Since the emulator does not perform any kind of checking with this option,
1 Since interface file is updated only when a package is collected, the emulator
1 Similarly, you can easily solve many harder cases too, of course, if you have
1 Similarly, we have RLP, RRCP, RLCP, SLAP, SLLP, SRAP and SRLP. We have also
1 Selecting the 'Cancel' button or pressing ESC will cancel changes and return
1 Select the name of the destination tape using the dialog. The default name
1 Select the directory as you would for 'Change directory' in the 'Dos' menu
1 Sarajevo which has been surrounded for more than three years. Our names are
1 Sampling from tape needs allocation of huge memory buffers (for example, 5
1 Sampled tone records may be very long (500 Kb or more). Due to technical
1 Sample blocks need be observed as one logical unit, which is splitted to
1 Sam Coupe are not yet implemented).
1 SYSTEM
1 SWISS BANK CO ZUERICH (Swiss) USD 147547-0
1 SWISS BANK CO ZUERICH (Swiss) CHF 163973-0
1 STICK (m,n) FREE
1 SS:SP) after returning to Z80 mode, so you need not save these registers.
1 SPECTRUM emulator by Pedro Gimeno.
1 SPECSIM.CFG Local configuration file used by emulator for communication with
1 SPEC48.EXE Kernel of the 48K version of the emulator (without environment)
1 SPEC128.EXE work in text or graphic mode. The required memory is about 550K or
1 SPEC128.EXE Kernel of the 128K version of the emulator (without environment)
1 SP (Spec 0.99), PRG, SEM, SIT, SNP, SCR, MDR, DCK and ZIP.
1 SOUND m,n[;p,q...]
1 SOFTWARE.DBT - Text assigned to records in the main database
1 SOFTWARE.DBT The file with descriptions joined to file SOFTWARE.DBF
1 SOFTWARE.DBF - Main database
1 SOFTWARE.DBF The program database
1 SNP, TZX, SLT etc.) and even programs which are archived in ZIP files.
1 SNAP.Z80. If the names of drive and directory are omitted, the assumed names
1 SNA format, which allows storage of 128K programs.
1 SLT is an expanded Z80 format which also includes external levels which are
1 SLOW, FAST, LPT1 and SBST which may be changed by pressing SPACE (the default
1 SLOW tape emulation mode, when executing IN A,(254) instruction, the emulator
1 SKRACENO Short name AN 10
1 SKANDINAVISKA ENSKILDA B.STOCKHOLM (Sweden) SEK 5201-85 507 48
1 SIMULOPC Startup options AN 50
1 SHOOT.TAP. Sometimes it may be useful. This option can not be set from the
1 SHIFT+TAB. If you have a mouse, you can directly access the items by moving
1 SGD.INI and its GameDir property, to determine the paths to programs which
1 SFNEXT, so if their contents are not corrupted, in many cases after A128
1 SETP n,(IX+nn),r
1 SETP 5,(IY+6),H
1 SET WARAJEVO=[G|T] [path]
1 SET WARAJEVO=C:\TEMPDIR (the best place to do it is in the file
1 SAVE x$[{CODE m,n|DATA
1 SAVE *x$[{,|;}m[{,|;}y$]][{CODE n,p|DATA
1 SAVE *x$,[c...]
1 SAVE !x$ [{CODE m,n|DATA
1 SAVE DEFB #ED,#00 ; Switch to 80x86 assembler
1 S<word1> <word2> [<byte1> [<byte2> ...]] SAVE BLOCK (OR BYTES)
1 S16384 6912 'Scr' Save screen as a 'Bytes' file with filename 'Scr'
1 S16384 6912 Save 6912 bytes from address 16384 (e.g. screen)
1 S - Too slow on Herc/CGA/EGAmono
1 S - Short name
1 S - Saves all the blocks from the memory to the output device.
1 Russia, Slovakia, Slovenia, South Africa, Spain, Sweden, USA, Uruguay,
1 Register Length Description
1 Record length: 149
1 R[<word>] REGISTER CHANGE
1 RRP (IX+5),B
1 ROM, because monitor knows that RST 40 in Derby ROM have one word inline
1 ROM will not work (this is very rare, though). From release 1.5, the command
1 ROM this will cause a crash due to different ROM addresses). If you give a
1 ROM routines needs emulation of this anomaly too.
1 ROM files ZXP2_0.ROM and ZXP2_1.ROM instead ZX128_0.ROM and ZX128_1.ROM. Some ill-based
1 RESTORE [m]
1 RESET [{*|#n}]
1 REM [c...]
1 REDPODAT See below AN 60
1 RECOGNIZER and we explain it in more details in technical part of the manual.
1 RANDOMIZE [n]
1 RAM in bytes. In the middle of the screen there is a window with the current
1 R5000 Sets currently marked register to 5000
1 R14 will be always 1. However, in the emulator, this bit is 0 when the KEYPAD
1 R - Removes the last block from the memory.
1 R - Hangs up or resets even with /I
1 R Sets currently marked register to current value
1 QEMM the consequence is mainly hanging up the computer). So, be very careful
1 QEMM or MS Windows 386. So, the emulator displays a warning message if the
1 Q - Resets the computer.
1 Q Quit the monitor
1 Q QUIT MONITOR
1 Pentium, 133 MHz Pentium, 200 MHz Pentium under NT, and 8 MHz AT, all using
1 Pentium (but on original Spectrum it is nearly instantaneous). Keep in mind
1 Path field' the field 'Path' must contain not only the path, but the full
1 Pascal which is used in the environment (different protocol is used from some
1 Parameters <free_len> and <busy_len> have a greater range (say, from 2 to
1 Palette file WARAJEVO.PAL is simple 48-byte long binary file, in which first
1 Page: In 48 or Timex version: In 128 version:
1 Page Up: Cursor up for 10 rows (PAGE UP)
1 Page Down: Cursor down for 10 rows (PAGE DOWN)
1 PUNOIME Full name of the program AN 30
1 PROIZVODJ Producer AN 4
1 PROBLEMI Problems (coded) NU 5 0
1 PRIORITET Marking sign AN 1
1 PRINT {|x|x$|#m|AT m,n|BRIGHT m|FLASH m|INK m|INVERSE m|PAPER m|TAB m|OVER m}
1 POZICIJA Block position in the tape NU 3 0
1 POUT and POUT2), and system variables BANKM, RAMRST, P_RAMT, PIP and RASP.
1 POSITION.STS (and with Kempston joystick emulation using mouse). If you omit
1 PORT 255 (TIMEX CONTROL REGISTER):
1 PORT 247 (INTERFACE 1 DATA REGISTER):
1 PORT 246 (SOUND CHIP REGISTERS):
1 PORT 245 (SOUND CHIP REGISTER SELECTION):
1 PORT 244 (HORIZONTAL MMU REGISTER):
1 PORT 239 (INTERFACE 1 CONTROL/STATUS REGISTER):
1 PORT 231 (MICRODRIVE DATA REGISTER):
1 PORT 127 (AERCO PRINTER INTERFACE):
1 POKE 23562,100 (from BASIC, or from the built-in machine monitor).
1 POKE 23398,0 within BASIC program). Variable ROW01 contains some flags for
1 PLOT [{BRIGHT m|FLASH m|INK m|INVERSE m|PAPER m|OVER m}{;|,}...]x,y
1 PLAY command, and for other details, read Spectrum 128 manual, and eventually,
1 PLAY and SPECTRUM, because there is another method for other 128-like
1 PIP and P_RAMT variables and acts like:
1 PENETRATOR run 10, 1200+30 This is a BASIC program with the name
1 PEN* in the input line 'Short name' and then select 'OK'.
1 PCTOOLS) but if you make changes on addresses shown on table of the previous
1 PC. For this purpose you must connect two computers as in the previous
1 PC and Spectrum commercial programs. There are also options for converting
1 PC analogue joystick. If you want only right joystick emulation (for example
1 PC <- TEMP
1 PC <- (PC-2)
1 PASCAL and C Compiler.
1 PARALLEL.COM External driver for parallel printer interface emulation
1 PARALLEL.ASM Source file for the driver PARALLEL.COM (as an example to show
1 PAPER and border commands in the program. Principally, there is one unsolvable
1 P? Increments the memory pointer by one
1 P<byte1> [<byte2> [<byte3> ... ]] POKE BYTES
1 P10 100 ? 25 Puts bytes 10 and 100 at current value of the
1 P'Help revival of Bosnia!' Puts string 'Help revival of Bosnia!' at current
1 P - Software producer or distributor
1 Overlays are stored in such a way that, for example, an overlay with
1 Output: bits D0-D4: 'masks' for bits D0-D4 reading (see text below); also
1 Output: bits D0-D2: select RAM bank at addresses above 49152
1 Output: bits D0-D2: change border
1 Output: bit D1: motor speed
1 Output: bit D0: When D0=0, main video data (data about pixels on the
1 Output: bit D0: KEYPAD clock (see KEYPAD emulation)
1 Output: bit D0: COMMS DATA bit; 0 = output to network, 1 = output to
1 Output: Writes sent value to active sound chip register, like port 49149 on
1 Output: The bytes will be buffered, and will be flushed on the cartridge
1 Output: Sends byte to the printer.
1 Output: Selects active sound chip register, like port 65533 on Spectrum 128.
1 Output: Every bit in this register is linked with one 8-Kbyte chunk of
1 Output: Acts as on real ZX Interface 1, e.g. bit D0 is RS232 output. We
1 Otherwise (if some key in current row changes its position), controller goes
1 Oriented Software). LROS programs are mapped at address 0 in the DOCK bank
1 Options /L6 and /L7 may be set using the 'Sound' dialog in the 'Setup' menu
1 One schematic of this interface may be found in the file DIAGRAM.Z80 given
1 On the sending emulator type and run a similar program:
1 On the receiving emulator, you will get the message "Hello from net!" very
1 On a real tape, every block consists of 5 parts:
1 On CGA and EGAMono it will not help, instead switch off attributes using F5
1 Obviously, higher byte is maximal 23, so maximal distance is 6143 bytes. To
1 OUTOK: MOV AL,AH ; Update variable which tells which
1 OUT 31,1 perform paging, may look like this:
1 OUT 255,3 (in this case, switching back to normal mode using OUT 255,0 must
1 OPIS Program description (descriptor) MO 10
1 OPEN #m{,|;}x$[{,|;}n[{,|;}y$]]
1 OPEN #m,x$,[c...]
1 OPEN #m,x$
1 ONLINE state.
1 ON ERR {GOTO x|CONTINUE|RESET}
1 OLDBANK DB 0 ; Initially bank 0 is active
1 O - Problems not listed here
1 O Open or close monitor output file 'MONITOR.OUT'
1 O TOGGLES OUTPUT FILE ON/OFF
1 None of the items on this information panel are selectable. Selecting the
1 Next, the commands P, K, and W will execute XOR function between <byte> and
1 Network is essentially based on the data-link layer of the transfer protocol.
1 Netherlands, Hungary, India, Italy, Macedonia, Norway, Portugal, Romania,
1 Native formats of 'TAP' files are different in these two emulators, but
1 Namely, in this mode of transmission, full transfer protocol is not used (ACK
1 Namely, if you use 1 as the argument (e.g. A1) the command A will be executed
1 NEWS.DOC What's new in release 2.51, English text
1 NAME DEFM 'SCREEN.DAT'
1 N. V. Shalaev from Russia, which emulates the expanded version of the ZX
1 N - Sound unrecognizable
1 N Shows address of current Z80 interrupt handler
1 N INTERRUPT ROUTINE ADDRESS
1 MultiMachine emulator by Paul Hodgson from Great Britain. On FTP sites,
1 Most probably, something is wrong with the filename, or the filename doesn't
1 More about this in the chapters 2.3. and 7.7. The following options do not
1 Maybe this transfer will need a greater value of <block_delay> parameter than
1 Manager. This will immediately switch to sample loading mode. Such manual
1 M[<word> [<byte1> [<byte2> ...]]] SET MEMORY POINTER
1 MOVE) may be much slower than on an original machine.
1 MOVE {#m|x$[{,|;}n[{,|;}y$]]} TO {#p|z$[{,|;}q[{,|;}r$]]}
1 MOVE x$,y$
1 MOVE x$,[c...]
1 MOVE x$ TO y$
1 MONTY128 /S0
1 MONITOR.OUT The file created by the monitor
1 MMU port, border color etc. according to the values which are stored on the
1 MMINER /VH
1 MIDI receiving channel which will be used). For full syntax and meaning of the
1 MIDI receiving channel is set to 1 (subcommand Y in PLAY command determines
1 MERGE *x$[{,|;}m[{,|;}y$]]
1 MERGE *x$,[c...]
1 MEMORY byt 32000, 3121 This is a memory image stored with the name
1 [email protected]
1 [email protected]
1 MDR and DCK), but also programs in the formats of other emulators (SNA, BLK,
1 MDA demo and loader of Songs In Line 5) intensively swaps memory pages
1 MATERJEZIK Messages language AN 4
1 MAKEREG.EXE Utility for registering Spectrum file types for use in Win95
1 MAKEREG utility in the directory in which Warajevo emulator is located. Select
1 MAIN_EXEC on the Timex is at address 3624, and the label NEW is at 3357. The
1 M40000 5 3 200 Sets memory pointer to value 40000, then puts
1 M24500 Sets memory pointer to value 24500
1 M24220 3 ? ? 'Sinclair' Sets memory pointer to value 24220, puts value 3
1 M$ 'ZX' Sets memory pointer to value of currently marked
1 M - Machine type
1 M - Exits with message
1 M Sets memory pointer to value of currently marked
1 Luxe', 'Trans Express', 'Fire Copy V1.0', 'Adventure quest' and 'Boulder Dash
1 Lunter's program).
1 Lunter's emulator. If you get the message 'Microdrive not present' when you
1 Lunter's emulator, but starting with release 2.0, Warajevo can work with
1 Lunter's TAP format of tapes (TAP files) is also supported, with nearly equal
1 Lunter TAP files without conversions. A lot of snapshot files in 'Z80' format
1 Lightning.
1 Letters A, B, C, D have meaning 'state of first, second etc. key in current
1 Later, we will see that this field is linked to the descriptor which describes
1 L[<word>] LOAD BLOCK
1 LROS program needs header 0,2,2,0,0,0,0,0,0 in front of pure binary image of
1 LROS program (mapped at address 0 in DOCK bank). If the length of the source
1 LROS or AROS programs). But, if you select a file which is not in a Warajevo
1 LPT1 port, emulation of several RAM and ROM expansions which were made for
1 LPT1 port using only one resistor and diode for protection (this method is
1 LPRINT {|x|x$|#m|AT m,n|BRIGHT m|FLASH m|INK m|INVERSE m|PAPER m|TAB m|OVER m}
1 LOAD x$[{CODE [m[,n]]|DATA
1 LOAD *x$[{,|;}m[{,|;}y$]][{CODE [m[,n]]|DATA
1 LOAD *x$,[c...]
1 LOAD "" is performed automatically. Also, the writing of the message
1 LOAD !x$[{CODE [m[,n]]|DATA
1 LLIST {#m[,n]|[n]}
1 LK 5013/91 LK 11899/88
1 LIST {#m[,n]|[n]}
1 LD_EDGE subroutine, and with totally non-standard routines. This complex
1 LDIR acts as
1 LD H,(IY+6)
1 LD B,(IX+5)
1 LD (IY+6),H
1 LD (IX+5),B
1 L16384 Loads block at address 16384 (e.g. in the video
1 L - Message language
1 L - Loads the header and corresponding data block from the input device until
1 L - If hangs, can not help F9, F10
1 L Loads block at current value of memory pointer
1 Kempston joystick. Register I may points to anywhere, without problems,
1 Kapartzianis and MultiMachine by Paul Hodgson). However, we think that
1 Kac which may be found on the Internet. Emulation of the AY chip in SBST mode
1 KOMPJUTER Computer type AN 4
1 KEYPAD. This is the addition to the keyboard delivered with the first
1 KEYPAD, and this will speed up BASIC program (even when KEYPAD emulation is
1 KEYPAD reading too:
1 KEYPAD keys there are also the labels showing different enhanced editor
1 KEYPAD emulation activates or deactivates by pressing the key 'NumLock', and
1 K<word1> <word2> <byte> KILL MEMORY BLOCK
1 K16384 22527 0 Fills address from 16384 to 22527 with 0 (e.g.
1 J[<word>] JUMP TO
1 J. Puts breakpoint at value of the memory pointer,
1 J#C328 Puts breakpoint at address #C328, then leave
1 J Puts breakpoint after current instruction, then
1 It will be converted to pair of Z80 and TAP files, where the Z80 file will
1 It seems that Timex Sinclair does not support this effect, so on Timex version
1 Interface I is emulated or not, whether the Interface I ROM is paged in or
1 Interface I emulation. So, this option generates snapshots to be just like
1 Interface 1 shadow ROM) follows one inline byte parameter, and it will be
1 Interface 1 is present). This command is very expanded on 128 version of the
1 Interface 1 hardware due to rather unclear reasons). So, claiming successes
1 Interface 1 are free for expanding if the options for emulation of these
1 Instead, the user will prefer setting them using the environment. However, it
1 Input: bits D0-D4: read keyboard halfrows, related with bits A8-A15
1 Input: bits D0-D4: last values sent to these bits
1 Input: bits D0-D4: always one
1 Input: bit D0: not used, probably always 1 (not confirmed)
1 Input: bit D0: joystick moving to right (1=active)
1 Input: bit D0: encoder bit
1 Input: bit D0: 0 means the cartridge is protected or the motor is not
1 Input: Reads a value from active sound chip register.
1 Input: Bytes will be read from the buffer, and buffer will be loaded from
1 Input: Bit D7 is RS232 input, and D0 is network input. Bits D1-D4 on real
1 Input: Always 255.
1 Info' blocks will optionally be taken into consideration (depending of the
1 In this case, there is no help, you must wait until routine finish (or use
1 In this case, bits D5-D7 could not be masked.
1 In this case, bits D0-D4 could not be masked.
1 In the emulated tape in native Warajevo format, we keep flag byte and data
1 In the case of uncompressed sample blocks, the length is rounded up and the
1 In such cases, it is recommended that you split the database into smaller
1 In additions to standard cursor movement, the embedded editor understands
1 In 48 version, pages 4, 5 and 8 are saved. In 128 version, all pages from 3 to
1 If you work under MS Windows, it is good idea to put these options into the
1 If you type ZXCOMP /?, you will get some quick help about the allowed command
1 If you start a compiled program with the switch /?, you will get a short list
1 If you press arrow down, you can select filenames previously entered using
1 If you perform described task correctly, you should have access to drive Q: as
1 If you omit the extension for the file <z80_file>, 'Z80' will be assumed. If
1 If you haven't got a network, you may try emulation with two emulators under
1 If you have a slower computer, using some tricks the emulator can perform
1 If you have A4 printer, maximum legal value of this parameter who does not
1 If we numerate rows from 1 to 5 (1 is a top row), the controller scans rows in
1 If this occurred in Shadow ROM (e.g. ROM of ZX Interface 1) the text
1 If the produced sound has a duration of exactly 10 seconds, everything will
1 If the item has a highlighted first letter, you can press ALT with this
1 If size yyyy is greater or equal than 10 (code 011 in signatures), the next
1 If one of these files doesn't exist, the program will create a empty one. The
1 If nothing happens, check whether your instrument is in MIDI mode, and whether
1 If don't have a assembler, enter this program using the following BASIC
1 I[<word>] INSTRUCTION SINGLE STEP
1 IX, IY, DE, BC and the memory pointer (MP).
1 ISO-OSI network referent model). Using this, we achieve total independence of
1 INT 0DH. The emulator traps this interrupt and tries some actions to solve
1 INPUT {x|x$|#m|AT m,n|BRIGHT m|FLASH m|INK m|INVERSE m|LINE
1 INKEY$ function in BASIC will read KEYPAD too and for KEYPAD keys it will
1 IN/OUT ports, due to such reason we implemented this feature too. Also,
1 IN 32765 will cause crash, as on real Spectrum 128. This effect is implemented
1 IM 2, NEG, RETI, RETN. For example, NEG have even eight different codes.
1 IF x THEN b
1 ID with following meaning:
1 ID number, status of each chunk in the bank, etc.
1 ICO&PIFS.ZIP which contains set of icons for Spectrum file types. Then, run
1 ICO&PIFS.ZIP contains PIF files which are made with settings which are the
1 ICO&PIFS.ZIP Archive with icons for various Spectrum file types, and PIF
1 I40000 Performs a continous single stepping until the
1 I/O level) is technically very hard to implement, because the real Sinclair
1 I/O devices (for example, the ULA chip covers all even I/O addresses) if you
1 I - Hangs up or resets without /I
1 I Performs a instruction single step
1 Hz) and will be appended to the end of the current Warajevo tape file. After
1 However, we want to emphasize that Warajevo is a Real-Time emulator
1 However, this handler will not work on all machines.
1 However, the user must preserve value of ES segment register in 48K version of
1 However, the emulator does not recognize non-standard saving routines, which
1 However, some operations which use intensive ROM switching (for example,
1 However, if the SLT file contains overlays in a non-sequential order, the
1 However, correct working of all of the multicolor effects needs exact
1 However, Windows can also run DOS applications. Here are the informations
1 However, QEMM, EMM386, MS Windows etc. have also the same handler, which has a
1 Home: Cursor to the start of the BASIC line (HOME)
1 Headerless len 20000 F:255 This is a 20000 bytes long data block with
1 Hanging up or resetting the emulator is now possible only due to bug into the
1 HP LaserJet Courier: 80 characters
1 HP LaserJet Compress: 132 characters
1 HL <- HL + 1
1 H - Loads headerless blocks from the input device until the BREAK key is
1 H - Bad Herc/CGA/EGAmono shades
1 H Toggles hex/dec display on screen
1 H HEX/DEC TOGGLE
1 Gimeno). We must remark again that loading using Sound Blaster is very
1 Gerton's program. When we contacted Gerton, he had the same opinion about it.
1 Gerton Lunter up to and including release 3.03 so you can load the snapshot
1 General MIDI standard, not MPU-401 standard) and, of course, MIDI compatible
1 GODISTE Year of production AN 4
1 GENSASCII.TXT) using the method desribced earlier. The rules of conversions
1 GAMES.DAT, but also complete SGD database (90K still remains free). Of course,
1 From the description above, one can conclude that only four combinations of
1 Fortunately, it seems that nobody produces a software which uses described
1 For this time, the receiving station waits appearance of a signal on the line
1 For this purpose you use the option /S:
1 For the types 'Number array' and 'Character array', the array name is
1 For the type 'Bytes' the address where the block will be loaded is written.
1 For speedlock programs, see the technical part of the manual.
1 For more details about network emulation, read the chapter about it in the
1 For example:
1 For example, suppose that we have a game which loads levels using a subroutine
1 For example, sequence
1 For example, after the options /TARC* /O, the emulator will recognize only
1 File: SOFTWARE.DBF
1 File: ADDITION.DBF
1 Fields MATERJEZIK, PROIZVODJ and VRSTA don't contain full text, but only the
1 Field Name Description Type Width Dcp
1 Field Name Description Type Width Dcp
1 Ferreiera Ribeiro from Portugal. The radio buttons 'Input device' allow
1 F[<byte1>|<word1> [<byte2>|<word2> ...]] FIND BYTES/WORDS/STRINGS
1 FORMAT {x$|LINE m|LPRINT x$[;y$]}
1 FORMAT x${,|;}m[{,|;}y$]
1 FORMAT x$;m
1 FORMAT x$,[c...]
1 FORMAT x$, CAT and MOVE x$,y$.
1 FILES, and it uses special files (with the extension .ZXT) which contain the
1 FAQ.DOC Frequently asked questions, English text
1 F? 63 Finds sequence who have second byte 63
1 F30 25 ? #FD Finds sequence which have first and second byte
1 F205 1366 Find instruction CALL LD_BYTES in the memory
1 F2 4 'money' Finds sequence 2,4,'m','o','n','e','y' in the
1 F12 - When multicolor emulation mode is active (using F5), pressing F11
1 F11 - When multicolor emulation mode is active (using F5), pressing F11
1 F10000 is same as F16 39. Due to internal coding of '?', command F65535 will
1 F10 1000 20 Finds sequence 10,232,3,20 in the memory
1 F10 - Calls the environment. The current state of the emulator will be saved
1 F1 2 3 Finds sequence 1,2,3 in the memory
1 F'Sinclair' Finds string 'Sinclair' in the memory
1 F'A' 'B' 'C'
1 F - Loads the headers and displays them on the screen, but doesn't store them
1 F - Full name
1 F - Flickering
1 Extension will always be '.DAT'. This may be practical if you have not enough
1 Everything is here similar like on Spectrum 128, except usage of register R14
1 Every IN A,(254) instruction is checked for a part of loading routine, except
1 Escape sequences see chapter 5.2.
1 Esc: CAPS SHIFT + SPACE (BREAK)
1 Epson A4 Pica: 80 characters
1 Epson A4 Elite Compressed: 160 characters
1 Epson A4 Compressed: 132 characters
1 Epson A3 Pica: 132 characters
1 Epson A3 Elite Compressed: 255 characters
1 Epson A3 Compressed: 200 characters
1 End: Cursor to the end of the BASIC line (END)
1 Else, it sends data package to the receiving station, which receives it, and
1 E[<word>] EXIT/EXECUTE
1 EXROM and DOCK. The HOME bank contains 16 Kb ROM (called HOME ROM) at
1 EXC: MOV AL,ES:[DI] ; Swap bytes into both banks
1 ERASE x${,|;}m{,|;}y$
1 ERASE x$,[c...]
1 EGAMono cards in some programs takes a lot of time, and this on slower
1 EGA or a VGA card, and this produces more professional looking results (but
1 EGA Mono or VGA card.
1 EAR sample len 64993 (5807) This is a block which contains pure samples
1 E30000 Continue executing from address 30000
1 E. Continue executing emulator from current value of
1 E-MAIL. Our Internet E-MAIL addresses are:
1 E-MAIL messages.
1 E$ Continue executing emulator from the value of
1 E command. This will force jump at new PC. If you specify optional parameter
1 E Continue executing emulator from the current
1 Due to hardware bug, reading this port is same as writing 255 at this port, so
1 Dragging the pointer using the mouse is a faster way to move it to the
1 Detailed description of exact behaviour of sound chip may be found in the
1 Derby ROM. So, ROM paging is implemented by swapping of some segment registers
1 D[<word1> [<word2> [<byte1> [<byte2>]]]] DISASSEMBLE
1 DS register points to the emulated Spectrum memory, and the registers need
1 DRAW [{BRIGHT m|FLASH m|INK m|INVERSE m|PAPER m|OVER m}{;|,}...]x,y[,z]
1 DOS variable WARAJEVO to the full path (including the drive) of the desired
1 DONE: STC ; Signal 'OK'
1 DODATNI For future expansion AN 10
1 DOCK bank. The letter at the left end corresponds to the highest block
1 DOCK and EXROM memory banks, so it allows emulation of various ROM/RAM
1 DMA transfer, but our DMA buffer is only one byte long (calculated value is
1 DEUTCHE BANK AG FRANKFURT/M (Germany) USD 9362617
1 DEUTCHE BANK AG FRANKFURT/M (Germany) DEM 9362617
1 DEN NORSKE BANK OSLO (Norway) NOK 7001-02-25335
1 DEN DANSKE BANK COPENHAGEN (Denmark) DKK 512392
1 DELETE [m],[n]
1 DEFAULT.CFG file:
1 DEFAULT.CFG Global emulator configuration file
1 DE <- DE + 1
1 DB #ED,#FF,'<filename>',0 Loads a block from the disc with filename
1 DB #ED,#FE,'<filename>',0 Saves a block from address in register IX with
1 DATA {x|x$}[,{y|y$}...]
1 D7=1 & D6=1 => KEYPAD controller is into working loop.
1 D7=1 & D6=0 => ROM routine detects that something is wrong with KEYPAD and
1 D7=0 & D6=0 => ROM routine waits for reset of KEYPAD controller and responding
1 D7 sent to this port is buffered. When the buffer fills itself, or when the
1 D65000 ? Disassemble from address 65000 to 65535 (this is
1 D43200 43500 ? 2 Disassemble everything like DW n from address
1 D4 (wait) in ZX Interface 1 is set down to 0. Of course, receiving station
1 D30000 Disassemble from address 30000
1 D2=1 (motor off), writing to this port is ignored. When D2=1, the state of bit
1 D23755 25000 ? 1 Disassemble everything like DB n from address
1 D1366 . 14 Disassemble from address 1366 to the current
1 D0 $ 15 0 Disassemble without displaying inline parameters
1 D. Disassemble from the current value of the memory
1 D'Aa' Disassemble from address 65 to address 97 (this
1 D$ #FC38 Disassemble from value of current marked register
1 D for ROM, 0-7 for RAM above 49152 in the 128 version), and a warning message
1 D Disassemble from the current value of the program
1 Coupe, not Lunter's SamRam). If this field contains '16' or '48', the 48K
1 Compressed len 2048 (510) This is a compressed block, it's length is
1 Command Y without parameters will reset memory configuration to be like when
1 Combinations 011, 100, 101 and 111 are possible, but they will not give usable
1 Clicking the part of the scroll bar above the pointer will move the pointer
1 Chessington
1 Characters with codes which is greater than 128 will be reduced to range
1 Carlo Delhez and recently on some other emulators. Warajevo mainly recognizes
1 CapsLock: CAPS SHIFT + 2 (CAPS LOCK)
1 Canada, Czech, Croatia, Danish, France, Germany, Great Britain, Latvia,
1 CREDITANSTALT BANKVEREIN WIEN (Austria) ATS 0101-66536/00
1 COUNTRY.TBL, PROGPATH.TBL, STARTUP.TBL and VOLUMES.TBL. You must confirm the
1 COUNTRY.TBL and PROGPATH.TBL. You must confirm the selection of this option.
1 COPY [{EXP [INVERSE]|x$ TO {y$|SCREEN$|LPRINT|SPECTRUM FORMAT}}]
1 CONFIG.SYS files. Linear memory access also needs temporary processor
1 COMM128.BZX will be sent to the Spectrum 128. Connect the computers as
1 COMM128.BZX Communication program for ZX Spectrum 128
1 COM2) and the communication baud rate (default is 9600 Bd).
1 CLEAR <word-1>: NEW
1 CIRCLE [{BRIGHT m|FLASH m|INK m|INVERSE m|PAPER m|OVER m}{;|,}...]x,y,z
1 CAT {#m[,x$]|[x$]}[EXP]
1 CAT x$,[c...]
1 CAT command.
1 CAT [#m{,|;}]n
1 CALL LOAD, and put these routines at some free space in memory:
1 CALL 50000 with CALL LLEVEL, and put following subroutine somewhere:
1 C<word1> <word2> <word3> INTELLIGENT COPY
1 C:\
1 C40000 50000 100 Copies 100 bytes from address 40000 to address
1 C - Clears all blocks from the memory.
1 C - Category of the program
1 Byte Length Name Meaning
1 Byte Length Name Description
1 Brcanska 10, 71000 Sarajevo, BiH Trg ZAVNOBiH-a 14, 71000 Sarajevo, BiH
1 Blaster), and setup data for the Sound Blaster card (default values are read
1 Blaster) using FM synthesis. The sound is quite good, but the FM method does
1 Blaster input.
1 Bits Size (yyyy)
1 Bits Higher byte of xxxx
1 Be aware of the fact that some donation may be good motivation for us to
1 Basic'. In this cases, you must manually restore these variables if you want
1 Basic and 128 Basic have different "P" channels, and using wrong "P" channel
1 Bank: Currency: Account number:
1 Backspace: CAPS SHIFT + 0 (DELETE)
1 B[<word>] SET/CLEAR BREAKPOINT
1 BUFFER_LENGTH = SAMPLE_FREQUENCY * DURATION_OF_THE_RECORD_IN_SECONDS / 8
1 BRIGHT is implemented only on EGA and VGA. As EGA card has no two levels of
1 BREAK. We think that this is really not very important, although some
1 BC <- BC - 1
1 BASIC system. It recovers system variables, registers, interrupt mode and
1 BASIC programs). The system variables ROW01, ROW23 and ROW45 (addresses 23432,
1 BASIC program that you want to convert into an ASCII file. When you select
1 BASIC for about 10% (in 128 BASIC sometimes even 50%) but R register will not
1 BASIC commands, and a memory bank switching system which allows various ROM
1 BASASCII.TXT.
1 B5DC001C.DAT, C00B0614.DAT, C97300BF.DAT and B97A05D9.DAT. Of course, this
1 B#C3A8 Puts breakpoint at address #C3A8
1 B without parameters clears the breakpoint too.
1 B G Services Tel: (0181) 287 4180
1 B - Border flickers too much
1 B Remove breakpoint
1 As you can see, the documentation in Bosnian language is not more the part of
1 Any previous SpecPic database will be erased.
1 American 11" Letter continuous paper. If you select 'User defined size', you
1 Alternate reading and writing from this port generates 'strobe' signal for the
1 Also, you can directly call the emulator kernel from DOS by typing SPEC48
1 Also, during emulation of IN 239 instruction (reading of the status register),
1 Also, 'Category' will be truncated to 7 characters due to the limitations of
1 All these options are are disabled if KEYPAD emulation on the 128 version is
1 All these operation last about 1-2 seconds.
1 All these effects are implemented.
1 All registers will be unchanged. Flag C will be set if loading was correct. In
1 All data from the VOC file will be converted into EAR Sample blocks (on 30303
1 All bits are shifted to the left. The most significant bit is shifted to C
1 After you select the sector, a message 'This sector is OK' will be displayed
1 After you select the destination file using the file selection dialog you
1 After this, commands T, F, D will execute XOR function between every displayed
1 After this, KEYPAD controller enters a working loop. It scans rows of KEYPAD.
1 Address Instruction With option Purpose
1 AdLib or Sound Blaster don't work. Some Spectrum programs may cause crash.
1 Activate the 'Maximal loading speed' checkbox if you want to maximize the
1 Activate a checkbox if the problem described beside it appears with the
1 A[<word>] [<byte>] ABORT (Timex version)
1 A[<word>] ABORT (48 version)
1 AUTOEXEC.BAT). This, and other options, allow the running of the emulator
1 ATTR (m,n)
1 ATICATAC.EXE. In the compiled program the Kempston joystick will be emulated
1 ATICATAC /JA /%100
1 ASN x VAL x$
1 ASCII format which will be converted. The converted program will be stored in
1 ASCII file and name the output file (default is LOGOASCI.TXT) using
1 ASCII file (if you use HP4S, select the second header) and name the output
1 ASCII A4: 80 characters
1 ASCII A3: 132 characters
1 AROS program (mapped at address 32768 in DOCK bank). If the length of the
1 ARJ etc.). This is a feature which is an exclusive characteristic of the
1 ALTBANK DB 32768 DUP (?) ; Space for the alternate bank
1 ALT key with the highlighted letter). Checkboxes [X] are used for activating
1 AH register containng a number which will be sent to the port. On input, the
1 AERCO parallel printer interface.
1 ADDITION.DBF - Database with additional linked data
1 ADDITION.DBF The file with additional data
1 ACS x TAN x
1 ACK and bit D7 to 'Out of paper' signal. The latching of the bits D0 and D7 is
1 ACCOUNT num a(), 5000 This is a numerical array stored with the
1 ABS x SQR x
1 ABN-AMRO-BANK AMSTERDAM (Netherlands) USD 54.04.93.929
1 ABN-AMRO-BANK AMSTERDAM (Netherlands) NLG 54.04.28.213
1 ABANKA LJUBLJANA (Slovenia) DEM 7010-070-280-8753
1 A<byte> [<word>] ABORT (128 version)
1 A48 30000 Acts nearly like CLEAR 29999: NEW in 48 Basic
1 A48 Tries to return in 48 Basic
1 A30000 0 Restore some variables and act as BASIC commands
1 A30000 Restore some variables and act as BASIC commands
1 A25000 Restore some variables and act as BASIC commands
1 A128 30000 Acts nearly like CLEAR 29999: NEW in 128 Basic
1 A128 Tries to return in 128 Basic
1 A1 Tries to return to BASIC in the presence of the
1 A0 will work like A, but ERR_LN will not be reset, and SP will be restored
1 A0 Tries to return to BASIC with stack relocation
1 A - Interface emulation problems
1 A Tries to return to BASIC.
1 A Tries to return to BASIC
1 ?[<byte>|<word>] PRINT NUMBER
1 ?? Displays "#FFFF 65535 -1 255,255" (due to
1 ?45000 Displays "#AFC8 45000 -20536 175,200"
1 ?40 Displays "#0028 40 '('"
1 ?30000 Displays "#7530 30000 117,48"
1 ?10 Displays "#000A 10"
1 ?. Displays current value of memory pointers in many
1 ?'a' Displays "#0061 97 'a'"
1 ?#FF Displays "#00FF 255 -1"
1 ? Displays value of currently marked register in
1 =x TO y STEP z
1 <z80_file> Source snapshot file
1 <word>, PC register will be set to <word> and then monitor will do ordinary E
1 <word> is omitted, the assumed value will be the memory pointer. A flag byte
1 <word> is omitted, breakpoint will be put after current instruction, or after
1 <word2>) with a value <byte>.
1 <word2> End address, if omitted, the memory will be listed until you press
1 <word2> End address, if omitted, the instructions will be listed until you
1 <word1> Start address, if omitted, it will be the value of the program
1 <word1> Start address, if omitted, it will be the value of the memory
1 <tape_name>.TAP If you give the name of a tape file with the extension
1 <snap_name>.Z80 If you give the name of a snapshot file with the extension
1 <short_name> This parameter represents the short name of the program in
1 <number> BIN [{0|1}...]
1 <mdvnum> is the microdrive number, and it may be from 1 to 8. The drive and
1 <mdrN_name>.MDR If you give the name of a cartridge file with the
1 <initial_switches> Command options which will be embedded into the compiled
1 <free_len> reading the net port respectively.
1 <free_len> and <busy_len>, where <block_delay> has the greatest influence
1 <extra> introduces an additional delay per one frame cycle, and may be in
1 <exe_file>, the same name as in the file <z80_file> will be assumed.
1 <exe_file> Target executable file
1 <byte> Number of rows on the screen, if omitted, the default value is 24.
1 <byte4> Value of 48K lock bit (1 = MMU is locked)
1 <byte3> Active video page (0 = Standard, 1 = Alternative)
1 <byte2>, it have following meaning:
1 <byte2> and <byte3> may be '?' with meaning 'No changes', which is useful when
1 <byte2> Disassembly options (see text below).
1 <byte2> Active RAM bank at addresses from 49152 to 65535 (0-7)
1 <byte1> Number of rows on the screen, if omitted, or if you give '?', the
1 <byte1> Active ROM (0 = Derby, 1 = Standard, 2 = Interface 1 shadow)
1 <Return for 5 bytes and copy 2 bytes>
1 <Return for 4 bytes and copy 3 bytes>
1 9 - Like 4, but with a frame around printed picture.
1 9 - Cursor right for one character (RIGHT)
1 8192-16383, 16384-24575 and so on). The DOCK bank is initially empty and
1 80x86 interrupts INT 248 or INT 249 respectively, but only if there is a
1 80x86 instructions which will solve your problem!
1 8086' mode. Only the F1 and F10 function keys will work. The execution speed
1 8086' mode, whether the emulator should install a task switch handler to
1 8-Kb memory chunks with 'H' for HOME bank, 'X' for EXROM bank and 'D' for
1 8 - Like 3, but with a frame around printed picture.
1 8 - Cursor down for one character (DOWN)
1 7.9.7. DATABASE FILES
1 7.9.7. Database files
1 7.9.6. PALETTE FILES
1 7.9.6. Palette files
1 7.9.5. NET FILES
1 7.9.5. Net files
1 7.9.4. DCK FILES
1 7.9.4. DCK files
1 7.9.3. MDR FILES
1 7.9.3. MDR files
1 7.9.2. SNAPSHOT FILES
1 7.9.2. Snapshot files
1 7.9.1. TAPE FILES
1 7.9.1. Tape files
1 7.9. THE FORMATS OF THE FILES
1 7.9. The formats of the files
1 7.8. THE EMULATION OF SINCLAIR NETWORK
1 7.8. The emulation of Sinclair Network
1 7.7. THE EMULATION OF THE KEYBOARD AND THE KEYPAD
1 7.7. The emulation of the keyboard and the keypad
1 7.6. THE EMULATION OF THE BEEPER AND THE AY CHIP
1 7.6. The emulation of the beeper and the AY chip
1 7.5. THE EMULATION OF THE VIDEO MEMORY
1 7.5. The emulation of the video memory
1 7.4. THE EMULATION OF THE ACCURATE TIMING
1 7.4. The emulation of the accurate timing
1 7.3.7. 'BUS IDLE' PORT
1 7.3.7. 'Bus idle' port
1 7.3.6. 'TIMEX SINCLAIR 2068' PORTS
1 7.3.6. 'Timex Sinclair 2068' ports
1 7.3.5. 'ZX SPECTRUM 128' PORTS
1 7.3.5. 'ZX Spectrum 128' ports
1 7.3.4. 'ZX INTERFACE 1' PORTS
1 7.3.4. 'ZX Interface 1' ports
1 7.3.3. 'KEMPSTON JOYSTICK' PORTS
1 7.3.3. 'Kempston joystick' ports
1 7.3.2. 'ZX PRINTER' PORTS
1 7.3.2. 'ZX printer' ports
1 7.3.1. 'ULA' PORTS
1 7.3.1. 'ULA' ports
1 7.3. EMULATION OF I/O PORTS
1 7.3. Emulation of I/O ports
1 7.2. THE ROMS AND RAMS
1 7.2. The ROMs and RAMs
1 7.16. PROTECTED PROGRAMS
1 7.16. Protected programs
1 7.15. EDGE RECOGNIZER
1 7.15. Edge recognizer
1 7.14. TIME CONSTANTS FOR LOADING
1 7.14. Time constants for loading
1 7.13. ASSIGNMENT OF THE NET DRIVE
1 7.13. Assignment of the net drive
1 7.12. INFORMATIONS FOR USERS OF NEWER OPERATING SYSTEMS (MS WINDOWS ETC.)
1 7.12. Informations for users of newer operating systems (MS Windows etc.)
1 7.11. COMMUNICATION PROTOCOLS
1 7.11. Communication protocols
1 7.10. 'WRAPPING' PROBLEM
1 7.10. 'Wrapping' problem
1 7.1. Z80 PROCESSOR EMULATION
1 7.1. Z80 processor emulation
1 7 - Like 2, but with a frame around printed picture.
1 7 - Cursor left for one character (LEFT)
1 64 Roebuck Road Fax: (0181) 391 0744
1 6.3. AUTOMATIZATION OF SAVE & LOAD SUPPORTING
1 6.3. Automatization of save & load supporting
1 6.2. SUPPORTING OF SAVING AND LOADING BLOCKS
1 6.2. Supporting of saving and loading blocks
1 6.1. COMPILING
1 6.1. Compiling
1 6 - Like 1, but with a frame around printed picture.
1 6 - Cursor up for 10 rows (PAGE UP)
1 58688 T states on Timex version).
1 542 1 DCHK Checksum of the actual data (of whole 512 bytes, even
1 512), if the
1 512 bytes are actual data, and finally, the last byte is data checksum (also
1 5000 records, to avoid overuse of memory.
1 5.3. EMULATION OF THE PARALLEL PRINTER INTERFACE
1 5.3. Emulation of the parallel printer interface
1 5.2. USING 'ESCAPE' SEQUENCES
1 5.2. Using 'Escape' sequences
1 5.1. ADDING EMULATION OF A NEW PERIPHERAL DEVICE
1 5.1. Adding emulation of a new peripheral device
1 5 - Like 0, but with a frame around printed picture.
1 5 - Delete word right from the cursor (DELETE WORD RIGHT)
1 5 - Cursor right for one word (WORD RIGHT)
1 49152, after the address will be also written the active bank of RAM like
1 4.4. MONITOR ERROR MESSAGES
1 4.4. Monitor error messages
1 4.3. MONITOR COMMANDS
1 4.3. Monitor commands
1 4.2. ARGUMENTS OF COMMANDS
1 4.2. Arguments of commands
1 4.1. THE FRONT PANEL
1 4.1. The front panel
1 4. BUILT-IN MONITOR
1 4. BUILT IN MONITOR
1 4) The environment allows transfer of programs from the Spectrum 128 to the
1 4 - Make a extremely small size bit-map screen dump, with 240 dots per inch,
1 4 - Delete word left from the cursor (DELETE WORD LEFT)
1 4 - Cursor left for one word (WORD LEFT)
1 32768-49151 and 16384-32767 respectively). Unfortunately, RAM paging in the
1 32768 in the DOCK bank, and may be either in machine code or in BASIC (The
1 3.9. 'START' BUTTON
1 3.9. The 'Start' button
1 3.8. 'DOS' MENU
1 3.8. Menu 'DOS'
1 3.7. 'SETUP' MENU
1 3.7. Menu 'Setup'
1 3.6.7. SUBMENU 'CONVERT'
1 3.6.7. Submenu 'Convert'
1 3.6.6. CREATING OF THE REPORT (OPTION 'REPORT')
1 3.6.6. Creating of the report (Option 'Report')
1 3.6.5. SUBMENU 'MARK SORT PRIORITY'
1 3.6.5. Submenu 'Mark sort priority'
1 3.6.4. SORTING THE DATA BASE (OPTION 'SORT')
1 3.6.4. Sorting the data base (option 'Sort')
1 3.6.3. RUNNING PROGRAMS FROM THE DATA BASE (OPTION 'RUN')
1 3.6.3. Running programs from the data base (option 'Run')
1 3.6.2. CREATING AND EDITING THE DATA BASE (OPTION 'EDIT')
1 3.6.2. Creating and editing the data base (option 'Edit')
1 3.6.1. SUBMENU 'DBF DIRECTORY'
1 3.6.1. Submenu 'DBF Directory'
1 3.6. 'DATABASE' MENU
1 3.6. Menu 'DataBase'
1 3.5.2. SUBMENU 'CONVERT'
1 3.5.2. Submenu 'Convert'
1 3.5.1. SUBMENU 'DOCKS'
1 3.5.1. Submenu 'Docks'
1 3.5. 'DOCKFILES' MENU
1 3.5. Menu 'DockFiles'
1 3.4.4. SUBMENU 'CONVERT'
1 3.4.4. Submenu 'Convert'
1 3.4.3. SUBMENU 'FILES'
1 3.4.3. Submenu 'Files'
1 3.4.2. SUBMENU 'SECTORS'
1 3.4.2. Submenu 'Sectors'
1 3.4.1. SUBMENU 'MICRODRIVE'
1 3.4.1. Submenu 'Microdrive'
1 3.4.). MDR files need not have fixed length (this is not case in Lunter's
1 3.3.3. SUBMENU 'CONVERT'
1 3.3.3. Submenu 'Convert'
1 3.3.2 SUBMENU 'EDIT'
1 3.3.2 Submenu 'Edit'
1 3.3.1 SUBMENU 'SNAPS'
1 3.3.1 Submenu 'Snaps'
1 3.3. 'Z80SNAPS' MENU
1 3.2.5. SUBMENU 'CONVERT'
1 3.2.5. Submenu 'Convert'
1 3.2.4. SUBMENU 'COMMUNICATIONS'
1 3.2.4. Submenu 'Communications'
1 3.2.3. SUBMENU 'IMPLODE'
1 3.2.3. Submenu 'Implode'
1 3.2.2. SUBMENU 'BLOCKS'
1 3.2.2. Submenu 'Blocks'
1 3.2.1. SUBMENU 'TAPES'
1 3.2.1. Submenu 'Tapes'
1 3.2. 'TAPEFILES' MENU
1 3.2. Menu 'TapeFiles'
1 3.12. THE COMMUNICATION PROGRAM
1 3.12. The communication program
1 3.11. THE COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS IN THE ENVIRONMENT
1 3.11. The command line parameters in the environment
1 3.10. THE FUNCTION KEYS IN THE ENVIRONMENT
1 3.10. The function keys in the environment
1 3.1. BASIC ELEMENTS OF THE ENVIRONMENT
1 3.1. Basic elements of the environment
1 3.0.) have two versions, one for the old and one for the new ROM. If you have
1 3. PC TO TAPE
1 3) Using the environment, it is possible to load programs from the tape
1 3 - Make a small size bit-map screen dump, useful for making game maps, with
1 3 - Disassemble everything as DB n, until byte #38 (end-calc) or byte after
1 3 - Cursor to the top of the program (TOP)
1 255: HOME bank (mainly useless, HOME content is typically stored in a Z80
1 254: EXROM bank (using this ID you may insert RAM or ROM chunks into EXROM
1 254,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1. If you put a 9-byte header 255,2,2,0,0,0,0,0,0 in front
1 254 sectors length, our MDR files will be compatible with the format of
1 247, 239 and 231). These ports will be emulated only with option /E:
1 23433 and 23434) keeps bit images of KEYPAD keys, and ROM routine decode this
1 23296 - 25343 (to prevent conflicts with loading of the last block on the
1 228 T states on 128 version) a routine will be called which checks how many
1 20000). For exact meaning of these parameters, see the technical part of the
1 2.9. THE SYNTAX OF ZX BASIC
1 2.9. The syntax of ZX BASIC
1 2.8. THE EMULATION OF TIMEX SINCLAIR 2068 PARTICULARITIES
1 2.8. The emulation of Timex Sinclair 2068 particularities
1 2.7. THE EMULATION OF THE MIDI INTERFACE
1 2.7. The emulation of the MIDI interface
1 2.6. THE EMULATION OF SINCLAIR NETWORK
1 2.6. The emulation of Sinclair Network
1 2.5. THE EMULATION OF THE MICRODRIVE
1 2.5. The emulation of the microdrive
1 2.4. THE EMULATION OF THE TAPE RECORDER
1 2.4. The emulation of the tape recorder
1 2.3. THE KEYBOARD AND KEYPAD
1 2.3. The keyboard and the keypad
1 2.2. THE FUNCTION KEYS
1 2.2. The function keys
1 2.10. EMULATOR ERROR MESSAGES
1 2.10. Emulator error messages
1 2.1. THE COMMAND LINE PARAMETERS
1 2.1 The command line parameters
1 2.0. Warajevo emulator on VGA card supports most of hires border effects, try
1 2. TAPE TO PC
1 2, 6 and 9 are considered. For more information, read some documents on the
1 2) Warajevo 2.51. in LPT1 and SBST modes allows direct loading of programs
1 2) If you are into local network or onto the Internet, every client machine
1 2 - Make a medium size bit-map screen dump, with 72 dots per inch. Every
1 2 - Disassemble everything as DW n;
1 2 - Delete from cursor to end of line (DELETE TO END)
1 2 - Cursor to the end of BASIC line (END)
1 16-bit number to the address with offset #FFFF, and in this case they execute
1 16 instruction in Interface 1 shadow ROM follows one inline word parameter,
1 15+528=543 bytes.
1 128K programs, like in game 'Robocop':
1 128 software never make this setting), bits in register R14 have following
1 128 Basic:
1 11=both reading are OR-ed). So, for left joystick reading mainly port 502 is
1 1114112 is extremely risky. Increasing the end address is useful for the
1 11.50. Or, you can build this interface by yourself. The address of
1 1011 0111 0111 0111 0111
1 1000 programs stored in ZXS format. This format is not directly supported by
1 10 are saved. Pages will be saved in numerical order. On Timex version of the
1 10 OUT 255,6: OUT 255,14: PAUSE 1: GO TO 10
1 10 OUT 255,0: OUT 255,6: PAUSE 1: GO TO 10
1 1.5, so interrupt congesting is not possible even on the slowest computers.
1 1.4. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
1 1.4. Acknowledgements
1 1.3. HOW TO HELP AUTHORS (!)
1 1.3. How to HELP AUTHORS (!)
1 1.2. CONTENTS OF THE PACKAGE
1 1.2. Contents of the package
1 1.1. WHAT IS THIS AND HOW WE DEVELOPED IT
1 1.1. What is this and how we developed it
1 1. TAPE TO TAPE
1 1-6 signature bits determine higher byte:
1 1-253: Reserved for expansions which allow more than three 64 Kb banks (not
1 1) Determine the computer which will contain the net file. Let it have name
1 1) A great number of Spectrum programs in .Z80, .TAP, .SNA, .TZX and in some
1 1 - Make a big bit-map screen dump, with 36 dots per inch. Every screen pixel
1 1 - Disassemble everything as DB n, it is sometimes useful with O command;
1 1 - Delete from cursor to start of line (DELETE FROM START)
1 1 - Cursor to the start of BASIC line (HOME)
1 0DH, because this increases compatibility with Spectrum software. However,
1 0: DOCK bank (the most frequent variant)
1 01bbbb 7+bbbb
1 0111 0A11 0B11 0C11 0D11
1 011 >= 10
1 00001001 010100xx (xx - not used, so don't care)
1 0-127, and they will be displayed in inverse video. Control codes will be
1 0 - Turns smart disassembling off, e.g. do not display inline parameters as DB
1 0 - SHIFT for destructive functions (DEL SHIFT)
1 0 - Make a big and a very nice shaded screen dump, with 36 dots per inch.
1 /Z7 - Keys F4, F5 and F6 will not work in the compiled program.
1 /Z6 - Keys F5 and F6 will not work in the compiled program, but F4 will work.
1 /Z5 - Keys F4 and F6 will not work in the compiled program, but F5 will work.
1 /Z4 - Key F6 will not work in the compiled program, but F4 and F5 will work.
1 /Z3 - Keys F4 and F5 will not work in the compiled program, but F6 will work.
1 /Z2 - Key F5 will not work in the compiled program, but F4 and F6 will work.
1 /Z1 - Key F4 will not work in the compiled program, but F5 and F6 will work.
1 /Z0 - Keys F4, F5 and F6 will work in the compiled program (this is the
1 /VX - Activate non-standard resolution on Hercules card to establish a full
1 /VW - Force CGA card, in the color mode which is suitable for windowed running
1 /VV - Force VGA card.
1 /VM - Force EGA Mono card.
1 /VH - Force Hercules card;
1 /VE - Force EGA card;
1 /VC - Force CGA card, in the monochrome mode;
1 /U5 - Border and sound are emulated, with synchronous border emulation.
1 /U4 - Border is emulated synchronously, and sound is not emulated;
1 /U3 - Border and sound are emulated, with asynchronous border emulation;
1 /U2 - Only sound is emulated;
1 /U1 - Border is emulated asynchronously (like in release 1.5.), and sound is
1 /U0 - Border and sound are not emulated;
1 /T<filename>
1 /T, /R and /# which are stored in the file DEFAULT.CFG (or SPECSIM.CFG).
1 /T option is not present the emulator creates an empty tape file called E.TAP.
1 /SB[<address>[;<dma>]]
1 /SA instead). There is one new option /Z which has the following meaning:
1 /SA /U5 /JA /! /&C1 /&S6
1 /S<any_Spec_file> If the command parameter /S is given, the file
1 /S7 - The AY chip is not emulated.
1 /S6 - Only channel A is emulated.
1 /S5 - Only channel B is emulated.
1 /S4 - Channels A and B are emulated.
1 /S3 - Only channel C is emulated.
1 /S2 - Channels A and C are emulated.
1 /S1 - Channels B and C are emulated.
1 /S0 - All 3 channels are emulated (default).
1 /R[<drive>:][<path>][<filename>]
1 /QX[<delay>[;<extra>]]
1 /PP - Emulation using HP Laser Jet printer in the high resolution;
1 /PL - Emulation using HP Laser Jet printer in the low resolution;
1 /PE - Emulation using Epson printer with resolution 72 dots per inch. Picture
1 /PB - Emulation using Epson printer, but one ZX or TS2040 printer pixel will
1 /M2 - Base colors are blue, red, green and yellow.
1 /M2 - Attributes are not emulated, background is white, pixels are black.
1 /M1 - Base colors are black, red, green and yellow;
1 /M1 - Attributes are not emulated, background is black and pixels are white;
1 /M0 - Base colors are black, magenta, cyan and white (default);
1 /M0 - Attributes are emulated by shading (default);
1 /L7 - Algorithm is SBST (loading from a real tape recorder using Sound
1 /L6 - Algorithm is LPT1 (loading from and saving to a real tape recorder,
1 /L5 - Algorithm is FAST, with stopping between blocks;
1 /L4 - Algorithm is SLOW, with stopping between blocks;
1 /L3 - Algorithm is AUTO, with stopping between blocks;
1 /L2 - Algorithm is FAST, no stopping between blocks;
1 /L1 - Algorithm is SLOW, no stopping between blocks;
1 /L0 - Algorithm is AUTO, no stopping between blocks (default);
1 /L in chapter 2.1. This option has the shortcut key F4 (like the similar
1 /K is less useful, because from this release FLASH on CGA will be converted
1 /JS - Emulates the Sinclair joystick 1 with the cursor keys: the cursor keys
1 /JM simultaneously.
1 /JM - The Kempston or Timex joysticks are emulated with the mouse (the driver
1 /JK - Emulates the Kempston joystick or the Timex joystick (Timex version)
1 /JC - Emulates the cursor joystick with the cursor keys: the cursor keys
1 /JB - Emulates the Sinclair joystick 2 with the cursor keys: the same as /JS,
1 /JA - The Kempston or Timex joysticks are emulated with the PC analogue
1 /J<code>[<calibration>]
1 /G If the parameter /G is given on an EGA or VGA graphics
1 /F<filepos>
1 /E[<drive>:][<path>][<filename>]
1 /D[<drive>:][<path>]
1 /C<code> This parameter has the same meaning as /C, but in addition
1 /C If the parameter /C is used, the environment will use the
1 /A without additional parameters like /F for example, will start the first
1 /@[@]<time>
1 /<byte1>|<word1> <byte2>|<word2> DIVISION
1 /1200 14 Divides 1200 by 14 and displays a integer part
1 /&T<options> Determines details related to the treatment of
1 /&S<speed> Determines the RS232 communication baud rate in the
1 /&O<sorting_order> Determines the sorting criteria for the database (see
1 /&E<code> Determines whether the environment will call the 48K,
1 /&D[<drive:>][<dir>] Determines the drive and directory which contains
1 /&C<code> Determines the communication port for RS232
1 /&<extra_codes>
1 /%%150 instead of /%150), because the percent is a reserved character in
1 /% in a batch file, you must double the '%' sign (for example, you must put
1 /#N;[<drive>:][<path>]<filename>[;<block_delay>[;<free_len>[;<busy_len>]]]
1 /#N;G:\SHARED\TRANSFER.NET;60 or using the environment). Be aware of the fact
1 /#N;G:\SHARED\TRANSFER.NET). Any file with 260 or more bytes may be interface
1 /#N;G:\SHARED\TRANSFER.NET means /#N;G:\SHARED\TRANSFER.NET;30;5;5. For an
1 /#<mdvnum>;[<drive>:][<path>]<filename>
1 /!3 - Acts like /!1 and /!2 together.
1 /!2 - When using this parameter, the emulator forbids any access to the
1 /!1 - When using this parameter, the emulator installs a handler which tries
1 / - Delete characters left from cursor (DELETE LEFT)
1 .__B, .__C etc. depending on their type.
1 .001, .002 etc.
1 . - Cursor to the end of program (BOTTOM)
1 -x LEN x$
1 -<byte1>|<word1> <byte2>|<word2> SUBTRACTION
1 -. $ Subtracts value of currently marked register from
1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 -----------------------------------------------
1 -----------------------------------------
1 ---------------------------------------- --------------------------
1 ---------------------------------------- ------------------------
1 ---------------------------------------- -----------
1 ---------------------------------------- ---------------------
1 ---------------------------------------
1 -------------------------------------
1 ------------------------------------
1 --------------------------------- ------------------
1 --------------------------------- ----------
1 ---------------------------------
1 -------------------------------- --------------
1 -------------------------------- -----------
1 -------------------------------
1 ----------------------------- ---------
1 -----------------------------
1 ---------------------------
1 ------------------------ ----------------
1 ------------------------
1 ----------------------- -----------------
1 --------------------
1 ------------------ --------------------------
1 ------------------ ---------------------
1 ------------------ -----------
1 ---------------- -------------------
1 ---------------- ------------
1 ---------------
1 --------------
1 ------------
1 --------- ----------------------------
1 --------- -----------------------
1 --------- --------------------
1 --------- ------------------
1 --------- ---------------
1 --------- ----------
1 --------- -------
1 - the samples (binary), 8 samples are packed into one byte (starting from B7
1 - the data bytes;
1 - the data bytes.
1 - the data bytes (compressed).
1 - synchro byte, which determines the end of leading signal;
1 - parity byte, used for checking correctness of block loading (if it is not
1 - leader signal (you hear a continous tone and see red and cyan lines on the
1 - flag byte, which determines the purpose of the block, but it will be not
1 - data bytes (you hear a variable tone and see yellow and blue lines on the
1 - ZX32, by Vaggelis Kapartzianis from Greece;
1 - ZX32, by Vaggelis Kapartzianis from Greece.
1 - ZX, by Peter Kroselj (?) from Slovenia;
1 - ZX, by Eduard Rindt and Ludek Brukner from Czech;
1 - ZX RAINBOW, by Jahn Claus from Germany;
1 - Z80, by Gerton Lunter from Netherlands;
1 - You can not call the Tape Manager, monitor or the environment from the
1 - X128, by James McKay from Great Britain;
1 - Warajevo supports multicolor effects and digital sound with much reduced
1 - Warajevo is the only emulator for DOS which implements correct operation of
1 - Warajevo is still the only emulator which supports extended keyboard
1 - Warajevo can optionally load TZX files much faster (by a factor of 4 or
1 - Warajevo (starting from release 2.5) emulates the American version of the
1 - Warajevo (like Lunter's emulator) allows loading of programs from a real
1 - Vatroslav Sobot from Croatia, for his program Mastercopy 128 which is used
1 - Values of all registers (AF, BC, DE, HL, SP, PC, IX, IY, IR, AF', BC', DE',
1 - Vaggelis Kapartzianis from Greece, for help in solving some bugs related
1 - VGASPEC, by Alberto Olloqui from Spain;
1 - Using the additional program ZXCOMP the Z80 snapshot files can, with some
1 - User leaves the Tape Manager with an EAR Sample block as the current block.
1 - User leaves the Tape Manager with a normal block as the current block.
1 - Uros Zupan from Slovenia, for noticing some bugs in TZX loading;
1 - Under MS Windows the emulator can be run in windowed mode using the options
1 - UNHCR and many relief organizations, because we did not die of hunger;
1 - UDG signs will be converted to signs above #127 if they are quoted, or to
1 - Tomaz Kac from Slovenia, for his program PLAYTZX, which is used as base for
1 - Tokens for '>=', '<=' and '!=' will be decomposed;
1 - Time (more precisely, system variable FRAMES) will not be updated at
1 - This emulator is freeware software, and all users will have all options
1 - The whole Spectrum memory image, values of processor registers and states
1 - The very powerful Windows-like environment of the emulator allows
1 - The tokens 'GO TO' and 'DEF FN' can be entered with or without the space.
1 - The tapes (TAP files) can be in a compressed format, and then occupy about
1 - The tape emulation, using TAP files, is realized using a very flexible
1 - The tabulators will be expanded.
1 - The tab will be converted to one space;
1 - The state of all the options which are set up using the environment will be
1 - The state of all the command parameters, data about current tape file etc.
1 - The sound options /SO, /SX and /SB are not supported (only AdLib FM
1 - The sample buffer pointer points out of buffer, but there is no new sample
1 - The resulting FORTH program will be exactly 11263 bytes long, because that
1 - The rest of the last block will be filled with zeros to full block length.
1 - The receiver's name and surname;
1 - The option /A on Timex version of the emulator does following: It puts
1 - The option /A on 48 version of the emulator does following: It puts auto-run
1 - The option /A on 128 version of the emulator does following: It puts
1 - The number of the receiver's personal card;
1 - The null byte (#0) will be converted to a new line.
1 - The last loaded block was normal (not EAR Sample) block, the current block
1 - The labels must be written from the first column;
1 - The keywords (including Beta BASIC 3.0) will be tokenized if they are out
1 - The keyword tokens will be split into ASCII signs;
1 - The interrupt mode, and flip-flops IFF1 and IFF2;
1 - The instructions must not begin in the first column;
1 - The environment of Warajevo has an option for sampling a tone record from a
1 - The emulator recognizes EDGE subroutine, but the current tape block is EAR
1 - The emulator comes across the trap in LD_BYTES, but the current tape block
1 - The emulation type (48K, 128K or Timex) will be determined. This will be
1 - The effective address of the argument of the current instruction, and its
1 - The command switches /2, /A, /B, /C, /D, /E, /F, /K, /L, /N, /O, /P, /R,
1 - The color control codes (under #32), if quoted, will be converted to
1 - The characters '
1 - The characters #128-#148 will be converted to UDG characters;
1 - The break point may be in ROM.
1 - The address of the receiver;
1 - The Warajevo emulator has a very clean emulation of the beeper, even under
1 - The Pound and CopyRight will be converted to similar PC characters;
1 - The ASCII file must not contain line numbers. Line numbers will be
1 - The ASCII file must contain line numbers between 1 and 9999;
1 - Telephone number of the receiver.
1 - Tabs and spaces will be converted to a Machine lightning TAB symbol.
1 - Snapshot files which are saved while Interface 1 emulation was active can't
1 - Signs above #128 will be ignored;
1 - Signs 0, or four new line signs terminate the conversion.
1 - Signs #13 and #12 Null byte will be converted to a new line.
1 - Show warning for nonimplemented blocks
1 - Show text description blocks
1 - Show message blocks
1 - Set the trap on the first instruction (at LD_EDGE_1) to return the values of
1 - Scanning of the keyboard, if based on the interrupts (like in BASIC) will
1 - Sample standard blocks rather than copy them
1 - Sample pure tone and sequence of pulses
1 - Sample pure data rather than copy them
1 - Sample pause after turbo block and pure data
1 - Sample pause after standard block
1 - Sample Turbo blocks rather than copy them
1 - SPECTRUM, by Pedro Gimeno from Spain;
1 - SPECPIC, by Andreas Schrapnel and Jahn Claus from Germany;
1 - SPECEMU G, by Bernd Waschke from Germany;
1 - SPECEM, by Kevin J. Phair from Ireland;
1 - SPECEM, by Kevin A. Pair from Ireland;
1 - SPECBASE, by Rodolfo Edison Guerra from Uruguay.
1 - SP105 (Spectrum + TR-DOS), by N. V. Shalaev from Russia;
1 - SP, by J. Swiatek and K. Makowski from Poland;
1 - SP UKV, by unknown author from Russia;
1 - SOROSH foundation, for installing and financing E-MAIL;
1 - SGD, by Martijn Van Der Heidne from Netherlands;
1 - SFOR, because they don't permit starting the war in our country again.
1 - S flag after BIT instruction is set only if 7-th bit is tested, and this bit
1 - Rui Fernando Ferreira Ribeiro from Portugal, for fixing a bug with keyboard
1 - Rodolfo Edison Guerra from Uruguay, for sending his program SPECBASE,
1 - Quoted graphic characters will be converted to PC graphic characters if
1 - Put all blocks and groups in separate samples
1 - Prof. Dr. Sc. Ahmet Mandzic from Sarajevo, for accepting the emulator as
1 - Press Ctrl+F10, then use left and right cursor keys to move through menu;
1 - Press Alt and the first letter of the menu option;
1 - Philip Pogosov from Russia, for finding a bug in the /?86 switch;
1 - Per Christensen from Sweden, for donation of 200 SK;
1 - Paul Hodgson from Great Britain, for support of the Warajevo TAP format in
1 - Pascal tokens will be decomposed;
1 - PASCAL reserved words will be tokenized;
1 - Option /K (an inverse cursor) changes value at address 6355 from 0 to 12. On
1 - Only 'Warajevo' and Lunter's version 2.0. snapshot files can be compiled
1 - One BASIC line in the ASCII file must take exactly one screen line;
1 - On the Timex version of the emulator, when memory expansions are present
1 - On VGA cards using /VE gives a smaller picture on the screen (due to a
1 - On Hercules card systems the option /VX displays a nicer picture. However,
1 - Now the environment calls the emulator using the command /C (e.g.
1 - Now the emulator calls the environment with the command /C, e.g.
1 - Move the mouse pointer to the option name then click the left button.
1 - Miodrag Stancevic from Yugoslavia, for pointing out problems during the
1 - Milan Pikula from Slovakia, for some useful suggestions about problematic
1 - Memory pointer (MP);
1 - Memory configuration and value of control register #FF (Timex version only);
1 - Memory bytes around registers PC, SP, HL, IX, IY, DE, BC and around memory
1 - Memory banks and state of LOCK bit (128K version only);
1 - Martijn Van Der Heidne from Netherlands, for supporting the Warajevo
1 - Martijn Van Der Heidne from Netherlands, for giving us about 15 MB of space
1 - Load a next block from the tape file to a memory buffer.
1 - Lee Tonks from Great Britain, for noticing a bug in the AY emulation code
1 - Lee J. Dowling from United Kingdom, for correcting grammatical errors in
1 - LF (10) will be converted to CR/LF (#13+#10);
1 - Klaus (surname is unfortunately lost) from Austria, for donation of 50 DM;
1 - Jahn Claus from Germany, for a donation of 100 DM and supporting of the
1 - JPP, by Arnt Guldbransen from Norway;
1 - JPP, by Arnt Guldbransen from Norway.
1 - If you select 'Select', all the data associated with this program (like
1 - If you select 'Run', all the data associated with this program will be
1 - If you have a non-standard card compatible with one of those listed, but
1 - Hynek Med from Czech, for uploading release 1.2 on the Internet;
1 - H flag after 16-bit arithmetical instructions keeps carry from 11-th to
1 - Gerton Lunter from Netherlands, for sending us his program for comparison,
1 - George Hills from United Kingdom, for a donation of 30 pounds and the
1 - Five-byte number definitions after #14 will be ignored;
1 - F1 acts as a 'pause' key, not as HELP. Compiled programs will not draw the
1 - Extract snapshot block
1 - Escape sequences described into chapter 5.2. and drivers for user-defined
1 - Embed messages in converted tape
1 - Electrodistribution in Sarajevo, for minimal amount of electrical power;
1 - Eduard Schmidt from Germany, for finding a bug in ZXCOMP;
1 - Dragan Ivanovic and Aleksandar Zelenovic from Sarajevo, for some useful
1 - Daniel Herak from Croatia, for information about hosts for Spectrum
1 - Damien Burke and Philip Kendall from Great Britain, for maintaining the
1 - Current instruction, e.g. instruction at the program counter (PC);
1 - Convert direct recording
1 - Consider hardware and emulation info
1 - Commands N,?, +, -, *, /, &, | and ^ will send results of commands to the
1 - Commands H, R, U, X and Y force sending of front panel after end of command.
1 - Commands F, M, P and W will send new value of memory pointer to the output
1 - Commands D and T will send listing to the output file.
1 - Commands B, C, K, L, S, V and Z do not affect output file.
1 - Commands A, E, J and Q leave monitor, and when you return to monitor (for
1 - Command O temporary closes output file, and it is opened again when you type
1 - Command I without parameter will send disassembled current instruction to
1 - Command ! will send new status of interrupt flip-flops and mode to the
1 - Button 'Usable on Warajevo and original machine (lowest screen damage)':
1 - Button 'Ready to convert to Z80 emulator (medium screen damage)':
1 - Button 'Ready to convert to Polish emulator (big screen damage)':
1 - Button 'Prepared for copy to Wafadrive':
1 - Button 'Prepared for copy to TR-DOS':
1 - Button 'Prepared for copy to Microdrive or Opus':
1 - Button 'Prepared for copy to Disciple or Plus D':
1 - Bosnian Army, because it defends our city;
1 - Belan Josip and Cvetkovic Dalibor from Sarajevo, for helping us with the
1 - At this moment, the Warajevo emulator is the only emulator which emulates
1 - Any jumps to address 0 in a source program will cause the program to exit
1 - Alvin Albrecht from Canada, Keith Watson from USA, and Paul Hodgson from
1 - Almir Osmanovic from Sarajevo, for giving us many Spectrum programs for
1 - Allow negative jumps (not yet implemented)
1 - All standard ASCII signs will be converted to the same PC signs;
1 - All standard ASCII signs (#32-#127) will be converted to the same signs;
1 - All ASCII signs will be converted;
1 - After the program would completely be read from the memory buffer, the first
1 - After numbers and arguments of DEF FN will be placed character #14 and 5
1 - After instructions INIR, INDR, OTIR and OTDR we have S=H=P/V=0, Z=N=1.
1 - After instructions INI, IND, OUTI and OUTD state of the flags is like after
1 - After instruction CCF flag H is complement of the C flag;
1 - After every 64 signs a line delimiter will be inserted.
1 - After every 40 signs a soft line delimiter will be inserted.
1 - After every 32 bytes new line will be inserted.
1 - A very high quality machine-code monitor is included, which is fully
1 - A new line on a PC ASCII file will be converted to 3 new line symbols in
1 - A new line on a PC ASCII file will be a new line on a The Last Word file;
1 - A new line on a PC ASCII file will be a new line on a Tasword file;
1 - A new line on a PC ASCII file will be a new line on a Tasword 2 file;
1 - A new line on a PC ASCII file will be a new line on a Machine lightning
1 - A compiled program does not support RS232, microdrive, Sinclair Network,
1 - A break point address (and its page);
1 - 4 bytes, a pointer to the next block or to the EOF marker for last block;
1 - 3, for RAM chunks where initial RAM content is given (this is need to allow
1 - 2, for ROM chunks
1 - 2 bytes, value 65535;
1 - 2 bytes, value 65534;
1 - 2 bytes, signature length (internal, for compressed blocks);
1 - 2 bytes, signature length (internal);
1 - 2 bytes, compressed (psychical) block size; if these 2 lengths are equal,
1 - 2 bytes, compressed (psychical) block size;
1 - 2 bytes, block size without a flag byte;
1 - 2 bytes, block size including a flag byte and a parity byte;
1 - 1, for RAM chunks, where initial RAM content is not given (in the emulator
1 - 1 byte, a status byte; bits B0-B2 in this byte contain informations which
1 - 1 byte, a parity byte.
1 - 0, for non-existent chunks (reading from such chunks must return default
1 - - Open command menu (CMND)
1 - 'Turbo loading' and 'Pure data' blocks will be converted to EAR Sample
1 - 'Text Description' blocks will be displayed on the screen during the
1 - 'Standard speed' blocks will be sampled to EAR sample blocks, or converted
1 - 'Snapshot' blocks are implemented only when using the 'Start' button.
1 - 'Select' blocks will simply be ignored;
1 - 'Quick run' for Z80 files: Allows fast start of Z80 snapshots bypassing the
1 - 'Pure tone', and 'Sequence of pulses' blocks will be sampled to EAR
1 - 'Message block' depending on settings can be ignored, displayed on the
1 - 'Loop' and 'EndLoop' blocks are implemented using repeated sampling;
1 - 'Jump To' blocks are implemented only for forward jumps; backward jumps may
1 - 'Infinite pause' will be saved as normal blocks, with zero size;
1 - 'Hardware Info' and 'Emulation Info' blocks are implemented only when
1 - 'Group Start' blocks indicate that the following EAR samples should not be
1 - 'Group End' blocks start separating of following samples;
1 - 'Finite Pause' blocks will be sampled to EAR sample blocks;
1 - 'Edit' for Z80, TAP and MDR files: Loads file in the environment, so the
1 - 'Direct recording' blocks will be converted only if they have the
1 - 'Custom Info' blocks will be ignored;
1 - 'Compile' for Z80 files: Invoke compiler ZXCOMP to compile this snapshot.
1 - 'Call Sequence' and 'Return From Sequence' are not planned to be
1 - 'Archive Info' blocks will be ignored;
1 - --------------------------
1 - ----------------------
1 - ---------------------
1 - --------------
1 - ------------
1 - -----------
1 , ... represent a single letters ('a'..'z' or 'A'..'Z')
1 +x INT x
1 +<byte1>|<word1> <byte2>|<word2> ADDITION
1 +7 8 Adds 7 and 8 and displays the result (i.e.
1 + - Cursor down for 10 rows (PAGE DOWN)
1 *<byte1>|<word1> <byte2>|<word2> MULTIPLICATION
1 *7 3273 Multiply 7 and 3273 and displays the result
1 *.nnn The files created by environment as a result of extractions
1 *.Z80 Snapshot files
1 *.TAP The files for emulation of the tape
1 *.MDR The files for emulation of the microdrive cartridge
1 *.DCK The files for emulation of Timex memory expansions
1 *.BAK BACKUP files created by environment using some commands
1 * - Cursor up for one character (UP)
1 ) are used for selecting one of few possible states.
1 (x) LN x
1 (x$) SCREEN$ (m,n)
1 (with little help of Interface 1 hardware), before receiving of each byte bit
1 (white on black), with the idea that the loading of the program causes the
1 (which were present until release 1.2. of the emulator) together with the
1 (which may have from 1 to 255 bytes), it first monitors the state of the net
1 (we were warned about this problem by some users of the emulator). To protect
1 (usually 49149) writing to this port stores value in active AY sound chip
1 (typically 544 or 220 HEX). A description of time constants is 'too advanced'
1 (try, for example, to increase this parameter to 60 or more, using
1 (to prevent conflict with RAM paging). If you don't understand what we are
1 (to fills one-byte free space).
1 (throw away) the flag byte, the second option is recommended. The file names
1 (this is typically 544, that is 220h). Also, you can set the number of DMA
1 (the same format uses emulator Spectator for the QL by Carlo Delhez and XZX
1 (the Timex version also traps addresses 118 and 274) and then executes the
1 (switch /QX). In this mode, all flickering except in programs which cause
1 (starting from release 2.0. - execution speed is equal to speed of the real
1 (sound off/on) and F6 (border off/on, and on VGA performs triple switching
1 (shortcut F8 in the environment), using the command 'Network' in the 'Setup'
1 (shortcut F4).
1 (see the next section, field 'Remark') in the file SOFTWARE.DBT. To delete
1 (see section 6.2.).
1 (see chapter 7.3.4.). The buffer alternatively changes maximal length from 15
1 (see chapter 3.8.).
1 (see chapter 3.) to avoid their setting every time when you run program.
1 (quite good) this undocumented effect, so programs which use this port (like
1 (program name, category, producer, year of production etc.). With every
1 (p[,q...])|
1 (or more, but excess bytes will not be used), with following structure:
1 (or considerably reduced) using option /Q (see chapter 2.1.). And, the best
1 (options /U4 or /U5), and a VGA graphics card. This is the recommended option
1 (only on the VGA card, these days this is not a great loss). Unfortunately,
1 (only BASIC command MOVE is sometimes noticeable slow).
1 (only 92 bytes long) is the best illustration of expanding the emulator.
1 (non-press or press) in current row is not changed since last scanning,
1 (more precisely, does not emulate modes which we are used). If you have not
1 (mono). Due to the very problematic timing of this sound card, loading using
1 (m[,n...])}=x|
1 (m[,n...])|
1 (m[,n...]) SIN x
1 (like in the option 'Add Block' in submenu 'Blocks' which is described in
1 (like in release 2.0.) the screen is updated periodically, synchronized with
1 (it's your responsibility, though). Decreasing the start address below
1 (it will help on Hercules too). In case of BASIC programs, simply change INK,
1 (it is worth to look program MDA demo on ZX32 emulator).
1 (if you don't understand what we are talking about, read any book about
1 (i.e. undo effect of command X).
1 (hex, decimal or ASCII) for editing all 48K of memory saved in the snapshot
1 (for this purpose, we recommend ZX32 emulator by Vaggelis Kapartzianis).
1 (e.g. ratio between compressed and uncompressed sizes).
1 (e.g. #ED #00 #38 #30 #38 #36), which is called the Escape sequence, the
1 (chapter 7.).
1 (by the F2 key). For more about algorithms for emulation of the tape recorder
1 (because Lunter TAP format does not support tone sample blocks). The sampling
1 (and tape files in Lunter 'Z80' format) can be found on FTP servers like:
1 (addresses 57344 - 65535), and the letter at the right end corresponds to the
1 (The Spectrum emulator must be started with OUT 244,3 - Timex users know what
1 (Sinclair Network itself also has a rather exotic implementation). At this
1 (PARALLEL.ASM) and the executable file (PARALLEL.COM). The driver is very
1 (IY, SP), interrupt modes (performs IM 0) and flip-flops (EI) then jumps to
1 (F1 displays the keyboard layout on the original keyboard). For CAPS SHIFT
1 (DE) <- (HL)
1 (60435 and 65316/7), and printer channel "P" too. Then monitor jumps at
1 (48 version), SPEC128 (128 version) or TS2068 (Timex version), and you can
1 (23398) ) any other keyboard mapping (without ROM changing) will ruin the
1 (2.6. and 7.8.). This option does not work on the Timex version of the
1 (1.5 Gb)! Some multicolor programs for Spectrum 128 (for example Echologia,
1 ('Tape loading error check', disable this option only when it is the only
1 ('Hear loading sound') and whether the program checks for loading errors
1 'virtual' drivers which are sometimes in use didn't allocate this space for
1 'virtual 8086' mode. See 'WRAPPING PROBLEM' in the technical part of the
1 'pure machine' (e.g. after a few seconds you will see the famous message
1 'nude' computer, e.g. without superfluous drivers in AUTOEXEC.BAT and
1 'full screen' mode, often nothing bad will happen, even the sound is rather
1 'edge recognizer', ZX Printer emulation, and RS232 emulation. So if you create
1 'byte #yy repeated #xx times'. Only sequences of length at least 5 are coded.
1 'Z80' format for snapshot files, which is probably the most popular format.
1 'Warning: ROM'. This is shown due to it should make the failure in the
1 'Treasure Island', '4D Terror Daktil' etc.). When hires border emulation is
1 'The Train' uses it).
1 'TT racer' (but of course the game works fine even without it). We did not
1 'TS2068_X.ROM' was not found in the current directory.
1 'TS2068_H.ROM' was not found in the current directory.
1 'Spy vs. Spy', 'Fairlight', 'Trap door', 'The halls of the things' and many
1 'Sorting order' will display the current sorting order, using the following
1 'Sinclair research Ltd.').
1 'Setup' menu. These dialogs have shortcuts F5 and F4 respectively in the
1 'Sample from cassette' in the environment (look chapter 3.2.4.). Note that
1 'SPECSIM.CFG'), or an existing option has a wrong parameter.
1 'SPECSIM.CFG' for some reason (most probably because it doesn't exist in
1 'Revert' button goes back to the previous directory.
1 'Report width' should contain the number of characters in one row.
1 'Reorder' option, here you can move only one block at a time, but you do not
1 'Program....' is removed, and the initial attribute is changed from 56 to 7
1 'Position' may be entered simply by entering the desired text into the
1 'PRINT file' will be displayed. Files created using the SAVE* command have 9
1 'PC to TAPE' in the communication program.
1 'Open', plus a history list that's attached to the name input box. The 'Name'
1 'Open' button will open, (or create, depending on the current option) the
1 'OK', define the name of the output ASCII file. The default name is
1 'OK' and 'Cancel'.
1 'Network' dialog in the 'Setup' menu.
1 'MDRIVEFILES' MENU
1 'Joystick' dialog in the 'Setup' menu.
1 'Insert' will open a dialog which contains one group of radio buttons named
1 'Insert' key and type the desired category. Why do we assign the list box to
1 'File type' and 4 input lines. Using the radio buttons you can select whether
1 'Cancel'). The same thing can be achieved using Esc.
1 'Bytes', 'Number array' or 'Character array'), the size of the block of data
1 'B G Services' is:
1 'B G Services' interface or a Sound Blaster card. In addition to these two
1 'Autostart', after entering the emulator the selected program will be
1 'Arkanoid', 'Stalone Cobra', 'Galactic Gunners', 'Renegate' etc.) will work.
1 '48 Basic' for CAT, ERASE x$ and FORMAT x$.
1 '4' (for example, SNAP.Z80 becomes 4SNAP.Z80).
1 '128 Basic'. But, if parameter <word> is omitted, monitor tries to recover
1 '128 Basic' or in 'Calculator' mode. In 'Calculator' mode the KEYPAD works as
1 '128 Basic' extensions:
1 '.TAP'. Also, it may be that tape creation was not successful.
1 '+3 Basic' extensions (not yet implemented into the emulation):
1 '(Shadow ROM)' is displayed too. On the 128 version, if the stopping occurred
1 '(RAM page n)'. On the Timex version of the emulator, after the address will
1 ' will be converted to similar
1 &<byte1>|<word1> <byte2>|<word2> BINARY AND
1 &3200 1500 Performs a binary AND between 3200 and 1500 and
1 %<byte1>|<word1> <byte2>|<word2> REMAINDER
1 %1200 14 Divides 1200 by 14 and displays a remainder
1 $[([m[,n...]][,[p] TO [q]])][([[r][ TO [s]]])...]}[,{v2|
1 $[([m[,n...]][,[p] TO [q]])][([[r][ TO [s]]])...]=x$}
1 $[([m[,n...]][,[p] TO [q]])] VAL$ x$
1 $[([m[,n...]][,
1 $[([i[,j...]][,[k] TO [l]])][([[t][ TO [u]]])...]}...]
1 $[([i[,j...]][,[k] TO
1 #ED #F6 (earlier standard) as so-called 'MultiLevel load trap' for supporting
1 #3D #18 #2E #42 #3D #18 #2E #15 #42 #3D #19
1 #3D #18 #2E #42 #04 #15 #05 #19
1 #3D #18 #2E #42
1 #04 #00 #00 #00 #00 #00 #00 #00 #FF #FF #FF #FF
1 #00 #00 #00 is not encoded into #ED #ED #ED #06 #00 but into #ED #00 #ED #ED
1 "busy" or "free", the same value will be returned during next <busy_len> or
1 "[c...]" CHR$ m
1 "World of Spectrum" SGD database into the Warajevo format. Namely, the
1 "Warning: ROM"
1 "Unexpected wrapping at address #nnnn"
1 "Type Q to quit"
1 "Too few parameters"
1 "The file ZXP2_0.ROM or ZXP2_1.ROM not found"
1 "The file ZX128_0.ROM or ZX128_1.ROM not found"
1 "The file TS2068_X.ROM not found"
1 "The file TS2068_H.ROM not found"
1 "Syntax error"
1 "String not found"
1 "Sound Blaster card cannot be detected"
1 "Requested bank number not implemented"
1 "RAMPTOP too low"
1 "Program use 128 ports at address #nnnn"
1 "Program finish at address #nnnn"
1 "Parameter too big"
1 "Overflow"
1 "Obsolete command option"
1 "No ZX Interface 1"
1 "MMU is locked"
1 "Invalid tape name or tape error"
1 "Invalid graphic card"
1 "Invalid drive or directory"
1 "Invalid command"
1 "Invalid command line parameter"
1 "Incorrect snapshot file"
1 "Incorrect hardware version"
1 "File output error"
1 "File ZXI1.ROM not found"
1 "File ZX48.ROM not found"
1 "Extended graphic modes need EGA/VGA at address #nnnn"
1 "Escape sequence detected at address #nnnn"
1 "Error loading environment"
1 "Error loading DCK file"
1 "Error loading CFG file"
1 "Cartridge file too long or short"
1 "Cannot open snapshot file"
1 "Cannot open net file"
1 "Cannot open cartridge file"
1 "Can not work on 8086/8088"
1 "CS must not be changed"
1 "Abort may be 48 or 128"
1 !? 1 Sets interrupt mode 1
1 !<byte1> [<byte2>] SET INTERUPT MODE AND IFFS
1 !1 Enable interrupts
1 !0 2 Disable interrupts and sets interrupt mode 2
1 !0 Disable interrupts
1 ! - Cannot work theoretically
1 xxxx RST 0 Bxxxx (Monitor) Jump to monitor it is a break point
1 xxxx #ED #FB Always Multilevel load trap
1 xxxx #ED #F6 Always Multilevel load trap
1 xxxx #ED #00 With signature Escape sequence
1 select which blocks will be compressed using a list box.
1 cartridge file.
1 [<mdr2_name>.MDR] ... [<mdr8_name>.MDR]] [/C[<code>]]
1 Zoom icon
1 Top frame line
1 This is 'Sync total'
1 This is 'Leader const 2'
1 This is 'Leader const 1'
1 This is 'First part'
1 This is 'Const treshold'
1 This is 'Const max impuls' increased by 2
1 This is 'Const delay'
1 Shift + F8 - Opens a dialog for selecting the default microdrive number.
1 Shift + F7 - Opens a dialog for selecting the active snapshot file.
1 Shift + F2 - Opens a dialog for setting the parameters assigned to the
1 Shift + F10 - Allows you to run a program using the data in the database.
1 Resize corner
1 Menu 'Z80Snaps'
1 Menu 'MdriveFiles'
1 LOOP OUT (C),D ; Activate bank 0 and get byte from it
1 LD_WAIT DJNZ LD_WAIT
1 LD_VERIFY LD A,(IX+#00)
1 LD_SYNC LD B,#C9 <<<
1 LD_START CALL LD_EDGE_1
1 LD_SAMPLE INC B
1 LD_NEXT INC IX
1 LD_MARKER LD L,#01
1 LD_LOOP EX AF,AF'
1 LD_LEADER LD B,#9C <<<
1 LD_FLAG RL C
1 LD_EDGE_2 CALL LD_EDGE_1
1 LD_EDGE_2 CALL LD_EDGE_1
1 LD_EDGE_1 LD A,#16 <<<
1 LD_EDGE_1 .
1 LD_DELAY DEC A
1 LD_DEC DEC DE
1 LD_BYTES INC D
1 LD_BREAK RET NZ
1 LD_8_BITS CALL LD_EDGE_2
1 HELLO.PAS 52 Jul 14,1990 12:00pm
1 F9 - Generate RESET signal.
1 F9 - Cancels selection of the active snapshot file. If the
1 F8 - Generate NMI. This is useful only if you have changed ROM's.
1 F8 - Opens a dialog for selecting the active cartridge file.
1 F7 - Saves the snapshot file in a format compatible with Lunter's Z80
1 F7 - Changes the name of the active snapshot file. Using this
1 F6 - On non-VGA graphic cards activates and deactivates border emulation.
1 F6 - Opens a dialog for creating and changing the database.
1 F5 - This key has different functions, depending on the graphic mode in
1 F5 - Opens a dialog for setting options related to the emulation
1 F4 - Activates and deactivates emulation of the sound (beeper and AY).
1 F4 - Opens a dialog for setting options related to sound.
1 F3 - Calls the embedded machine-code monitor, which contains some options
1 F3 - Opens a editor for modifying the memory image of the active
1 F2 - Calls the subroutine for selecting the active tape and the active
1 F2 - Opens a dialog for selecting the active tape file.
1 F10 - Calls the emulator, or returns to the emulator if in the
1 F1 - Displays the HELP screen, that shows the meaning of all function keys
1 F1 - Calls the detailed and topic sensitive HELP system.
1 Directory Tree
1 Ctrl + F5 - Allows moving and resizing the active window.
1 Ctrl + F4 - Closes the active window.
1 Ctrl + F10 - Activates the main menu.
1 C:\TP\EXAMPLES\*.PAS
1 Alt + Z - Activates the 'Z80Snaps' menu
1 Alt + X - Leaves the environment and exits to DOS or Windows (as used
1 Alt + U - Activates the 'Setup' menu
1 Alt + T - Activates the 'TapeFiles' menu
1 Alt + S - Activates the 'Start' button
1 Alt + M - Activates the 'MdriveFiles' menu
1 Alt + F5 - Expands the current window to full screen size (if this is
1 Alt + F4 - Leaves the environment and exits to DOS or Windows (as used
1 Alt + F2 - Displays the content of the active tape file.
1 Alt + D - Activates the 'Dos' menu
1 Alt + C - Activates the 'DockFiles' menu
1 Alt + B - Activates the 'DataBase' menu
1 5867 INC HL /E Switch to Interface 1 ROM
1 4692 #ED #01 /A Put LOAD "" in the editor buffer (48)
1 39 16 Contents of the AY chip registers (128 or Timex version)
1 38 1 Last OUT to port 65533 (AY register number, 128 version) or
1 37 1 Some flags
1 36 1 Contains 255 if Interface 1 ROM paged in, except on Timex
1 35 1 In version 128, contains last OUT to 32765; in Timex version
1 34 1 Hardware mode: 0 = Spectrum 48K, 1 = Spectrum 48K with ZX
1 32 2 Program counter (PC)
1 30 512 DATA Actual data
1 30 2 Length of additional header block (contains 23)
1 29 1 Interrupt mode (0, 1 or 2)
1 29 1 DESCHK Checksum of the descriptor (e.g. of the last 14
1 28 1 IFF2 (not particularly important...)
1 27 1 Interrupt flip-flop IFF1 (0 = DI, otherwise EI)
1 25 2 IX register
1 2433 #ED #01 /A Put LOAD "" in the editor buffer (TS)
1 23 2 IY register (Again LSB first)
1 22 1 F' register
1 21 1 A' register
1 1974 #ED #01 /A Restore changed ROM after loading of
1 19 10 RECNAM Name of the file allocated into the sector (padded
1 19 2 HL' register pair
1 1792 RET /E Return to standard ROM
1 17 2 RECLEN Actual data length into the block (
1 17 2 DE' register pair
1 16 1 RECNUM Determines which part of file allocated in this
1 15 2 BC' register pair
1 15 1 RECFLG Data block flag byte:
1 14 1 HDCHK Header checksum by modulo 255 (checksum of the first
1 1388 CALL nnnn FAST,AUTO (Tape) Fast load block
1 1378 #ED #01 /A Restore changed ROM after loading of
1 13 2 DE register pair
1 1232 EX AF,AF' FAST,AUTO (Tape) Fast save block
1 12 1 Bit D0: bit 7 of the R-register
1 11 1 Refresh register (R), bit 7 is not significant!
1 10 1 Interrupt register (I)
1 'B G Services' in Great Britain using Giro account 324.82.16. The price is
1 you can load Lunter's snapshot file version 3.0. into the 'Warajevo'
1 would be sampled, or ignored.
1 working at address 4591 (label RAM_DONE), not at 0. Finally, after loading
1 with suggestions on how to convert between his and Warajevo's database
1 with quite small programs;
1 with ZX Spectrum software;
1 with Sound Blaster card;
1 with Lunter's emulator: his emulation of the loading routine is worse than
1 will work in all cases, but it will cause remarkable slower loading even
1 will be saved in the ASCII file SPECSIM.CFG (also in the directory which
1 who don't know about machine code programming (for example the screen
1 which may be seen in the Tape Manager in the emulator itself;
1 which is produced using the previous option unfortunately will not work
1 when you later want to make a conversion of the produced TAP file into the
1 value (ARG and (ARG) fields);
1 using the 'Start' button (see chapter 3.9.);
1 useful for making maps of games.
1 uncompressed (the last byte need not contain all 8 bits).
1 type, etc.). To every program you can add data about the tape where the
1 transparent. The monitor also has some other things, designed for those
1 to the format of many other emulators and vice versa and more. The user can
1 to conversions to and from the ZXT and ZXS formats supported in his
1 to and from other formats (BASIC, GENS, etc.), the conversion of SCREEN$
1 to RET (to forbid 'Program: ...' message on screen). The emulator begins
1 to DOS instead resetting the emulator. F10 does the same thing. When you
1 to B0); whole package of such sample bytes may be either compressed or
1 title screen.
1 this mode requires synchronization adjusting on some monitors.
1 this feature). P/V flag after BIT is equal to Z flag;
1 they exist. If a graphic character is not quoted, it will be converted to
1 their state will be saved in the file TEMP.DCK (in the directory which
1 the user-defined I/O devices, tape system emulation, or the MLT loading
1 the program will work.
1 the output file, but if you give I command with parameter, any instructions
1 the memory buffer. This includes emulating of leader tone (with 260 pulses)
1 the keyword of Beta BASIC;
1 the file SPECSIM.CFG will contain a parameter /R<name> too. It will be
1 the file SPECSIM.CFG (see chapter 3.11.). This file contains also the
1 the emulator itself. The message will be truncated to 10 characters. This
1 the emulator doesn't automatically recognize it or recognizes it
1 the drawback is the fact that the blocks on the converted tape will not
1 the codes #ED #FF and #ED #FE, or two the special instructions with codes
1 the blocks on the tape will be loaded from BASIC, without the use of
1 the blocks on the tape will be loaded from BASIC using the microdrive
1 the block is not compressed;
1 the TZX file will not be preserved, so the converted file will have
1 the MIDI interface (on Spectrum 128) and the Sinclair Network!
1 the English documentation;
1 that monitor executes will be sent in disassembled format to the output
1 testing;
1 tell how many bits in the last byte in the block are used (number of used
1 tape/snapshot/cartridge name, directory, command parameters etc.) will be
1 tape to a TAP file!
1 tape recorder directly into the emulator, but unlike Lunter's emulator,
1 system (MultiLevel Load Trap, see chapter 7.1.). However, loading and
1 synthesis and emulation through beeper are supported). Also, multicolor
1 suggestions and test programs related to Timex Sinclair emulation;
1 suggestions about the emulator.
1 stored into SPECSIM.CFG).
1 standard ROM), to suppress menu drawing. If some of addresses 14307, 14345,
1 some simple commands.
1 some minor modification of screen (testing for these instructions is done
1 solution of some hardware problems;
1 software and sending release 1.1. of our program to the world;
1 so F2 and F3 have no functions. Also, F7, F8 and F9 will not work either.
1 snapshot files themselves. This is also a unique feature of the Warajevo
1 snapshot file (if it is a 48K snapshot file, the emulation type will be
1 setting bit 5 in FLAGS variable. The beginning of PRINT_OUT routine (address
1 separated;
1 sending our program to the world, and for the information about the
1 screen). Similar thing is done in PLOT subroutine (RET at address 8937 in
1 screen during the conversion, or converted into 'Character array' blocks
1 saving blocks is possible in two ways, using two special instructions with
1 saved into the file SPECSIM.CFG. If the active snapshot file is marked,
1 sampled or ignored; The latter is necessary if you determine that 'Pure
1 running screen, quick loading, etc.). The advantage is that games that
1 running of programs which are located in an arbitrary place on the TAP
1 rows), and in some cases changing additional parameters can completely
1 remove screen damaging. Such a tape will work on the Warajevo emulator, and
1 regular intervals.
1 registers as in ordinary LD_EDGE routine, reading bit by bit the values from
1 recorder directly to PC;
1 recommended sampling frequencies of 44100 or 22050 Hz; optionally they may
1 recognize them), depending on the settings;
1 real tape into a TAP file, regardless of the structure of the tone record
1 pulse), so these will satisfy loaders at any speed! If you are familiar with
1 pseudo-3-channel AY sound on a PC beeper. Starting from release 2.5.
1 programs. Also, the emulation of Timex Sinclair is not supported nor is
1 programs which need the old ZX Interface 1 ROM, like Trans Express, Easyuse
1 program. The command switch /! must not have a parameter.
1 program is located (or snapshot file when it's a program image), the
1 position on the tape, the disc drive where the tape is placed, the programs
1 pointing out of some errors;
1 pointer.
1 parameters, etc. This allows very easy starting of Spectrum programs, using
1 output file.
1 output file in same format as at the screen.
1 ours, so our extremely optimized machine loader is not compatible with his
1 or ignored.
1 or ignored, depending on the settings;
1 optionally be ignored;
1 option is useful for separating levels in games stored in TZX format.
1 option /Y (at address 520 in Derby ROM), and initial border is set
1 one second is passed after last access to the tape.
1 on his site for Warajevo home page support;
1 on a real Spectrum too (if you make a transfer).
1 on Lunter's emulator after converting to Lunter TAP format. The problem is
1 of the first header, the escape code #ED #01 at address 1974 restores all
1 of the break address.
1 of quotes;
1 of emulated I/O devices will be saved in the snapshot file TEMP.Z80 in the
1 of TZX files using 'Start' button, or would be ignored.
1 number of blocks (for example, in Firebird Bleepload programs).
1 nonimplemented blocks.
1 name of the active snapshot file.
1 more) than loading into a real Spectrum, without any degradation in loading
1 more reliable.
1 method. Our emulator can load from TAP files (even from Lunter TAP files)
1 menu 'Setup', or according to the command parameter /&E.
1 may drastically speed up the conversion of TZX files which have a huge
1 marked to be a current DCK file (commands /RTEMP and maybe /ETEMP will be
1 manipulation of TAP and snapshot files (reorganization, compression etc.),
1 manage their database of Spectrum programs (the name, the producer, the
1 logically correspond to blocks on the TZX file. Switching this option off
1 loads and runs the selected program.
1 loading syntax. The TAP file which is produced using this conversion may be
1 loading syntax (Wafadrive is a device similar to Microdrive).
1 loading syntax (Opus uses the same syntax). Screen damage will be big. Such
1 loaded into memory;
1 load the levels from the tape using non-standard routines work.
1 listing produced with D command.
1 keywords of Beta BASIC if they are not quoted;
1 is the size of the FORTH ram disc.
1 is set. In all other cases S flag will be reset (program 'Sabre Wulf' uses
1 is also implemented in the MultiMachine emulator by Paul Hodgson, but the
1 is EAR Sample block;
1 is EAR Sample block, the EDGE subroutine is not active, and the emulator
1 into headerless blocks (if you thrust in EDGE RECOGNIZER), depending on the
1 instructions are not on same addresses). The emulator begins working at
1 instruction of LD_EDGE_1 will be restored. The emulator does same thing if
1 instruction LD (HL),A will be changed to NOP. This modification suppress
1 instruction DEC B;
1 initial attribute is changed from 56 to 7 or to value set by option /Y (at
1 independently from the emulator, and they are not too much larger than the
1 increased by 11 for skiping call of SET_MIN routine (see ROM disassembly).
1 incorrectly you can use these options to change the mode Warajevo uses.
1 including noise generation and digital sound using only a PC beeper! Of
1 implementing TZX support in the Warajevo emulator;
1 implemented;
1 his MultiMachine emulator;
1 header, the escape code #ED #01 at address 1974 restores all changes in
1 header). In such cases, screen damage will be minimal (2 bottom screen
1 hardware requirements on the computer compared to some other emulators, like
1 hanging on some boards, and for a routine for loading programs from tape
1 graphics (without attributes). On VGA and EGA cards you can use the /VC or
1 fully bi-directional communication with Spectrum, conversion of ASCII files
1 formats;
1 formats of emulators which don't support (or badly support) headerless
1 files to TIFF, the conversion of TAP and snapshot formats from 'Warajevo'
1 file. So, you will get trace of program execution in similar form as a
1 file. No other emulators support such features.
1 file), else a 'pure' emulator will be started.
1 file will be ready for working (inspecting, editing, running etc.), but
1 file exists it will be loaded (due to the command /R in the SPECSIM.CFG
1 explain this later);
1 exit a compiled program a small copyright message will be printed instead
1 execution of some Spectrum programs and for sending test software;
1 example, by pressing F3), front panel will be send to the output file.
1 escape code at address 4692 stuffs LOAD "" and ENTER in the editor's buffer.
1 escape code at address 2433 (or 4692) stuffs LOAD "" and ENTER in the editor
1 escape code #ED #01 at addresses 1974 and 4692. The initial attribute is
1 escape code #ED #01 at address 1378 (or 1974) restores all changes in ROM.
1 environment variable WARAJEVO). The file TEMP.Z80 will be marked to be a
1 environment variable WARAJEVO).
1 environment and configuration file, passing the snapshot directly to the
1 emulator. So, we implement this option which makes it compatibile with
1 emulator, and save it in 'Warajevo' format.
1 emulator!
1 emulator in his program SGD, and maintaining a fascinating Internet site
1 emulator ZX32, bugs in the 'Start' button, etc.
1 emulation type will be determined according to the option 'Emulator' in the
1 emulation and the option /QX are not supported.
1 emulates pressing of ENTER key by putting 13 in LAST_KEY variable and by
1 dumping to the printer in different sizes) and some of them are very
1 don't start it automatically.
1 displayed on the screen during conversion or would be ignored.
1 directory which contains the emulator itself (this default directory may be
1 directly converted into TRD format using the earlier described option
1 detects at least 100 reading from port 254;
1 data' blocks would be converted into Headerless blocks.
1 data (e.g. end of tape is reached, or next block on the tape is not EAR
1 current snapshot file, and on the Timex version the file TEMP.DCK will be
1 current settings; a pause after them will be sampled to EAR sample blocks
1 course, AY chip emulation using AdLib and Sound Blaster cards is supported
1 conversion, or would be ignored.
1 conversion, or will be ignored, depending on the settings;
1 contain informations about sampling frequency (with meaning 00 - 15000 Hz,
1 considered during the starting of TZX files using 'Start' button, or would
1 conditions, be converted to EXE programs which can be executed totally
1 computer (extra video modes, sound, memory expansions etc.). Timex emulation
1 compiling of Timex snapshot files.
1 compiled program (because these are not included in the compiled program),
1 compatibility.
1 command /RTEMP, so it will be a message to the environment to take into
1 changes in ROM.
1 changed number of scan lines) if the resolution looks too ugly for you
1 changed from 56 to 7 or to value set by option /Y (at address 4710). The
1 changed by changing the variable WARAJEVO from the DOS environment; we will
1 bytes with numerical representations;
1 buffer. Jump at address 2463 in EXROM bank (or 4768 in HOME bank) is
1 bottom rows, and whole topmost third of the screen). Use this option only
1 blocks, or into headerless blocks (if you believe that EDGE RECOGNIZER will
1 blocks (like Irish and Polish emulator).
1 block) will cause remarkably faster loading;
1 block on the tape will be loaded using the machine routine (without
1 bits is, in fact, number stored in B0-B2 increased by one), bits B3-B4
1 become slower or faster, including autorepeat too.
1 because ordinary Spectrum 128 and +2 have different ROMs, and those
1 be ignored.
1 be compiled. The emulation of the Spectrum +2 is not supported in compiled
1 available in the emulator!!!
1 automatically determined in accordance with the content of the active
1 automatically created as 10, 20, 30 ...
1 auto-run escape code #ED #01 at addresses 1974 in standard ROM and 602 in
1 auto-run escape code #ED #01 at addresses 1378 and 2433 in EXROM bank (or at
1 as a base for the communication program;
1 and the sync pulse. Returned register values are chosen very intelligently
1 and loading routine. In other words, you can transfer any program from real
1 also be ignored;
1 all cases. The latter (if EDGE RECOGNIZER succeeds in recognizing the
1 addresses 1974 and 4692 if presence of ZX Spectrum ROM is noticed). The
1 address 3504 in HOME bank, or at address 4710 with ZX Spectrum ROM). The
1 address 3413 in HOME bank, or at address 4591 in presence of ZX Spectrum ROM
1 address 0 in Derby ROM (as usual). Finally, after loading of the first
1 additional machine code loaders. The consequence is big screen damage (two
1 active snapshot file.
1 activated, but you will not leave environment after this.
1 activated too, but the emulator will be immediately executed and automatic
1 account the content of the snapshot file TEMP.Z80 and it will become the
1 accordingly (at address 535 in Derby ROM). The escape code at address 602
1 a tape may be transferred directly to the Microdrive or the Opus disc, and
1 a lot of programs that load themselves using non-standard methods (e.g. the
1 a Logo program;
1 \TOURS
1 \MOREXAMP
1 \ANSWERS.DIR
1 Working area of
1 When this option is turned off, during conversion the logical structure of
1 When this option is switched on, 'Message' blocks will be converted into
1 Warajevo goes one step further, it tries to emulate nearly all AY features
1 Warajevo emulator needs much lower hardware requirements to work correctly.
1 Warajevo emulator in his program ZX Rainbow;
1 Warajevo emulator in his documentation;
1 Warajevo allows picture generation during loading!
1 WARAJEVO /C. This means that the environment must accept parameters from
1 VGA cards;
1 Timex-specific peripherals, ZX printer and MIDI emulation, emulations of
1 Timex version of the emulator address is 5663, not 6355.
1 This option is included after the remarks of many Warajevo users. The tape
1 The beginning of PRINT_OUT routine (address 16, HOME bank) is changed to RET
1 Spectrum, the Timex Sinclair 2068, with practically all the features of this
1 Spectrum characters;
1 Sample or Headerless blocks. The former is more reliable and will work in
1 Sample or Headerless blocks. The former is a bit more reliable, because it
1 Sample blocks or ignored, depending on the settings;
1 Sample block;
1 Sample block);
1 Samir's graduate thesis;
1 SPEC48 /C or SPEC128 /C according to the last step). If the active snapshot
1 SPEC128.EXE only with parameters /! and /N.
1 ROMs. This is quite complicate, but this works fine.
1 ROM disassembly). The beginning of PRINT_OUT routine (address 16) is changed
1 R9 5 Channel B volume, if D4=1 envelope generator is used
1 R8 5 Channel A volume, if D4=1 envelope generator is used
1 R7 7 Mixer control:
1 R6 6 Noise pseudofrequency (implemented only with options /SX and
1 R5 4 Coarse control of channel B frequency
1 R4 8 Fine control of channel B frequency
1 R3 4 Coarse control of channel B frequency
1 R2 8 Fine control of channel B frequency
1 R15 8 Exists, but not in use (game OutRun tests presence of this
1 R14 8 Controls RS232, KEYPAD and MIDI (see text below)
1 R13 4 Envelope control register
1 R12 8 Coarse control of envelope period
1 R11 8 Fine control of envelope period
1 R10 5 Channel C volume, if D4=1 envelope generator is used
1 R1 4 Coarse control of channel A frequency
1 R0 8 Fine control of channel A frequency
1 Plus D disc loading syntax.
1 PLAY "Y1 cdefgabC"
1 PLAY "Y1 Z192 Z5"
1 PLAY "","","","Y1 cdefgabC"
1 PC <- PC -2
1 Of course, programs which need the new ROM work too!
1 OUT 239,238: OUT 239,236
1 OUT 239,0
1 OK, you will see the message 'R Tape loading error').
1 O again. So, two subsequently O commands will force sending of front panel
1 Microdrive Utility, etc. (XZX emulator for Unix also has the same feature).
1 MS Windows. Out of all the emulators, only the Warajevo emulator achieves
1 Lunter's emulator. The price is a bit more screen damage (3 bottom screen
1 Like the previous option, but the loader will be adapted to the Wafadrive
1 Like the previous option, but the loader will be adapted to TR DOS disc
1 Like the previous option, but the loader will be adapted to Disciple or
1 LD_BYTES, you can understand this.
1 IN/OUT instructions may write data into ROM.
1 Headerless blocks. Like in previous similar options, the former is much
1 HL', F and F');
1 HL <- HL + 1
1 Great Britain, for great help with technical data, documentation,
1 FORMAT "n";3: SAVE *"n";2CODE 0,6912
1 FORMAT "n";2: LOAD *"n";3SCREEN$
1 FILENM12.PAS
1 FILENM11.PAS
1 FILENM10.PAS
1 FILENM09.PAS
1 FILENM08.PAS
1 FILENM07.PAS
1 FILENM06.PAS
1 FILENM05.PAS
1 FILENM04.PAS
1 FILENM03.PAS
1 FILENM02.PAS
1 FILENM01.PAS
1 Determines whether the environment would display warning message for
1 Determines whether text descriptions from 'Text Description' block would be
1 Determines whether negative jumps would be allowed in the TZX file
1 Determines whether a pause after a 'Standard speed' block would be sampled,
1 Determines whether a pause after 'Turbo loading' and 'Pure data' blocks
1 Determines whether 'Turbo loading' blocks would be converted into EAR
1 Determines whether 'Standard speed' blocks would be converted into EAR
1 Determines whether 'Snapshot' block would be extracted during the starting
1 Determines whether 'Pure tone' and 'Sequence of pulses' blocks would be
1 Determines whether 'Pure data' blocks would be converted into EAR Sample or
1 Determines whether 'Message' blocks would be displayed on the screen during
1 Determines whether 'Hardware Info' and 'Emulation Info' blocks would be
1 Determines whether 'Direct recording' blocks would be converted or ignored.
1 Derby ROM. The initial attribute is changed from 56 to 7 or to value set by
1 DE <- DE + 1
1 Calling the emulator from the environment will cause the following events:
1 COMP.SYS.SINCLAIR FAQ list, in which the Warajevo emulator is described in
1 CHR$(nn).
1 BC <- BC - 1
1 After this option the BASIC loader on the tape will be such that the last
1 Address 4769 is increased by 11 for skipping call of SET_MIN routine (see
1 8 2 Stack pointer (SP)
1 8 1 NCHCS The header checksum
1 70 DATA 62,205,33,205,250,201
1 7 2 Autorun line (only for BASIC)
1 7 1 NCDCS Data checksum
1 602 #ED #01 /A Emulate pressing of ENTER key (128)
1 60 DATA 185,0,27,180,64,205,33,180
1 6 2 Always 0 (the emulator creates snapshoot files like release
1 6 1 NCOBL Number of data bytes in the package (0 - 255)
1 50 PRINT a$
1 50 DATA 60,205,33,137,195,186,0,64
1 5 2 Length of program zone (only for BASIC)
1 5 1 NCTYPE Type of the package (0 = data, 1 = EOF)
1 48K emulation etc.). If the active snapshot file is not marked, the
1 40-70% less space on disc. The emulator supports the automatic loading and
1 40 DATA 0,56,48,56,54,51,201,180
1 4 256 Content of the package
1 4 10 HDNAME Cartridge name (e.g. the name given by FORMAT) padded
1 4 2 HL register pair
1 30 PRINT #4;"Hello from net!"
1 30 INPUT #4;a$
1 30 DATA 69,69,78,46,68,65,84,237
1 3 ? Compressed data
1 3 2 Start address of the file
1 3 2 NCNUM Data package number
1 274 CALL nnnn FAST,AUTO (Tape) Fast load block (Timex)
1 20 POKE 23692,255: PRINT IN 231;" ": GO TO 20
1 20 OPEN #4;"n";3
1 20 OPEN #4;"n";2
1 20 DATA 17,69,156,24,10,83,67,82
1 2 2 Reserved; not yet used
1 2 2 HDEMPTY Not used
1 2 2 BC register pair (LSB, i.e. C, first)
1 2 1 Page number of block
1 2 1 NCSELF The number of the station which performs transmission
1 16 in both ROMs) is changed to RET (to forbid 'Program: ...' message on
1 14437 or 14470 in Derby ROM contains instructions LD (HL),A and INC HL,
1 12-th bit;
1 118 EX AF,AF' FAST,AUTO (Tape) Fast save block (Timex)
1 110 - Extended resolution: without color attributes, even columns of video
1 10 OUT 239,238: OUT 239,236
1 10 FORMAT "n";3
1 10 FORMAT "n";2
1 10 FOR f=40000 TO 40045: READ a: POKE f,a: NEXT f
1 10 - RAM, page 7 (49152-65535)
1 1 2 Number of bytes into the file
1 1 1 NCIRIS The destination station number
1 1 1 HDNUMB Logical number of the sector
1 1 1 F register
1 010 - Multicolor mode: video data at address 16384 and 8x1 color attributes
1 01 - 22050 Hz, 10 - 30303 Hz, 11 - 44100 Hz), and bits B5-B7 are not used;
1 001 - Video data at address 24576 and 8x8 color attributes at address 30720;
1 000 - Video data at address 16384 and 8x8 color attributes at address 22528
1 0 2 Package ID (used for fast checking whether content of the Net
1 0 2 Length of data (without this 3-byte header)
1 0 1 HDFLAG Header flag byte, bit D0 is 1 to mark header, other
1 0 1 File type (0-BASIC, 1/2-DATA, 3-CODE)
1 0 1 A register
1 /VW switches too, but these are not very useful on these cards.
1 /VC and /VW (/VW is recommended).
1 /T, /Y, /#, /&, /%LMAX, /?128, /?86 and /@ make no sense in a compiled
1 /RTEMP if you called environment from the emulator and you didn't change
1 ..
1 (to forbid 'Program: ...' message on screen). The emulator begins working at
1 (not Lunter's snapshot files version 3.0.). This is not a problem because
1 (label RAM_DONE), not at 0. Finally, after loading of the first header, the
1 (but this will not work on all VGA cards), or /VM if you want shaded
1 (although they are not implemented yet).
1 (KEYPAD) emulation on ZX Spectrum 128.
1 (DE) <- (HL)
1 (B register is unchanged after zero pulse, and it is set on 255 after one
1 'Warajevo TAP -> TRD' without any manual modification of the BASIC loader!
1 'Character array' header blocks, which may be seen in the Tape Manager in
1 #ED #FD and #ED #FC (see sections 6.2. and 6.3.).
1 "pasted" blocks. The converted file will then have a lot less blocks, and
1 without problems, for normal speed programs, no matter what their sizes.
1 with password GOPLEASE. Suppose that this user has full control over the
1 until SignsOK;
1 until Counter=0;
1 submenu in the 'Communications' menu in chapter 3.2.4.
1 speedlock programs, this method is not suitable.
1 recorder to a TAP file. For the details see description of the 'Casette'
1 possibilities:
1 other formats may be found on some FTP servers, as mentioned in chapter
1 must be set to have access to MYSERVER computer. There are various
1 has access rights to the directory which interface net file has name John,
1 from a real tape recorder through a LPT1 port or Sound Blaster card, as we
1 for j:=0 to Size-1 do begin {Do like classic save routine}
1 e) If MYSERVER is on the other side of the Internet, and the client is NT
1 directory ZXCHANGE. Define this directory as shared directory using
1 details, see chapter 3.9.
1 described earlier.
1 d) If MYSERVER is on the other side of the Internet, and the client is
1 c) If MYSERVER is on the other side of the Internet, and the client is NT
1 b) Inside the same local network but different NT domain, a problems with
1 a) Inside the same NT domain or workgroup, if you are connected as user
1 We will explain details about this transfer later. For turbo-saved and
1 Top arrow
1 Size:=Counter-3;
1 Send(Parity)
1 Send(Lo(Bytes)); {Send the size with complement}
1 Send(Hi(Bytes));
1 Send(Flag); {Send the flag byte with complement}
1 Send(255-Lo(Bytes));
1 Send(255-Hi(Bytes));
1 Send(255-Flag);
1 Pointer
1 Parity:=Flag;
1 PC using the RS232 connector on the Spectrum 128. The transfer occurs
1 NET SHARE ZXCHANGE=C:\ZXCHANGE
1 Modem_DTR(1);
1 Modem_DTR(0);
1 Modem_DTR(0)
1 MYSERVER, and let it have TCP/IP address 150.142.18.95. Let the user which
1 Flag:=Byte5;
1 Explorer, File Manager, or from command prompt using command:
1 Drives
1 Counter:=Byte1+256*Byte3;
1 Bytes:=Size+3;
1 Below pointer
1 Address:=0;
1 Above pointer
1 9 - RAM, page 6 (49152-65535)
1 8 RAM, 16384-32767 RAM, page 5 (49152-65535 or 16384-32767)
1 7 - RAM, page 4 (49152-65535)
1 6 - RAM, page 3 (49152-65535)
1 5 RAM, 49152-65535 RAM, page 2 (49152-65535 or 32768-49151)
1 4 RAM, 32768-49151 RAM, page 1 (49152-65535)
1 3 - RAM, page 0 (49152-65535)
1 2 - Derby 128 ROM
1 1.1. All these formats are usable on the Warajevo emulator. For more
1 1 Interface 1 shadow ROM Interface 1 shadow ROM
1 0 Standard 48 ROM Standard 128 ROM
1 which is set will be converted into 2x2 solid matrix onto printer, so real
1 useful when disassembling FP calculator routines.
1 the window
1 screen pixel which is set give one pixel on printer. Dump size in this
1 resolution in this mode is 72 dots per inch, and dump size is 18 x 13.6
1 printer, depending of attribute byte on screen. So, real printer
1 printer resolution in this mode is 72 dots per inch, and dump size is some
1 pressed or loading fails.
1 new feature introduced in release 2.5. is displaying of ASCII codes which
1 mode is 9 x 6.8 cm.
1 mode is 4.5 x 3.4 cm.
1 in RAM.
1 correspond with displayed bytes, including BASIC tokens;
1 cm. This is default value of <byte> parameter.
1 byte #33 (jump), then continue with smart disassembling; this is sometimes
1 as in previous option, 18 x 13.6 cm.
1 and with three passes per every line. Dump size is 2.7 x 2 cm.
1 and DW;
1 [p] TO [q]])][([[r][ TO [s]]])...]|PAPER m|TAB m|OVER m}[{;|,|'}{y|y$|#p|
1 [l]])][([[t][ TO [u]]])...]|PAPER p|TAB p|OVER p}...}
1 Title
1 Every screen pixel (set or reset) will be converted into 2x2 matrix onto
1 BREAK key is pressed, or until loading fails.
1 AT p,q|BRIGHT p|FLASH p|INK p|INVERSE p|LINE
1 8 LD HL,(nn) /E Switch to Interface 1 ROM
1 144 dots per inch, and with two passes per every line. Dump size in this
1 values for given bank; for example, #FF in DOCK bank, and ghost images of
1 such chunks will be initially filled with zeros)
1 saving content of expanded RAM; also this is useful for emulating
1 non-volatile battery-protected RAM expansions)
1 n - Pauses (n=1-9 sec.) before saving this block.
1 S - Saves the current block to the output device.
1 R - Remove a headerless (or header and corresponding block) from the
1 N - Changes the name of header blocks.
1 A - Cancels autostart of BASIC programs.
1 8K Timex EXROM in EXROM bank)
1 you can use them later for any other purposes. They will not be stored
1 you are sure that NT or WIN95 computer is set up correctly, maybe
1 with the cursor keys: the cursor keys on the numerical keypad and the
1 with it, you can use the manual calibration with /JAlllrrruuuddd where
1 with content
1 window. Select option Advanced and check field Enable LMHOSTS Lookup.
1 will not be performed as well (in such cases double pressing on F1 will
1 will continue working normally. All this is very fast (about 1-2
1 will be the same size as on an original ZX or TS2040 printer;
1 will be automatically switched off if you disable synchronous border
1 which the emulator is started.
1 when the user doesn't except it, so introducing this option seems to be
1 very well in some programs. This option is hard to describe, so try it
1 using command /D (so changing of the name can be done only by exiting
1 using BG Services' interface on LPT1 port);
1 user using command
1 user must force it using /!1).
1 useful).
1 useful during loading from real tape recorder (see chapter 2.4.).
1 until Lo(Counter)=0;
1 under MS Windows;
1 to see. Mouse moving is buffered and, for example, if you make a large
1 to repaint the screen when in a multitasking environment and a task
1 to exit the emulator. Unfortunately, we noticed that in some cases and
1 to DOS or by calling the environment). If for any reason the saving of
1 the snapshot file was unsuccessful, it is reported with a warning
1 the numeric keyboard and '~' emulate the fire button.
1 the emulator itself is located. Starting from release 2.0, it is
1 the emulator can be done again by pressing F10 (or a double mouse click
1 the additional delay per one scan line caused by ULA chip on Spectrum,
1 the DOS command SET WARAJEVO=<swapdir>), and this allows you to run the
1 switch /M for more details.
1 switch (using Alt+Tab) from some other program to the emulator is
1 sound. A more powerful way of saving a snapshot file is calling the
1 select TCP/IP protocol, and click on Configure in TCP/IP Configuration
1 second), so whole process is transparent to the user. The files
1 screen picture;
1 repeat
1 programming (for example, hard-copy of the screen to the printer.) The
1 program:
1 produced using the COPY command will have full A4 paper width, instead
1 printer. Namely, any access to the printer when it is not ready will
1 principle of analogue joystick reading is a bit awkward. The emulator
1 pressing F5 will activate multicolor emulation. Otherwise F5 increases
1 possible to change the directory in which these two files will be saved
1 possible combinations. For more details, see the option /M.
1 performed. In earlier releases of the emulator, such task switching
1 or, for example, using command
1 option /M) in the order /M0, /M1, /M2. See the description of the
1 on the screen window, if you set the environment to work in graphic
1 on the numerical keyboard and the grey cursor keys generate 1, 2, 3 and
1 on the numeric keyboard generate 5, 6, 7 and 8, and grey cursor keys
1 on some systems this handler fools Windows (more precise, Windows stops
1 of deactivating. On VGA cards this performs cyclic switching between
1 of about half of it;
1 not emulated;
1 moving left for longer.
1 move to the left, the emulator will return values for the joystick
1 more details see description of the switch /QX. Multicolor emulation
1 monitor is explained in detail in chapter 4.
1 mode). If you do not make any changes in the environment, the emulator
1 lll, rrr, uuu and ddd represent 3-digit decimal threshold values for
1 left, right, up and down joystick moving (for example /JA090210100200).
1 keyboard, like the key '~' (more precisely, the key with scan code 41)
1 key.
1 joystick. This option is a bit slow because it calls the BIOS, and the
1 interesting even to those who have no interest in machine code
1 increases the additional delay per one frame cycle caused by the ULA.
1 inc(Address);
1 in two files in the emulator directory: SPECSIM.CFG which saves
1 in this case.
1 in the directory determined with /D, but in the directory in which
1 if you are user from NT domain on which MYSERVER is located.
1 if you are local user, or using command
1 if MYSERVER is member of NT domain. After this, perform NBTSTAT -R and
1 if Byte=CheckSum then
1 if (Byte1+Byte2=255) and (Byte3+Byte4=255) and (Byte5+Byte6=255) then
1 help). That's why the installation of this handler is optional (the
1 grey cursor keys emulate the moving of the joystick using port 31
1 generating the picture, we don't know why). Also, repainting sometimes
1 generates '0' (fire).
1 generate CAPS SHIFT and 5, 6, 7 and 8. The key '+' on the numerical
1 from the Control Panel. In the Installed Network Software listbox,
1 forbidden (we have noticed that some programs try to access the printer
1 environment and then using the option 'Rename snapshot' (Shortcut F7).
1 emulator. Using the option /!2 will much such unwanted occurrences
1 emulator parameters, and TEMP.Z80 which is a temporary snapshot file
1 emulator directly from a CD ROM. For more details, see chapter 3.
1 emulator and quits directly to DOS, without calling the environment.
1 emulator (as in version 2.0.). The loading of the snapshot file can be
1 emulation using F6.
1 emulation is not active. When synchronous border emulation is active,
1 done (using option /R) from a file of any name, but saving using F7 is
1 default if you omit this option).
1 decreases the additional delay per one frame cycle caused by the ULA.
1 cyclic switching of the mode used for attribute emulation (like the
1 continue as in variant b). If the connection is still not possible, and
1 caused trashing of screen content, and the only solution would be
1 cause an error message under MS Windows, and this may fool the
1 by changing the variable WARAJEVO in the DOS environment (usually using
1 but replace 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 with 6, 7, 8, 9 and 0 respectively.
1 block, selecting the algorithm for tape emulation etc. Information
1 be converted to a 2x2 pixel matrix on the Epson printer, so a picture
1 automatically performs joystick calibration, but if you are not happy
1 asynchronous, synchronous and no border emulation (see option /U).
1 as in variant c), perform NBTSTAT -R, and continue as in variant b)
1 and the layout of the Spectrum keyboard. Unlike earlier releases, the
1 and pressing on Shift+F5, Ctrl+F5 or Alt+F5 decreases this delay. For
1 always in the file 'SNAP.Z80', on the disc and the directory determined
1 access rights are possible. The best solution is logging as concrete
1 about this and emulation of the tape recorder is in chapter 2.4.
1 ZXCHANGE. This may be performed using Explorer, File Manager, or using
1 You can read these values using the following QBASIC or GWBASIC
1 WIN95, edit the file C:\WINDOWS\LMHOSTS and put into it content similar
1 This process is similar on MS DOS with Network Client for WFW, Windows
1 This is communication procedure for sending to Spectrum in pseudo Pascal
1 The files SPECSIM.CFG, TEMP.Z80 and TEMP.DCK (Timex) will not be saved
1 TEMP.Z80, SPECSIM.CFG and TEMP.DCK (Timex) will stay on the disc, so
1 Skip this chapter if you don't want to use Sinclair Network emulation,
1 Send(Byte)
1 Receive(Byte6);
1 Receive(Byte5);
1 Receive(Byte4);
1 Receive(Byte3);
1 Receive(Byte2);
1 Receive(Byte1); {Read signature bytes}
1 Receive(Byte); {Checksum is sent every 256 bytes}
1 Pressing the right mouse button has the same effect as pressing F10
1 Pressing Shift+F6 will disable picture generation, which is sometimes
1 Pressing Shift+F6 again will enable picture generating.
1 Pressing Shift+F10, Ctrl+F10 or Alt+F4 (like Windows) leaves the
1 Parity:=Parity xor Byte;
1 OFFICIAL HOME PAGE: http://www.void.demon.nl/warajevo/index.html
1 NET USE Q: \\MYSERVER\ZXCHANGE GOPLEASE /USER:MYDOMAIN\JOHN
1 NET USE Q: \\MYSERVER\ZXCHANGE GOPLEASE /USER:JOHN
1 NET USE Q: \\MYSERVER\ZXCHANGE
1 NET USE Q: \\MYSERVER.PROVIDER.COM\ZXCHANGE /USER:MYDOMAIN\JOHN
1 NET USE Q: \\150.142.18.95\ZXCHANGE GOPLEASE /USER:JOHN
1 Most analogue joysticks have variable resistors to adjust settings.
1 MYSERVER 150.142.18.95 #PRE #DOM:MYDOMAIN
1 MYSERVER 150.142.18.95 #PRE
1 MOUSE.SYS or similar must be present). This unusual emulation works
1 John on the client, connect yourself as drive Q: on MYSERVER directory
1 Internet disk access is totally forbidden or reduced, using FIREWALL.
1 In monochromatic modes (CGA mono, Hercules, EGA mono), F5 performs
1 In color CGA mode, F5 performs default palette switching between three
1 In VGA mode, pressing F5 will be ignored if synchronous border
1 HELP screen is now more aesthetically pleasing.
1 For the emulation of the Sinclair Network, a drive which is accessible
1 DOS prompt command:
1 Click on OK to exit from this option. Now, create the file
1 CheckSum:=0;
1 C:\WINNT35\DRIVERS\ETC\LMHOSTS
1 Byte:=GetFromMemory(Address);
1 Blaster card; option /SB must also be presented in this case).
1 After deactivating, the border color remains like it was at the moment
1 4.0, you can make direct connection using command
1 4, and the key '+' on the numerical keyboard and the key '~' generate 5
1 30 GOTO 10
1 3.51, it must be registered in LMHOSTS file. Select the Network icon
1 3.11 for WorkGroups, Windows 95 and Windows NT.
1 20 PRINT "X=";STICK(0);" Y=";STICK(1)
1 10 LOCATE 1,1
1 (the Timex version sometimes saves a third file TEMP.DCK). Returning to
1 (fire).
1 (Kempston) or register 14 of the sound chip (Timex), and the key '+' on
1 implemented at this moment)
1 file); however, using this bank ID you may replace content of Timex
1 bank, such hardware units exist on real Timex Sinclair)
1 Your program could have one break point (which is, unfortunately, not
1 You will be asked for the name of a ROM file (16 Kb long), then for
1 You need not set these options every time you enter into the
1 You can start the emulator from DOS by typing WARAJEVO, and you will
1 You can start the compiler from the DOS command line. ZXCOMP without
1 You can set all of these options from the environment, using the
1 You can normally use J with sequence RST 40; DW <address> in 128 Derby
1 Working with the database needs some preparation, that's why calling
1 With the emulator, the new version of the 8K ZX Interface ROM is
1 With tested programs, more than 100 programs load themselves using
1 With option /B, RST 24 and RST 32 instructions, and RST 40 instructions
1 With exact AY emulation, every 228 T states (224 on Timex release) a
1 With AY emulation using interlacing, every channel have 20 ms, then the
1 With AY emulation using FM synthesis, such AdLib register settings are
1 While we emulated some instructions, we had to implement some specific
1 When you select 'OK', you will see a loading window. Loaded blocks
1 When you save a program on the original Spectrum, you in fact save two
1 When you leave the environment, the index table will not be saved on
1 When you define the new order, you can select the 'OK' button. This
1 When the selected file is a TZX file, 'Hardware Info' and 'Emulation
1 When the program is in a snapshot file, automatic running is performed
1 When the option /QX is present (introduced in release 2.5.), the
1 When the FAST algorithm is selected the EDGE RECOGNIZER is switched
1 When register R14 acts as output port (bit D6=1 in register R7), bits
1 When register R14 acts as input port (bit D6=0 in register R7, Spectrum
1 When paying, it is necessary to include the following:
1 When editing 48K or Timex snapshots, this will start an editor
1 When compiling, you can see some data on screen. The field 'Length:'
1 When all blocks are sent, press BREAK on the Spectrum, then press 'S'
1 When AUTO is selected, the emulator traps execution of Z80
1 We've already said that the ZX32 emulator by Vaggelis Kapartzianis for
1 We will use the symbol <word> for sixteen-bit values, and <byte> for
1 We will illustrate these things with some examples:
1 We will illustrate all these things by one example. Using an
1 We want to tell users of earlier releases of Warajevo ZX Spectrum
1 We want to tell about writing to network port that collected bits are
1 We use the classic database DBF format. Here will be explained only the
1 We tested programs without 'Virtual 8086' drivers (we recommended same
1 We should mention that, because the scanning of the KEYPAD in ROM
1 We must say that sound quality is subjective thing which depends on
1 We hope that time of a machines on which problems like 'Too slow'
1 We have informations from users that Warajevo works better under OS/2
1 We emulate the Z80 processor very well. All standard instructions and
1 We can not say anything more about the keyboard in the 48 version of
1 Warajevo emulator can work under MS Windows even in window and in
1 Warajevo TAP files may be converted to and form the formats of
1 Warajevo 2.51. is a real-time emulator, so all Spectrum programs will
1 Warajevo 2.51. has two method of screen updating. Using first method
1 Warajevo 2.0. emulator on VGA card also emulates hires border effects,
1 WARAJEVO also allows some command parameters. We told you earlier
1 WARAJEVO accepts some command parameters too, but they will be
1 Using this useful command you can very easily discover address of
1 Using this option, you may set the name of an interface file for
1 Using this option, you may include or exclude various tests, like the
1 Using this option, it is possible to change the initial attribute
1 Using this option, AY chip emulation will not be performed using the
1 Using this option you may easily change the speed of the emulator. The
1 Using this option you can set a sort marker. When you select this
1 Using this option you can select whether you want to emulate the
1 Using this option you can select whether you want sound emulation,
1 Using this option you can select whether you want ZX Interface 1
1 Using this option you can select the type of the joystick emulation,
1 Using this option you can select the database directory. All options
1 Using this option you can select the communication port (default is
1 Using this option you can change the name of a logical file stored on
1 Using this option will automatically switch the emulator to it's
1 Using this option the communication program stored in the file
1 Using this option (which works only with the 48 version of the
1 Using the radio buttons 'Printer type' you may select your printer
1 Using the program ZXCOMP you can compile snapshot files into
1 Using the dialog select the name of the DAT file (SGD database) which
1 Using the dialog select the block which you want to include in the
1 Using the dialog select the ZXT file which will be converted. The
1 Using the dialog select the ZXS file which will be converted. The
1 Using the dialog select the VOC sample file which will be converted.
1 Using the dialog select the TZX file which will be converted. The
1 Using the dialog select the TRD file which will be converted. The
1 Using the dialog select the SPECEM file which will be converted. The
1 Using the dialog select the SPC file which will be converted. The
1 Using the dialog select the LTP file which will be converted. The
1 Using the dialog select the BLK file which will be converted. The
1 Using second method of screen updating (which is implemented only on
1 Use this option with /T. It establishes the 'filter' for the tapes.
1 Unlike the original machine IM 2 will not make problems with the
1 Two special argument symbols, '.' and '$' mean 'Value of memory
1 Toggles between decimal and hexadecimal values on display. Parameters
1 Toggles active ROM between standard ROM and Interface 1 shadow ROM (if
1 To understand the network emulation, an explanation about principles
1 To try and adjust the network emulation, find a shared drive and
1 To simplify the use of some extended editor's functions when KEYPAD
1 To reduce confusion, while the KEYPAD is active, the grey cursor keys
1 To make this conversion, you must be in the directory FILES, and its
1 To give more flexibility, the dialog for this option also contains two
1 Timex Sinclair 2068 has additional I/O ports. It seems that low byte of
1 Timex Sinclair 2068 extra video modes are not yet emulated absolute
1 This views the contents of the current cartridge file as a logical
1 This views the content of the active tape. This option has the
1 This temporarily leaves the environment and exits to DOS. To return to
1 This submenu makes it possible to print tape content to the Screen,
1 This submenu contains two submenus: 'RS232' and 'Cassette'.
1 This submenu contains options for selecting and viewing TAP files.
1 This sets the active disc and directory for TAP files (which emulate
1 This selects the file <filename> for emulation of the microdrive.
1 This release of the emulator is tested with about 1000 programs on
1 This program is made for use on the original Spectrum 128 (or +2) and
1 This program is freeware, and you can give it to anybody if you don't
1 This problem means that the program makes time dependent border
1 This problem belongs to the past. Starting from release 2.0, Warajevo
1 This principle can not be implemented on the emulator, due to we
1 This picture represents the general look of one window (the picture is
1 This parameter may be set from the environment using the 'Video'
1 This parameter may be adjusted from the environment using the 'Speed'
1 This option will set the parameter /R described in chapter 2.1. The
1 This option will purge all excluded blocks from the tape file,
1 This option will open a dialog which allows you to select the type of
1 This option will mark unmarked records and unmark marked records. When
1 This option will decompress all compressed blocks in the tape file.
1 This option will compress all blocks in the tape file except headers,
1 This option simply unmarks all marked records in the database.
1 This option shows the header of the current snapshot file. See the
1 This option shows information about the current DOCK file, like bank
1 This option sets up the active tape. The tape will be ready for work
1 This option seeks to the desired block in the active tape. It is used
1 This option rewrites all blocks of the tape file to the new tape file,
1 This option rearranges sectors in the cartridge file in the best way,
1 This option opens a list box for database browsing like in the 'Edit'
1 This option may be set from the environment using the menu 'Setup'
1 This option may be set from the environment using the 'Test' dialog in
1 This option may be set from the environment using the 'Test' dialog
1 This option may be set from the environment using the 'ROM' dialog in
1 This option may be set from the environment using the 'Printer' dialog
1 This option may be set from the environment by selecting the desired
1 This option makes a hidden file (selected using the usual method)
1 This option is used mostly for linking the emulator with the
1 This option is similar to /SA, but uses features of the Sound Blaster
1 This option is similar to 'Compress all', but with this option you can
1 This option is included for security reasons. Release 1.5. of the
1 This option is dedicated to the conversion of LROS and AROS programs
1 This option has the shortcut F8. It is like inserting a cartridge into
1 This option extracts the selected blocks to standalone files. You can
1 This option excludes a block from the chain in the .TAP file. This
1 This option edits selected block using a hexadecimal, decimal or ASCII
1 This option displays four numbers. The 'Actual size' is the actual
1 This option displays all files in the current directory.
1 This option disables drawing of the title picture when you run the
1 This option determines the type of ZX printer emulation. For details,
1 This option deletes selected blocks from the TAP file. When you select
1 This option copies the selected blocks from one tape file to another.
1 This option converts the active snapshot file to a TAP file. The
1 This option checks the correctness of a sectors logical structure.
1 This option calls a large dialog with input lines for entering
1 This option allows you to set some parameters related to the emulation
1 This option allows you to set some parameters related to MS Windows
1 This option allows you to set 7 time constants which control the
1 This option allows you to send blocks, using the RS232 interface, from
1 This option allows you to receive blocks from the Spectrum 128 to your
1 This option allows you to merge one DOCK file and another. After you
1 This option allows you to directly change the sector content. You can
1 This option allows you to copy files from one cartridge file to
1 This option allows you to change the cartridge name (the name given
1 This option allows you to change directory, by typing the name into
1 This option allows the setting of the video graphic card, mode of
1 This option allows the selection of the active microdrive. All
1 This option allows renaming of the active snapshot file. This option
1 This option accelerates BASIC programs by about 10% (in '128 Basic'
1 This menu supports conversion to and from the text processor The Last
1 This menu supports conversion to and from the macro assembler Machine
1 This menu supports conversion to and from the Sinclair Logo
1 This menu supports conversion to and from Tasman's word processors for
1 This menu supports conversion to and from Hisoft's programs GENS,
1 This menu supports conversion to and from Abersoft's Forth compiler.
1 This menu is used for easily setting various command parameters which
1 This menu is dedicated to selecting the database directory. This
1 This menu is dedicated to manipulations with snapshot files. Snapshot
1 This menu is dedicated to manipulation of individual sectors on the
1 This menu is dedicated to manipulating individual logical files on the
1 This menu is dedicated to converting the MDR format into the cartridge
1 This menu contains some familiar DOS operations.
1 This menu contains options which treat the cartridge like one logical
1 This menu contains options for the selection and viewing DCK files.
1 This menu contains options for selecting and manipulating MDR files
1 This menu contains options for selecting and manipulating DCK files
1 This menu contains options for manipulating tapes (TAP files). As we
1 This menu contains options for converting formats between different
1 This menu contains options for converting between the snapshot formats
1 This menu contains option for manipulating individual blocks into a
1 This menu allows conversion of the Warajevo database into other ZX
1 This menu allows changing of the current snapshot file.
1 This makes the current MDR file write protected by changing its file
1 This loads the snapshot file. The assumed extension is '.Z80'. The
1 This loads the DCK files which are used for emulation of memory
1 This lists the catalog of the logical files on the cartridge file.
1 This leaves the monitor and tries to interrupt the program returning
1 This key mapping is a bit unusual, at first sight. Of course the
1 This is, in fact, double-linked list. The native Warajevo format don't
1 This is only a short help message in case you entered the monitor
1 This is one of the most powerful commands in the monitor. When you give
1 This is communication procedure for receiveing from Spectrum in pseudo
1 This is another exotic thing which is also implemented only in Warajevo
1 This is a list of formats currently supported by the Start Button:
1 This instruction may have more than one parameter. In that case it acts
1 This formats the cartridge file, like the FORMAT command from BASIC.
1 This format is compatible with the format of the emulator 'Z80' written
1 This error message occurs when the option /?86 is active, and the
1 This error message occurs when the option /?128 is active, and a
1 This emulator requires at least an '80286' processor for work.
1 This emulator is not specially designed to be used with MS Windows.
1 This emulation is one very exotic thing, which we wanted to implement
1 This displays some information about the program.
1 This converts the tape from Lunter TAP format to native Warajevo TAP
1 This converts the current Warajevo tape to Lunter's tape format.
1 This converts the current Warajevo tape file to the ZXT format. Using
1 This converts the current Warajevo tape file to the ZXS format. Using
1 This converts the current Warajevo tape file to the VOC format. Using
1 This converts the current Warajevo tape file to the TZX format. Using
1 This converts the current Warajevo tape file to the SPC format. Using
1 This converts the current Warajevo tape file to the LTP format. Using
1 This converts the current Warajevo tape file to the BLK format. Using
1 This converts tape files from ZX by Roman & easy inc format to
1 This changes the position of one block in the tape file. Unlike the
1 This cancels the selection of the database directory using the
1 This cancels the selection of the active cartridge file (this is like
1 This cancels the selecting of the current snapshot file. If you call
1 These parameters may be set from the environment using the 'Video'
1 These options may be set from the environment using the 'Test' dialog
1 These conversions are compatible with Beta BASIC 3.0 and 128K Basic.
1 There is no graphic card that was detected as a CGA, Hercules, EGA,
1 There is instruction SLL that shifts one to the zero bit of argument.
1 There is also a possibility for this report to occur without a bug in
1 There are also new instructions with a double prefix (we discovered
1 The vertical scrollbar is used for changing the text position in a
1 The values of the registers are displayed as sixteen-bit values. They
1 The value of yyyy (size of string to be copied) is embedded in
1 The third field has the title 'Software distributor or producer'. This
1 The tapes are organized in a flexible way that allows saving of a
1 The system variables of the emulator, and many tables and vectors, are
1 The support which is described in the section 6.2. has a great power,
1 The sound chip and joystick connectors are supported with the BASIC
1 The snapshot file was found, but it's format was wrong. Most probably,
1 The sixth field, called 'Machine type' contains the computer type
1 The signature 'Unformatted or bad sector' shows sectors which don't
1 The selection of the algorithm for tape emulation can be changed using
1 The selection of the algorithm can be done from the emulator itself
1 The sampling starts the moment you press 'OK'. Tone samples will be
1 The same things can be done from the emulator itself, by pressing F4
1 The result of multiplication exceeds 16 bits, or the given command
1 The reports are organized in such a way that each record will be
1 The programs in this package use, or create, the following files:
1 The programs SPEC48, SPEC128 and TS2068 accept a lot of command line
1 The program-counter (PC) points to the current instruction. At the top
1 The program was developed in horrible conditions. The grenades fell
1 The program PARALLEL.COM which comes in the package with the emulator
1 The processor Z80 after arithmetical and logical instructions copies
1 The previous option has a disadvantage: loads are performed using a
1 The payment is possible in any bank and in any country, to one of
1 The parameter <word> sets a left margin for screen dump in screen
1 The pages are numbered, depending on the hardware mode, in the
1 The organizations we want to thank are:
1 The organization of the net files is very simple. They have 260 bytes
1 The option /SB (without additional arguments) was given, but the
1 The option /QX is not yet implemented on the Timex version of the
1 The option /L selects algorithm for tape emulation:
1 The option /D, for some reason, has not done its task. Most probably
1 The option /A- cancels a previously used /A option. This is
1 The option /%MAX can be used on faster computers too, if you have some
1 The option 'Select' will set command parameters /T and /D described in
1 The option 'Select' in the submenu 'Snaps' of the 'Z80Snaps' menu in
1 The option 'Select' in the submenu 'Microdrive' of the 'MdriveFiles'
1 The option 'Select' in the submenu 'Docks' of the 'DockFiles' menu in
1 The next field is called 'Full name'. The short name is limited to 10
1 The next field ('Year') is used for entering the year when the program
1 The next data byte determine lower byte of distance of string to be
1 The native Warajevo TAP format allows easy block saving at an
1 The most of load routines have the LD_EDGE routines. In the AUTO or
1 The monitor is one of the most interesting features of the Warajevo
1 The monitor doesn't understand the given command.
1 The minimal legal value for RAMPTOP in the A (ABORT) command is 23900.
1 The memory pointer (MP) is a default value for many instructions. It
1 The meaning of the other fields which are not displayed in the list
1 The main problem with our implementation of the net protocol is in the
1 The loading and saving are realized by the classic LOAD and SAVE
1 The last field displayed in the list box is 'Position'. It is used to
1 The keyboard is mostly mapped as the standard Spectrum's keyboard
1 The interrupt mode is displayed below the sign 'IM'. Two Z80 interrupt
1 The instruction NOPD is like the instruction NOP, but it is two bytes
1 The instruction /C was given, but the emulator cannot load a file
1 The instruction 'IN F,(C)' reads a value from a port at the address
1 The input lines 'Paper length' and 'Printable lines' should contain
1 The horizontal scrollbar is also used for changing the text position
1 The handler for additional devices may call all DOS and BIOS functions
1 The given command is correct, but there is an error in its syntax,
1 The given command expects more parameters than you gave. However, any
1 The following picture represents the general look of one list box:
1 The flag byte determines the block type. It is always 0 for headers,
1 The first parameter of the A command in the 128 version of the
1 The first field is called 'Short name'. This field is important for
1 The first 9 bytes in the actual data of the sector which has RECNUM=0
1 The file selecting dialog box contains an input box, a file list, a
1 The file information panel shows the path name, file name, date, time,
1 The file SPECSIM.CFG is a simple ASCII file which lists the parameter
1 The fields 'Short name', 'Full name', 'Year', 'Command line' and
1 The fields 'Category' and 'Message language' may be entered using the
1 The field 'Software producer or distributor' must be entered using a
1 The field 'Remark' (this field will not be displayed in the database
1 The field 'Machine type' may be entered using a group of radio
1 The explanation of the function keys used in the emulator follows:
1 The explanation of compressed data bytes is rather complex. We used
1 The environment of the emulator was introduced in the release 1.5. It
1 The environment needs a hard disc. Principally, even a floppy disc is
1 The environment may be called directly from DOS, or from the emulator
1 The environment may be called directly from DOS (by running the
1 The environment and program ZXCOMP may be in window and in multitasking
1 The environment allows you to manage a database of Spectrum software
1 The environment allows creation of reports about the database, which
1 The emulator will display warning message if processor is in 'virtual'
1 The emulator was started with option /E, and the file 'ZXI1.ROM' was
1 The emulator switches off sample loading mode when one of following
1 The emulator switches into sample loading mode when one of following
1 The emulator switches into direct mode when it finds, during
1 The emulator supports emulation of many joystick interfaces using
1 The emulator signal WAIT=0 in control register of ZX Interface 1
1 The emulator every sector with wrong header checksum treats like a gap.
1 The emulator emulates the ZX printer and TS2040 printer (Timex version)
1 The emulator does implement the border (on CGA, Hercules and EGA Mono
1 The emulator and the environment use this file for bi-directional
1 The emulator allows you to make drivers for peripheral devices which
1 The emulator ZX (Roman & Easy inc.) by Peter Kroselj (?) keeps every
1 The emulator X128 by James McKay supports many snapshot formats, and
1 The emulator Spectrum 2.00 by Pedro M. R. Salas uses the BLK format
1 The emulator SPECEM by Kevin J. Phair does not support headerless
1 The emulator SP UKV by an unknown Russian author uses the expanded
1 The eighth field, 'File Name', is very important. It contains the name
1 The dialog linked with this option allows you to set the sampling
1 The dialog for problem explanation contains a group of checkboxes.
1 The dialog for database browsing contains the list box described
1 The database consists of 3 files:
1 The database can be sorted by various fields. If you don't state
1 The compression method is very simple: it replaces repetitions of at
1 The communication program is 6000 bytes long Z80 binary file. It may
1 The command option /V acts like in the emulator, except that the
1 The command Y tried to set the Interface 1 shadow ROM, but the
1 The command Y (or A) tried to switch memory banks when the 48K lock
1 The command F was not found in the given sequence (or the next
1 The command CAT from BASIC will not display the names of files which
1 The command A in the Timex version of the emulator is similar to that
1 The breakpoint can be put into ROM, but sometimes it is dangerous.
1 The bottommost line of the screen contains a (incomplete) list of
1 The bottom two lines are used for entering commands and error
1 The author of the SGD format changes the database format from release
1 The active snapshot file, together with the file ZX48.ROM will be
1 The active snapshot file will be filtered. You must give the name of
1 The active snapshot file will be filtered. The new snapshot file is a
1 The active snapshot file will be converted into ZXS format. Give the
1 The active snapshot file will be converted into SP format. All data
1 The active Warajevo database will be converted into the ZX Rainbow
1 The active Warajevo database will be converted into the SpecPic
1 The active Warajevo database will be converted into the SpecBase
1 The active Warajevo database will be converted into the SGD database
1 The ZX32 emulator by Vaggelis Kapartzianis for Windows 95 uses a
1 The ZX emulator by Eduard Rindt and Ludek Brukner keeps every block in
1 The ZX Spectrum 128 is not 100% compatible with the Spectrum 48K, so
1 The ZX Museum is a Russian Internet site on which you can find about
1 The Z80 snapshot format is the most popular snapshot format, and it is
1 The Z80 emulator by Gerton Lunter uses a tape format with the same
1 The Warajevo emulator installs a handler for the processor interrupt
1 The Warajevo emulator has the facility to be expanded from the user
1 The Warajevo emulator can convert the Spectrum's screen image to a
1 The VOC format is one of the most popular methods for storing data
1 The VGASPEC emulator by Alberto Olloqui also uses the SP format, but
1 The Timex's system of memory bankswitching is also implemented in the
1 The Timex Sinclair 2068 computer and the ordinary ZX Spectrum 48K are
1 The TZX format is a very popular tape format by Tomaz Kac from
1 The TRD format does not support headerless blocks (TRD is disc format,
1 The Spectrum beeper sound looks very well and clear. Due to precise
1 The Spectrum 2.00 emulator by Pedro M. R. Salas uses the SEM format,
1 The SpecEmu G emulator by Bernd Waschke uses the SEM format.
1 The SPECTRUM emulator by Pedro Gimeno uses the SP snapshot format.
1 The SPECTRUM + TR-DOS (also known as SP105) emulator is an emulator by
1 The SPECEM emulator by Kevin A. Pair uses the PRG format.
1 The SP emulator by J. Swiatek and K. Makowsky uses the file
1 The ROMs are not changed. The user could change them (for example by
1 The Nuclear ZX emulator by Radovan Garabik uses the SNP format.
1 The Nuclear ZX Emulator by Radovan Garabik uses the LTP format for the
1 The Microdrive is emulated on an I/O level and so is very realistic,
1 The KEYPAD has 18 keys (one key more than is on most PC numeric
1 The JPP emulator by Arnt Guldbransen uses the SNA format. This format
1 The 48 version of the emulator was started, and the file 'ZX48.ROM'
1 The 128 version of the emulator, without option /2 was started, and
1 The 128 version of the emulator, with option /2, was started, and one
1 The 'Start' button is located in the bottom left corner of the screen,
1 The 'Files' list box lists the names of files in the current directory
1 The '80286' processor and its younger brothers 'do not know' to put a
1 That's all if only one bank is stored in DCK file. Else, after the
1 Thank you in advance. From release 2.0. if you donate 80 DM or more
1 TAP files (tapes) in native Warajevo format have following structure:
1 Subtracts arguments and displays a result as in '?' command.
1 Submenu 'Compress' contains 3 suboptions: 'Compress all', 'Linearize'
1 String arguments are, in fact, packed numeric arguments. For example,
1 Starting from release 2.5, the optional extra parameter after /! is
1 Starting from release 2.5, Warajevo allows loading of Spectrum programs
1 Sometimes, picture on Hercules, CGA or EGAMono is badly readable,
1 Sometimes this will not be enough. In that case, use the <word>
1 Sometimes the emulator interrupts work (or don't even start working)
1 Sometimes it will be hard for the Spectrum to recognize the start of
1 Sometimes it may be useful to patch into a Spectrum program something
1 Sometimes AY sound using Sound Blaster is harsh in some programs. This
1 Something totally new: starting from release 2.5. we tried to emulate
1 Some programs saves blocks using non-standard routines (we founded such
1 Some parameter has too large a value for the given command.
1 Some command options which were frequently used in earlier releases of
1 Some Timex programs use the ZX Spectrum ROM, so the command A is
1 Signatures are data which are important for the imploding algorithm
1 Sets the memory pointer to a value <word>. If the value is omitted, the
1 Sets the break point at address <word>, in currently active page. The
1 Sets interrupt flip-flops IFF1 and IFF2 to <byte1> and switch interrupt
1 Sequence #00 #00 #00 #00 #FF #FF #FF #FF is, in fact, a EOF (end of
1 Selects the file <filename> as the interface file for the emulation of
1 Selects the current snapshot file using a dialog. All operations in
1 Selects the current cartridge file (or creates a new one if the
1 Selects the active tape (or creates a new one if the file with the
1 Selects the active DCK file. All operations in the 'DockFiles' menu
1 Selection of the option 'Screen' opens a new window on screen which
1 Selection of the option 'Printer' lists all the blocks of the tape
1 Selection of the option 'File' acts like the option 'Printer' but
1 Selecting the 'OK' button will usually start the desired operation.
1 Select the source and destination filename in the usual way. During
1 Select the source ASCII file and position of destination file in the
1 Select the name of the source (SP) and the destination (Z80) file,
1 Select the name of the source (SIT) in the usual way. Then you will be
1 Select the header of the The Last Word text file which will be
1 Select the header of the Tasword 2 text file which will be converted
1 Select the header of the Tasword 2 (or Tasword 128) text file which
1 Select the header of the Pascal program which will be converted to an
1 Select the header of the Logo program which will be converted to an
1 Select the header of the C program which will be converted to an ASCII
1 Select the header of the Abersoft Forth RAMDISC file which will be
1 Select the file which you want to delete from the cartridge, and it
1 Select the SLT file which will you want to convert in the usual way.
1 Searches sequence of bytes in memory, starting from the memory pointer.
1 Saves a part of the memory from address <word1> with a size <word2>. If
1 SUBMENU 'ZX32 <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'Z80 (48K) <-> Z80 (128K)'
1 SUBMENU 'X128 <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> ZX32'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> ZX MUSEUM'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> ZX GARABIK'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> ZX BRUKNER'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> TZX'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> SPECTRUM 2.00'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> SPECTRUM + TRDOS'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> ROMAN & EASY'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> POLISH SP'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> LUNTER Z80'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> JPP'
1 SUBMENU 'WARAJEVO <-> IRISH SPECEM'
1 SUBMENU 'VGASPEC <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'SPECTRUM 2.00 <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'SPECEMU G <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'SPANISH SPECTRUM <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'SP UKV <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'SCREEN$ TO TIFF'
1 SUBMENU 'RS232'
1 SUBMENU 'PRINT'
1 SUBMENU 'OTHER EMULATORS'
1 SUBMENU 'NUCLEAR ZX <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'JPP <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'IRISH SPECEM <-> WARAJEVO'
1 SUBMENU 'COMPRESS'
1 SUBMENU 'CASSETTE'
1 SUBMENU 'ASCII <-> THE LAST WORD'
1 SUBMENU 'ASCII <-> TASSWORD'
1 SUBMENU 'ASCII <-> MACHINE LIGHTNING'
1 SUBMENU 'ASCII <-> LOGO'
1 SUBMENU 'ASCII <-> HISOFT'
1 SUBMENU 'ASCII <-> FORTH'
1 SUBMENU 'ASCII <-> BASIC'
1 SAVE DB #ED,#FE
1 Returns to the program, with restoring registers as they were when you
1 Returns from the monitor to our program with updating changed
1 Returns a value of all registers to be as in the moment when you
1 Release 2.51. has five algorithms for the tape emulation, called AUTO,
1 Recently, a number of new emulators have appeared. Some of them are
1 Reading or writing to this port will cause ZX Spectrum crash if the
1 Radio buttons (
1 ROM extensions mapped into the DOCK bank are mostly implemented as
1 RAM is so simple in 48 version of the emulator, and we cannot say any
1 R register is incremented after every instruction by number of bytes
1 Puts breakpoint at address <word> and perform E command (e.g. leave
1 Psychical structure of the sector is not important for the emulator
1 Processors I80286 and later ones generate INT 0DH when reading word
1 Problems with additional devices: Means that additional device (for
1 Principally, microdrive emulation needs less description than the tape
1 Pressing F2 activates a subroutine that selects the active tape and
1 Pressing F1 will open the HELP window. Help is topic sensitive, e.g.
1 Places a sequence of the words in memory from the memory pointer. After
1 Places a sequence of bytes in memory, from the memory pointer. The
1 Performs a binary XOR between the arguments and displays a result as in
1 Performs a binary OR between the arguments and displays a result as in
1 Performs a binary AND between the arguments and displays a result as in
1 Parameter <address> is the decimal base address of Sound Blaster card,
1 Parameter /V may be set from the environment using the menu 'Setup'
1 Our experience shows that described algorithm works fine even when the
1 Other problems: Means a problem that is not mentioned above. In
1 Options /L0-5 may be set from the environment using the 'Parameters'
1 Option /TAPE supports automatization in many cases, but surely it can
1 Option 'Parameters' will open a dialog which is similar in use to the
1 Option 'Parameters' has the shortcut Shift+F2.
1 Only very advanced users can see this report. It will appear if you
1 Once the net is claimed, a short package is sent (serial, bit by bit),
1 On the real cartridge, structure of one sector is following. After a
1 On the bottom of the screen there is a brief list of the meanings of
1 On the Timex version of the emulator, these options are a bit more
1 On the Timex version of the emulator, the number under the sign 'CTRL'
1 On the PC, the user can select/unselect the blocks which will be sent
1 On the 48K and 128K versions of the emulator, the character under the
1 On the 48 version of the emulator, this option may be used only for
1 On the 128 version of the emulator this activates the emulation of
1 On a real Spectrum 128, when KEYPAD is not connect, bit D5 in register
1 On a CGA card in color mode the command /M has the following meaning:
1 On Windows 95, you can easy register Spectrum files (Z80, TAP, SNA, TZX
1 On Warajevo 2.51 with VGA card the color palette may be customized. The
1 On Timex version of the emulator, three 64-Kbyte memory banks are
1 On MS Windows 3.11. and on earlier releases, you must create a PIF file
1 On Hercules, EGA Mono and CGA cards in mono mode the command /M has
1 On CGA, Hercules and EGA Mono cards, the attributes are emulated by
1 Of course, this was only a very brief description of complex recognizer
1 Of course, many people helped us to realize this project. We want to
1 OPTION 'ZXS RIFF -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'ZX32 ZXT -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'ZX RAINBOW -> WARAJEVO'
1 OPTION 'ZX BRUKNER -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'Z80 SNAPSHOT -> TAP'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> ZXS RIFF'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> SP'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> SNP'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> SNA'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> SNA 128'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> SIT'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> SEM'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> PRG'
1 OPTION 'Z80 -> OLD SP'
1 OPTION 'Z80 + TAP -> SLT'
1 OPTION 'WRITE UNPROTECT'
1 OPTION 'WRITE PROTECT'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> ZX32 ZXT'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> ZX BRUKNER'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> VOC'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> TZX'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> TRD'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> POLISH SP SPC'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> MUSEUM ZXS'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> LUNTER TAP'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> LTP'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> IRISH SPECEM'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO TAP -> BLK'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO -> ZX RAINBOW'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO -> SPECPIC'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO -> SPECBASE'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO -> SGD'
1 OPTION 'WARAJEVO -> ROMAN & EASY INC'
1 OPTION 'VOC -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'VIDEO'
1 OPTION 'VERIFY'
1 OPTION 'UNMARK ALL'
1 OPTION 'UNHIDE'
1 OPTION 'TZX CONVERSION SETUP'
1 OPTION 'TZX -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'TRD -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'THE LAST WORD -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'TEST'
1 OPTION 'TASSWORD 3 -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'TASSWORD 2 -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'SWAP MARKER'
1 OPTION 'SPEED'
1 OPTION 'SPECPIC -> WARAJEVO'
1 OPTION 'SPECBASE -> WARAJEVO'
1 OPTION 'SP -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'SOUND'
1 OPTION 'SNP -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'SNA 128 -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'SNA -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'SLT -> Z80 + TAP'
1 OPTION 'SIT -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'SGD -> WARAJEVO'
1 OPTION 'SEND TO SPECTRUM'
1 OPTION 'SEND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM'
1 OPTION 'SEM -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'SELECT DIRECTORY'
1 OPTION 'SCREEN'
1 OPTION 'SAMPLE FROM CASSETTE'
1 OPTION 'ROMAN & EASY INC -> WARAJEVO'
1 OPTION 'ROM'
1 OPTION 'ROM TO DCK'
1 OPTION 'REORDER'
1 OPTION 'REGISTERS'
1 OPTION 'RECEIVE FROM SPECTRUM'
1 OPTION 'RECEIVE FROM CASSETTE'
1 OPTION 'PRG -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'POLISH SP SPC -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'PASCAL -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'PARAMETERS'
1 OPTION 'OS SHELL'
1 OPTION 'OPTIMIZE'
1 OPTION 'OLD SP -> Z80'
1 OPTION 'NETWORK'
1 OPTION 'MUSEUM ZXS -> WARAJEVO'
1 OPTION 'MS WINDOWS'
1 OPTION 'MERGE'
1 OPTION 'MEMORY'
1 OPTION 'MACHINE LIGHTNING -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'LUNTER TAP -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'LTP -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'LOGO -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'LINEARIZE'
1 OPTION 'JOYSTICK'
1 OPTION 'IRISH SPECEM -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'INTERFACE 1'
1 OPTION 'INFO'
1 OPTION 'HIDE'
1 OPTION 'HARDWARE'
1 OPTION 'GENS -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'FORTH -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'FORMAT'
1 OPTION 'FILE'
1 OPTION 'EXTRACT'
1 OPTION 'EXIT'
1 OPTION 'EXCLUDE'
1 OPTION 'ENLARGE MDR TO 254 SECTORS'
1 OPTION 'EMULATOR'
1 OPTION 'EFFICIENCY'
1 OPTION 'EDIT'
1 OPTION 'EDIT BLOCK'
1 OPTION 'DIRECTORY'
1 OPTION 'DEFAULT'
1 OPTION 'DECOMPRESS'
1 OPTION 'COPY'
1 OPTION 'COPY TO NEW'
1 OPTION 'CONFIGURE RS232'
1 OPTION 'CONDITIONAL'
1 OPTION 'COMPRESS SELECTED'
1 OPTION 'COMPRESS ALL'
1 OPTION 'COLOR TIFF PICTURE'
1 OPTION 'CHANGE POSITION'
1 OPTION 'CHANGE DIRECTORY'
1 OPTION 'CATALOG'
1 OPTION 'C -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'BLK -> WARAJEVO TAP'
1 OPTION 'BLACK AND WHITE TIFF PICTURE'
1 OPTION 'BINARY TO LROS'
1 OPTION 'BINARY TO AROS'
1 OPTION 'BASIC -> ASCII'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> THE LAST WORD'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> TASSWORD 3'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> TASSWORD 2'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> PASCAL'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> MACHINE LIGHTNING'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> LOGO'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> GENS'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> FORTH'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> C'
1 OPTION 'ASCII -> BASIC'
1 OPTION 'ANY Z80 -> 48K WITHOUT INTERFACE 1'
1 OPTION 'ANY Z80 -> 128K WITHOUT INTERFACE 1'
1 OPTION 'ADVANCED SETUP'
1 OPTION 'ADD BLOCK'
1 OPTION 'ABOUT'
1 Now, we don't think that there exists any software which can not work
1 Note: The A128 command does not restore system variables SFSPACE and
1 Normally, the emulator automatically detects graphic cards. If it is
1 Normally, the ZX Interface 1 is not emulated. If you specify the
1 Normal finish of the program (pressing Shift+F10, Ctrl+F10 or Alt+F4).
1 Nonmascable (NMI) interrupt is implemented only for users who want to
1 Network emulation works fine when only short packages (10-100 bytes)
1 Negated values of constants 'Sync total' and 'First part' respectively
1 Multiples arguments and displays a result as in '?' command.
1 Most probably, this error occurs when loading a 128K snapshot file in
1 Mode SBST is very similar to LPT1 mode, but the loading is performed
1 Microdrive emulation is very fast, typically much faster than on a real
1 Maybe this program is not too interesting in itself, but it is a fact
1 Many programs are encrypted using XOR function. To see it, without
1 Many Z80 instructions have more than one code, for example: IM 0, IM 1,
1 MDR files consists of several number (from 10 to 254) of sectors, where
1 Look the description of previous problem, the switch /I no more exists.
1 Locks up the emulator: Program crashes and even F9 or F10 cannot help.
1 Loads a next block from the tape at the address <word>. If parameter
1 List boxes are used for selecting files names, blocks in TAP files, or
1 Leaves the environment and exits to DOS. The same effect may be done
1 LOAD DB #ED,#FF
1 LNAME DB 'LEVEL0.OVL',0
1 LLEVEL LD IX,49152
1 Keyboard emulation is simple: the emulator installs a new handler for
1 KEYPAD (at Spectrum 128) is a quite complex device, but it is not
1 It is recommended, if loading routine is visible, to change its first
1 It is important to emphasize that the Warajevo emulator uses Lunter's
1 It is a modification of 'Mastercopy 128' written by Vatroslav Sobot
1 Interface 1 ROM paging is also slow, but this is not a great problem
1 Instructions with codes #FC, #FD, #FE and #FF after #ED prefix have no
1 Instructions OUTI, OUTD, OTIR and OTDR don't work as described in a Z80
1 Instructions LDIR, LDDR, INIT etc. always work correctly, even in case
1 Instruction with codes #ED #00 followed by signature '8086' into the
1 Instruction CALL also may be self-modified. Instruction CALL nnnn acts
1 In this menu there are options for selecting and viewing snapshot
1 In this chapter we will sumarize all the function keys which may be
1 In the package, there are these files:
1 In the next field ('Message language') the user may enter the language
1 In the middle of the screen data about the current block on the tape
1 In the fourth field, called 'Category of the program', you can enter
1 In the emulator package there is a driver for emulation of the
1 In the case when game saves (loads) status in more than one block, you
1 In some extremely rare situations (e.g. a Windows Task Switch during
1 In recent time, many emulators consider sequence of bytes #ED #FB or
1 In list boxes, headers are displayed in a way which describes their
1 In earlier releases, we noticed problems with the conversion of the
1 In all four modes of AY emulation, the envelope generator is emulated
1 In addition to that mentioned above, the Timex version of the Warajevo
1 In addition to ordinary data blocks, the Warajevo emulator also
1 In a case of missing argument, the default value is value of the marked
1 In a Z80 manual, influence to some flags with some instructions is
1 In Warajevo emulator every emulated instruction updates counter of T
1 In Warajevo 2.51. emulator flickering is no more frequent problem. Many
1 In April 1994, the foundation Sorosh opened the first electronic mail
1 Important: because we want to be compatible with Lunter's snapshot
1 Implementing Escape sequences unfortunately opens up the possibility
1 If you want, for any reason, to change the directory in which the
1 If you want to mark only one record, the easiest method is to set this
1 If you want to create a new cartridge file, the field 'Sectors' must
1 If you want to contact us, these addresses are not very useful,
1 If you start the environment directly from DOS, it will first check
1 If you selected the algorithm SLOW, the emulator does not trap at the
1 If you select the 'Autostart' option, the current snapshot file will
1 If you select a file with the extension .ZIP (archived file), the
1 If you select a SCR file (Spectrum Image file), the emulator will be
1 If you press the mouse button on the Zoom icon, the window will be
1 If you only have E-MAIL, not FTP access, on the Internet there are
1 If you include the 'Problems' field in the report, problems will be
1 If you have the prefix #DD before an instruction which works with
1 If you have elementary knowledge on machine language, in following text
1 If you have a slow computer on which you cannot achieve the emulator
1 If you execute emulator under Windows in EGA or VGA mode, do not try
1 If you connect a Spectrum 128, +2 or +3 and a PC using the RS232
1 If you cancel compression using the ESC key, the rest of the tape will
1 If you call the environment from the emulator (pressing F10), the
1 If you call the environment from the emulator (by pressing F10), the
1 If you are not familiar with LOAD routines, skip this and the next
1 If this problem occurs during emulation, and you didn't use /?128
1 If the program written in the 80x86 code changes the content of the
1 If the game loads levels from a tape, you must extract levels using the
1 If the first parameter equals 48, A acts like A command in 48 version
1 If the first parameter equals 128, monitor first recovers some vital
1 If the current instruction reads or changes a value in memory, the
1 If the break point is in ROM area, you will see the warning message
1 If the block size is 65535, it is a compressed block. Its structure is
1 If the block size is 65534, it is a block which contains tone record
1 If some program is too slow on EGA/WGA although your computer has
1 If no parameter is given, /U3 is assumed, as in earlier releases of
1 If no /J option is present, this port will return 255 always, with
1 If bytes 9, 10, 11 and 12 into a TAP file are not equal to #FF, this is
1 If an argument is word value (greater than 255), it will be displayed
1 If an argument is byte value, it will be displayed in hexadecimal and
1 However, when we bought AT 286 computers at the end of 1990, we did
1 Hereafter a number of memory blocks follow, each containing the
1 Here we will give two examples. If the game saves or loads status in
1 HOME ROM, or turn Timex HOME ROM into RAM
1 Giving the option /A with a tape file on which no BASIC loader exists
1 Generally, the emulation of the AY chip on the PC beeper is better
1 From the environment the option /E may be set using the 'Interface I'
1 From experience, we discovered that the emulation works considerably
1 Fourth method of AY emulation is similar like third method, but
1 For working under Windows 95, the same remarks as with Windows 3.11.
1 For using a database, a hard disc is vital. If you have a very slow
1 For those who forgot it we give here a short overview of the syntax of
1 For some reason, the monitor log file (MONITOR.OUT) wasn't opened
1 For some reason, the loading of the snapshot file using command /R
1 For some reason, the loading of the environment when pressing F10
1 For some reason, the loading of DCK file using command /E failed. Most
1 For some reason, loading of the cartridge file using command /# failed.
1 For some reason, creating or opening the interface file for network
1 For some reason the name after the option /T is incorrect. Most
1 For example, for listing of texts in adventures written in 'The quill'
1 For Timex Sinclair 2068 computers, the ZX Interface 1 officially does
1 First you must select an ASCII file which contains a BASIC program in
1 Finally, you can see the memory bytes around register values. The
1 Fills a memory block from address <word1> to <word2> (including
1 FLASH is implemented as normal (on CGA it is shown as inverse
1 FLASH exists on all cards, except on CGA, on which FLASH will be
1 F command without parameters, searches for a next occurrence of already
1 Extended graphic modes on the Timex version of the emulator are
1 Executes current instruction. If you give the parameter <word>, the
1 Excluded blocks can be removed using the 'Linearize' option (see
1 Except these two instructions, we also support two instructions with
1 Except the conversion 'LUNTER TAP -> WARAJEVO TAP', all conversions
1 Every record in the database contains a 'Sort marker' field. If this
1 Every port with address bit A2=0 acts on the printer (usually 251). We
1 Every port with address bit A0=0 acts on ULA chip (usually port 254).
1 Every port with A5=0 acts to the joystick while reading (usually 31),
1 Every port with A3=0 or A4=0 acts to the Interface 1 (typically ports
1 Every port with A1=0 and A15=1 acts to AY sound chip (and RS232, KEYPAD
1 Every port with A1=0 and A15=0 (usually 32765) acts to the memory
1 Every port with A1=0 acts to the Spectrum 128 peripherals (AY sound
1 Every port which does not affect any peripheral device, for example
1 Every block on a tape file, except headers, can be compressed. The
1 Even in protected programs, lead-in tone and sync bit are usually
1 Escape sequences described in chapter 5.2. works into compiled programs
1 Entering and changing 'Tape name' is similar, but here pressing
1 Emulation of attributes using shades sometimes results in unreadable
1 Earlier releases of the emulator have extensive descriptions in the
1 ENTERING AND CHANGING RECORDS
1 During loading, pressing keys S, N, 1, 2 and ESC you can switch the
1 During conversions, all fields particular to the source database
1 Dumps screen on Epson or IBM compatible printer. The first parameter
1 Dump is smart in meaning that every set pixel which have ink color same
1 Do not use U/I addresses which are in any way covered with some other
1 Divides arguments and displays a remainder of division as in '?'
1 Divides arguments and displays a integer part of a result as in '?'
1 Displays original contents of video memory (either standard or
1 Displays disassembled listing of the program in a form:
1 Displays content of the memory in hexadecimal and ASCII code form.
1 Disassembling of RST instructions is smart: the monitor knows that
1 Dialogs are special forms of windows. When you work with a dialog, you
1 Data blocks (headerless) in the emulator can be compressed and
1 DIALOG FOR EXPLAINING OF PROBLEMS
1 DIALOG FOR DATA BASE BROWSING
1 DESCRIPTION AND MEANING OF THE FIELDS
1 DCK files keeps information about memory content of various Timex
1 DCK file contains the bank number which is not implemented. At this
1 Copies a <word3> bytes from address <word1> to address <word2>. Copying
1 Conversion of Timex 2068 snapshot files is not implemented yet (it is
1 Constants 'Leader const 1' and 'Leader const 2' determine allowed
1 Connect the cable like this (if you can find a Sinclair connector):
1 Compiled program does not support emulation of tape system. However,
1 Communications using RS232 is very risky and dangerous if you started
1 Command parameters which start with /& affect only the environment,
1 Command Y without parameters restores memory banks to be like when you
1 Clicking the mouse on the resize corner of the window will start
1 Clicking the mouse button on the top and bottom arrows moves the
1 Clicking the mouse button on the left and right arrows moves the
1 Clicking the mouse button on the close icon will close the window. The
1 Clicking on the top frame line changes the frame shape, and while you
1 Changing the emulator speed has the following drawbacks:
1 Changing only the actual sector data will always the preserve correct
1 Changes configuration of the memory on Timex computer. It is worth to
1 Changes active memory banks on 128 version of the emulator. Parameters
1 Changes a value of a marked register to <word>. If this parameter is
1 Cartridge files may have anything from 9 to 254 sectors, so acceptable
1 Cancels the selection of active DCK file.
1 Cancels the previous option.
1 Cancels selection of the active tape file.
1 Calling the emulator from the environment (also done by pressing F10)
1 CONTENTS
1 By default, the 128 and Timex versions of the emulator emulate
1 Brief description of implementation of the ZX printer emulation: When
1 Border on Hercules, CGA and EGA Mono cards is realized as a thin frame
1 Blocks from the active TAP file and the active snapshot file will be
1 Between April 1995 and December 1997 we received E-MAIL messages
1 Besides transferring using the RS232 interface, it is possible to
1 Besides the file name, this option may also set 3 parameters which
1 Besides the described radio buttons, the dialog for this conversion
1 Avoid task switching using Alt+Tab when you are in the emulator,
1 Attributes on CGA, Hercules and EGA Mono are emulated with shading. VGA
1 At the moment, this is the only option in this menu. It enlarges the
1 At the beginning of the file there are four bytes which contain the
1 As you seen earlier (chapter 3.2.4.) it is possible to modify 7 time
1 As you see, KEYPAD protocol is very complex, and ROM routine which
1 As you know, one of the advantages of our emulator is clean sound (but
1 As you can see, if you call the environment from the emulator, and if
1 As we mentioned earlier, the emulator also supports blocks which
1 As command options you can use the options /!, /%, /J, /M, /Q, /S, /U
1 Arguments may be numerics or strings. Numerical arguments may be
1 Any opening of the output file will cause sending content of the front
1 Any entrance to the monitor will clear the break point, and the
1 And lastly, one important thing. If you have an extremely slow
1 An invalid command option was given (directly, or in the file
1 Although the option 'Run' is before this option in the menu, the
1 Also, it is possible to make some modifications to the snapshot files,
1 Also, conversions to and from the TZX format (recently a very popular
1 Also, by keeping the older versions, you can solve the problem that
1 All these parameters may be set from the environment using the
1 All these features (except loading from samples) work equally as well
1 All suboptions in the dialog for this option will be described
1 All sampling will be performed at 44100 Hz. For more information about
1 All routines for the ZX printer which use standard protocol (reading
1 All of these parameters are rarely used as command parameters.
1 All blocks from the active Warajevo tape will be extracted and saved
1 Algorithm LPT1 does not use emulated tapes. Instead, loading (and
1 After you press 'OK', select the name of the output file in the usual
1 After you have selected the devices, you have these options:
1 After you have entered or modified the record, use 'OK' to accept
1 After you enter the environment, on the topmost line of the
1 After you create the database, you can use it. Of course, you can
1 After you choose the desired drive, directory, tape and position of
1 After using 'Edit' or 'Append', a large dialog for entering or
1 After the header, a pure image of each presented chunk is stored in DCK
1 After the first byte, following eight bytes corresponds to eight 8K
1 After the conversion, tape imploding is highly recommended, because
1 After switching to 80x86 mode, the AL, CX, DX and DI registers will
1 After selecting this option, you will see a dialog which allows you to
1 After running this option, a big dialog appears in which the most
1 After activating the 'Start' button, a file selection dialog will
1 Adds arguments and displays a result as in '?' command.
1 Adds a standalone file from the disc and makes it a new block on the
1 Acts like /SA, but provides compatibility with very old sound cards
1 About working on Windows NT, the working is possible only into full
1 ABORT command in 128 version of emulator is quite complex. The first
1 A new feature in Warajevo 2.5. is the much better emulation of the
1 A compiled program may be started with the command options /%, /J, /S
1 ===================================================================
1 ====================================================
1 =================================================
1 ==============================================
1 ============================================
1 =======================================
1 =====================================
1 ===================================
1 ==================================
1 ===============================
1 ============================
1 ==========================
1 =====================
1 ====================
1 ===================
1 =============
1 ============
1 ===========
1 ========
1 =======
1 128 version of the emulator starting from release 2.5. emulates AY
1 --------------------------------------------
1 -------------------------------------------
1 ----------------------------------------
1 ----------------------------------
1 ---------------------
1 ------------
1 'Sort marker' (not displayed in the database browser) may have only
1 'Seek' allows fast seeking to any desired record. After activating
1 'Problems' (also not displayed in the data base browser) describes
1 'Edit' is used for editing the current record, and the button 'Append'
1 'Delete' deletes the current record from the database. If the database
1 'Close' simply closes the dialog used for browsing the data base (like
1 'Backspace' chooses whether the emulator pauses after every loaded
1 taken from address 24576
1 data are taken from address 16384, and odd columns of video data are
1 at address 24576;
1 The options /@ and /@@ are introduced for internal purposes, but
1 The database is not sorted psychically, but manipulates pointers which
1 Simply use AUTO or SLOW tape emulation algorithm (FAST may fail
1 (like on ordinary Spectrum);
1 the SPACE key.
1 press the SPACE key.
1 pointer.
1 memory.
1 default value is 24.
1 counter.
1 V Bottom arrow
1 SignsOK:=true
1 SignsOK:=false;
1 Receive(Byte);
1 PutIntoMemory(Address,Byte);
1 Option 'Video'
1 Option 'Test'
1 Option 'Speed'
1 Option 'Sound'
1 Option 'ROM'
1 Option 'Printer'
1 Option 'OS Shell'
1 Option 'Network'
1 Option 'MS Windows'
1 Option 'Joystick'
1 Option 'Interface 1'
1 Option 'Exit'
1 Option 'Emulator'
1 Option 'Directory'
1 Option 'Change directory'
1 Option 'About'
1 Modem_DTR(0);
1 Inc(Address);
1 DisplayOK
1 Dec(Counter)
1 CheckSum:=CheckSum+Byte;
1 which are always 0 in this emulator. As this emulator don't emulate
1 when changing of the control register occur or when occur such
1 the cartridge file after the GAP which is emulated between sectors
1 simultaneously present in the address space.
1 sending will be redirected to network instead to RS232. For more
1 sending to LPT1 when whole byte is received. Other bits are ignored,
1 like on real Interface 1. If D0=0 in the Interface Control register,
1 into routine for emulating status register, or when occur such
1 emulated RS232 output by buffering 8 bits after a start bit, and by
1 chunk belongs to HOME bank, and when a bit is set, linked chunk
1 bits D6-D7: usable in various independent peripherals
1 bits D5-D7: not used, probably always 1 (not confirmed)
1 bits D5-D7: masks for reading bits D5-D7 (see text below)
1 bits D5-D7: last values sent to these bits
1 bits D5-D7: always one
1 bits D5-D7: always 0, as on real Kempston interface
1 bits D5,D7: always 1, as on real Spectrum
1 bits D4-D7: Always 1 (somebody tells that D4 has some meaning, and
1 bits D3-D5: Selection of ink and paper color in extended screen
1 bits D1-D5: always 1
1 bit D7: styli on/off
1 bit D7: out of paper
1 bit D7: Selection of alternate memory bank which will be
1 bit D6: tape input bit, random value which solves problems with
1 bit D6: printer present
1 bit D6: D6=1 forbid generation of the timer interrupt
1 bit D5: D5=0 enables access to 16 MB bus expansion unit which
1 bit D5: 48K lock bit (1 = MMU is locked)
1 bit D4: toggle speaker for making BEEP
1 bit D4: status of joystick fire button (1=pressed)
1 bit D4: select active ROM (0 = Derby, 1 = Standard)
1 bit D4: WAIT bit; D4=0 performs necessary synchronization before
1 bit D4: 0 = printer ready, 1 = printer not ready
1 bit D3: tape output bit (works only in LPT1 mode)
1 bit D3: select active video page (0 = normal, 1 = alternative)
1 bit D3: must be 0 for correct working in the emulator (exact
1 bit D3: RS232 output bit (implemented as on ZX Interface 1)
1 bit D3: RS232 DTR bit (e.g. printer is ready)
1 bit D3: ERASE bit; D3=0 means cartridge erasing is activated,
1 bit D2: not used, probably always 1 (not confirmed)
1 bit D2: motor on/off
1 bit D2: joystick moving to down
1 bit D2: When D2=0, main video data and attributes are used as
1 bit D2: R/W' bit; 0 = writing to the microdrive, 1 = reading
1 bit D2: CTS and MIDI output signal (CTS is not implemented,
1 bit D2: 1 means a space without any data on it (called GAP) is
1 bit D1: joystick moving to left
1 bit D1: When D1=0, color attributes are 8x8 pixels in size, they
1 bit D1: Sync bit which will be zero when end of lead-in signal
1 bit D1: COMMS CLK bit; every transition 1->0 cause copying old
1 bit D1: 0 = printer present, 1 = printer not present
1 bit D1,D4: have no meaning
1 belongs to one of alternative banks (DOCK or EXROM, depending of bit
1 address bytes mnemonic
1 ZX Interface 1 are always 1, and bits D5 and D6 have random values,
1 Submenu 'ZX32 <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'Z80 (48K) <-> Z80 (128K)'
1 Submenu 'X128 <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'VgaSpec <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'Spectrum 2.00 <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'SpecEmu G <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'Spanish Spectrum -> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'SP UKV <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'SCREEN$ -> Tiff'
1 Submenu 'RS232'
1 Submenu 'Print'
1 Submenu 'Other emulators'
1 Submenu 'Nuclear ZX <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'JPP <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'Irish SpecEm <-> Warajevo'
1 Submenu 'Compress'
1 Submenu 'Cassette'
1 Submenu 'ASCII <-> The Last Word'
1 Submenu 'ASCII <-> Tassword'
1 Submenu 'ASCII <-> Machine Lightning'
1 Submenu 'ASCII <-> Logo'
1 Submenu 'ASCII <-> Hisoft'
1 Submenu 'ASCII <-> Forth'
1 Submenu 'ASCII <-> Basic'
1 Spectrum 128.
1 RS232 input, IN from this port will always return 30 or 31. For more
1 Option 'ZX Rainbow -> Warajevo'
1 Option 'Z80 snapshot -> TAP'
1 Option 'Write unprotect'
1 Option 'Write protect'
1 Option 'Warajevo -> ZX Rainbow'
1 Option 'Warajevo -> SpecPic'
1 Option 'Warajevo -> SpecBase'
1 Option 'Warajevo -> SGD'
1 Option 'Verify'
1 Option 'Unmark all'
1 Option 'Unhide'
1 Option 'Swap marker'
1 Option 'SpecPic -> Warajevo'
1 Option 'SpecBase -> Warajevo'
1 Option 'Select directory'
1 Option 'SGD -> Warajevo'
1 Option 'Reorder'
1 Option 'Registers'
1 Option 'ROM to DCK'
1 Option 'Parameters'
1 Option 'Optimize'
1 Option 'Merge'
1 Option 'Memory'
1 Option 'Info'
1 Option 'Hide'
1 Option 'Hardware'
1 Option 'Format'
1 Option 'Extract'
1 Option 'Exclude'
1 Option 'Enlarge MDR to 254 sectors'
1 Option 'Efficiency'
1 Option 'Edit'
1 Option 'Edit block'
1 Option 'Default'
1 Option 'Decompress'
1 Option 'Copy'
1 Option 'Copy to New'
1 Option 'Conditional'
1 Option 'Change position'
1 Option 'Catalog'
1 Option 'Binary to LROS'
1 Option 'Binary to AROS'
1 Option 'Add block'
1 OUT (C),E ; Activate bank 1 and put byte into it
1 OR C
1 LD HL,49152 ; Base address of memory banks
1 LD DE,4113 ; D = 16 (bank 0), E = 17 (bank 1)
1 LD BC,32765 ; MMU port
1 LD BC,16384 ; Bank length
1 LD A,B
1 LD A,(HL)
1 LD (HL),A
1 JR NZ,LOOP
1 INC HL ; Increase pointer
1 Entering and changing records
1 Dialog for explaining of problems
1 Dialog for data base browsing
1 Description and meaning of the fields
1 DEC BC ; Repeat until whole bank is copied
1 D7 in port 255). Notice that DOCK and EXROM chunks never can be
1 D1 to addresses 8192-16383 and so on). When a bit is reset, linked
1 64-Kbyte Z80 address space (bit D0 corresponds to addresses 0-8191,
1 XOR #03
1 XOR AL,OLDBANK ; bank is active, and finish if bank
1 XCHG AL,[SI]
1 TEST AL,1
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> ZX32'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> ZX Museum'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> ZX Garabik'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> ZX Brukner'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> TZX'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> Spectrum 2.00'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> Spectrum + TRDOS'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> Roman & Easy'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> Polish SP'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> Lunter Z80'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> JPP'
1 Submenu 'Warajevo <-> Irish SpecEm'
1 STOSB
1 SCF
1 RL L
1 RETF 2
1 RET Z
1 RET NZ
1 RET NZ
1 RET NC ; This instruction may be omitted or changed!
1 RET NC
1 RET NC
1 RET
1 PUSH HL
1 Option 'ZXS RIFF -> Z80'
1 Option 'Z80 -> ZXS RIFF'
1 Option 'Z80 -> SP'
1 Option 'Z80 -> SNP'
1 Option 'Z80 -> SNA'
1 Option 'Z80 -> SNA 128'
1 Option 'Z80 -> SIT'
1 Option 'Z80 -> SEM'
1 Option 'Z80 -> PRG'
1 Option 'Z80 -> Old SP'
1 Option 'Z80 + SLT -> Z80'
1 Option 'The Last Word -> ASCII'
1 Option 'Tassword 3 -> ASCII'
1 Option 'Tassword 2 -> ASCII'
1 Option 'Send to Spectrum'
1 Option 'Send communication program'
1 Option 'Screen'
1 Option 'Sample from cassette'
1 Option 'SP -> Z80'
1 Option 'SNP -> Z80'
1 Option 'SNA 128 -> Z80'
1 Option 'SNA -> Z80'
1 Option 'SLT -> Z80 + TAP'
1 Option 'SIT -> Z80'
1 Option 'SEM -> Z80'
1 Option 'Receive from cassette'
1 Option 'Receive from Spectrum'
1 Option 'Printer'
1 Option 'Pascal -> ASCII'
1 Option 'PRG -> Z80'
1 Option 'Old SP -> Z80'
1 Option 'Machine Lightning -> ASCII'
1 Option 'Logo -> ASCII'
1 Option 'Linearize'
1 Option 'Gens -> ASCII'
1 Option 'Forth -> ASCII'
1 Option 'File'
1 Option 'Configure RS232'
1 Option 'Compress selected'
1 Option 'Compress all'
1 Option 'Color TIFF picture'
1 Option 'C -> ASCII'
1 Option 'Black and white TIFF picture'
1 Option 'Basic -> ASCII'
1 Option 'Any Z80 -> 48K without interface 1'
1 Option 'Any Z80 -> 128K without interface 1'
1 Option 'Advanced setup'
1 Option 'ASCII -> The Last Word'
1 Option 'ASCII -> Tassword 3'
1 Option 'ASCII -> Tassword 2'
1 Option 'ASCII -> Pascal'
1 Option 'ASCII -> Machine Lightning'
1 Option 'ASCII -> Logo'
1 Option 'ASCII -> Gens'
1 Option 'ASCII -> Forth'
1 Option 'ASCII -> C'
1 Option 'ASCII -> Basic'
1 ORG 40000
1 OR L
1 OR E
1 OR #08
1 OR #02
1 MOV SI,32768 ; Load SI with address of upper 32K RAM
1 MOV OLDBANK,AH ; is not changed
1 MOV ES,AX
1 MOV CX,SI ; Length of bank is the same value
1 MOV AX,SEG ALTBANK ; segment address of alternate bank
1 LOOP EXC
1 LEA DI,ALTBANK ; Load DI with offset and ES with
1 LD HL,SA_LD_RET ; This is #053F in original routine
1 LD HL,#0415
1 LD H,A
1 LD H,#00
1 LD C,A
1 LD B,#B2 <<<
1 LD A,D
1 LD A,C
1 LD A,B
1 LD A,#CB <<<
1 LD A,#C6 <<<
1 LD A,#7F
1 LD A,#0F
1 LD (IX+#00),L
1 LD DE,NAME ; This will load DX with address of
1 LD A,(16384)
1 LD (16384),A
1 JZ OUTOK
1 JZ DONE
1 JR Z,LD_SAMPLE
1 JR NZ,LD_WAIT
1 JR NZ,LD_LOOP
1 JR NZ,LD_LEADER
1 JR NZ,LD_FLAG
1 JR NZ,LD_DELAY
1 JR NC,LD_VERIFY
1 JR NC,LD_SYNC
1 JR NC,LD_START
1 JR NC,LD_BREAK
1 JR NC,LD_BREAK
1 JR NC,LD_BREAK
1 JR NC,LD_BREAK
1 JR LD_NEXT
1 JR LD_MARKER
1 JR LD_DEC
1 JR SAVE ; label NAME
1 JP NC,LD_8_BITS
1 IRET ; Exit if the address is not recognized
1 INC D
1 INC H
1 INC DE
1 INC SI
1 IN A,(254)
1 EX AF,AF'
1 EX AF,AF'
1 EX AF,AF'
1 DEFM '8086'
1 DEFB #CD,#FA ; Return to Z80 assembler (INT 250)
1 DEFB #BA,#00,#40 ; MOV DX,16384 (Save block)
1 DEFB #B9,#00,#1B ; MOV CX,6912
1 DEFB #B4,#40 ; MOV AH,40H
1 DEFB #B4,#3E ; MOV AH,3EH (Close file)
1 DEFB #B4,#3C ; MOV AH,3CH
1 DEFB #89,#C3 ; MOV BX,AX
1 DEFB #33,#C9 ; XOR CX,CX (Open file)
1 DEC D
1 DEC HL
1 DEC D
1 DB 'USER' ; Signature
1 CPL
1 CP B
1 CP B
1 CP A
1 CP #D4 <<<
1 CP #01
1 CALL LD_EDGE_2
1 CALL LD_EDGE_2
1 CALL LD_EDGE_1
1 CALL LD_EDGE_1
1 AND A
1 AND 32
1 AND #07
1 file, 1 = memory image is present in DCK file
1 Spectrum 128 PC COM port 24 pins
1 Right of pointer
1 Right arrow
1 Pointer
1 Option 'ZX32 ZXT -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'ZX Brukner -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> ZX32 ZXT'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> ZX Brukner'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> VOC'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> TZX'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> TRD'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> Polish SP SPC'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> Museum ZXS'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> Lunter TAP'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> LTP'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> Irish SpecEm'
1 Option 'Warajevo TAP -> BLK'
1 Option 'Warajevo -> Roman & Easy inc'
1 Option 'VOC -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'TZX conversion setup'
1 Option 'TZX -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'TRD -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'Roman & Easy inc -> Warajevo'
1 Option 'Polish SP SPC -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'Museum ZXS -> Warajevo'
1 Option 'Lunter TAP -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'LTP -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'Irish SpecEm -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Option 'BLK -> Warajevo TAP'
1 Left of pointer
1 Left arrow
1 the environment
1 programs to the PC
1 lead-in : sync : bit : bit :
1 in same file)
1 how users can make external drivers for emulator expansion)
1 files for easier working on Windows 95
1 base, created by utility MAKEREG
1 LD DE,16384
1 LD (LNAME+5),A
1 DB #ED,#FF
1 ADD A,'0'
1 :..
1 : Line 4
1 : Line 3
1 : Line 2
1 : Line 1
1 : V
1 .........................
1 with initial sequence (during this, bit D0=1 means waiting for
1 stops any following scanning;
1 signal : bit : 1 : 0 :
1 reset, and then ROW23 acts as waiting counter);
1 nearest integer
1 version; on Timex version contains last OUT to port 255
1 to port 245 (Timex version)
1 snapshot file.
1 option you can save the snapshot file from the emulator with
1 of the video system.
1 in Turbo Pascal).
1 in MS Windows).
1 file is changed)
1 environment. If the environment is in graphic mode, double
1 environment is called from the emulator, returning to the
1 emulator will perform a system reset, e.g. the running of a
1 effect.
1 contains last OUT to port 244
1 clicking the mouse on the 'Screen' window has the same
1 arbitrary name (combination F10 + F7).
1 allowed for the current window).
1 active tape file.
1 Interface 1, 3 = Spectrum 128K, 4 = Spectrum 128K with ZX
1 Interface 1, 128 = Timex Sinclair 2068
1 Horizontal scrollbar
1 Highlighted items may be selected using the mouse or TAB /
1 CTRL + TAB.
1 6
1 5
1 4
1 3
1 2.0 of Lunter's 'Z80' emulator)
1 2
1 1
1 'pure' emulator.
1 register)
1 Horizontal scrollbar
1 /SB)
1 to 256 and from 1200 to 1300.
1 through the command line or data in the configuration
1 this cartridge file will be activated after entering the
1 the environment. Starting is performed through the 'Start'
1 the database. If the database contains a record with this
1 some environment command determined by <code> will be
1 snapshot file will be activated after entering the
1 short name, after entering the environment it will
1 setting parameters related to video emulation). This is
1 see the chapters about using the database, especially
1 regardless of the content of the variable WARAJEVO in the
1 program using data from the database. For more details,
1 priority in relation to other parameters (more precisely,
1 of DEFAULT.CFG. Principally, WARAJEVO /C will load the
1 must specify the extension.
1 microdrives 1, 2 etc.
1 implemented for internal purposes. The table of command
1 for yourself if you want to hack. Legal codes are from 100
1 file).
1 file will be activated after entering the environment. You
1 file SPECSIM.CFG for reading initial configuration instead
1 extension .MDR as the parameter (for example, WRITER.MDR)
1 executed (for example, /C1236 will open the dialog for
1 environment. You must specify the extension. As the
1 environment. You must specify the extension.
1 emulator in exactly same state as when you last left it.
1 document it. By experimenting you can discover these codes
1 data from the database is 'more powerful' than data given
1 codes needs too much space to show, so we will not
1 chapter 3.6.2. The parameter <short_name> has absolute
1 card, the environment will be started in graphic mode,
1 button, so the given file may be any Spectrum file (Z80,
1 automatically call the emulator and load and run the
1 TAP, SNA, TZX etc.).
1 Spectrum allows up to 8 microdrives, you can specify up to
1 DOS environment.
1 <any_Spec_file> will be immediately started after entering
1 8 cartridge files, which will be assigned respectively to
1 .Z80 as the parameter (for example, INVADERS.Z80) this
1 .TAP as the parameter (for example, ARCADE.TAP) this tape
1 program
1 V
1 Bits D6-D7: not used
1 Bits D1-D3: border color
1 Bit D5: always 1 (e.g. blocks are always compressed)
1 Bit D4: always 0
1 Bit D1: Always 1 (e.g. always full LDIR emulation)
1 Bit D0: Always 1 (e.g. active R register emulation)
1 you retain D3=0 for a long time (with active motor)
1 without any writing to cartridge, complete content of
1 will be inserted values which normally would be color
1 which every bit equals zero means that motor assigned to
1 video memory (address 22528 like on ordinary Spectrum if
1 value of COMMS DATA bit into MOTOR shift register, in
1 up ROM routines, except when sector is not formatted)
1 this bit works
1 these bits may be used in various independent
1 the cartridge will be erased
1 tape block contains samples of tone record or during
1 some programs that requires exactly 'Issue 2' or
1 serial receiving of one byte from the network
1 sense only with D1=1, when odd columns will be inserted
1 seems to never have been released (not implemented)
1 screen) is located in block at address 16384 (like on
1 routines from ZX Interface 1 ROM
1 resolution mode (000=black/white, 001=blue/yellow,
1 peripherals
1 ordinary Spectrum), else it is located in block at
1 one 8x8 attribute)
1 occupies 768 bytes, and they are located just after main
1 meaning is not known to us)
1 loading from real tape (modes LPT1 and SBST); in that
1 is detected (emulated as always zero to remarkable speed
1 inserted before every header and data block to satisfy
1 in according to the counter of T states (see chapter
1 from block at address 24576); color attributes does not
1 exist when D2=1 (then only two colors exist: unique ink
1 every 8x1 attribute is multiplicated eight times to make
1 detected; the emulator treats as GAP every sector with
1 described above; D2=1 activates extended resolution of
1 columns (0, 2, 4...), and in odd columns (1, 3, 5...)
1 color and unique paper color)
1 cases, value of bit D6 will be read from emulated tape
1 calls it BUSY, but its meaning is unknown to us, and
1 byte will be sent to Sound Blaster MIDI output register)
1 bits are ignored when D2=0
1 bad header checksum; some artificial GAP will be
1 attributes data, determined by D1 (this usually has
1 are located at address 24576 (more precise, when D1=0,
1 are 8x1 pixels in size, occupies 6144 bytes, and they
1 and this is used for creating GAPs between sectors; if
1 address determined by D0) will be inserted in even
1 address 24576
1 active
1 activated using horizontal MMU register (0 = DOCK,
1 RS232; this bit is used also for indirect writing into
1 RS232 output on ZX Interface 1, except that collected
1 ROM routines don't use it)
1 MIDI output is implemented using analogous method like
1 MICRODRIVE MOTOR register
1 D6 - if D6=0, register R14 is input port, else it is
1 D5 - if D5=0, channel C produce noise (not implemented
1 D4 - if D4=0, channel B produce noise (not implemented
1 D3 - if D3=0, channel A produce noise (not implemented
1 D3 - CONTINUE bit
1 D2 - if D2=0, channel C produce tone
1 D2 - ATTACK bit
1 D1 - if D1=0, channel B produce tone
1 D1 - ALTERNATE bit
1 D0=0, or 30720 when D0=1); when D1=1, color attributes
1 D0 - if D0=0, channel A produce tone
1 D0 - HOLD bit
1 Close icon
1 7.4.) and sampling frequency, or from real tape
1 512x192 pixels (64x24 text), where main video data (from
1 101=cyan/red, 110=yellow/blue, 111=white/black); these
1 1 = EXROM)
1 010=red/cyan, 011=magenta/green, 100=green/magenta,
1 'Issue 3' release of the Spectrum, except when current
1 various particularities during loading from TZX files
1 using other criteria (e.g. using the type of the
1 the current database for use in the environment.
1 snapshot file). Typically, this parameter makes sense
1 only as a parameter in the DEFAULT.CFG configuration
1 file.
1 environment (/&S1 - 110 Bd, &&S2 - 150 Bd, /&S3 - 300
1 communication in the environment (/&C1 - COM1,
1 chapter 3.6.4.).
1 Bd, /&S4 - 600 Bd, /&S5 -1200 Bd, /&S6 -2400 Bd, /&S7
1 128K or Timex emulator (/&E0 - 48K, /&E1 - 128K,
1 /&E2 - Timex) in cases when it cannot be determined
1 /&C2 - COM2). Default is COM2.
1 - 4800 Bd, /&S8 - 9600 Bd). Default is 9600 Bd.
1 (see chapter 3.2.5, option 'TZX conversion setup').
1 with blanks)
1 with blanks
1 unallocated sector has RECLEN=0 with clear EOF bit,
1 sector lays in this sector (counting starts from 0)
1 if RECLEN<512) by modulo 255
1 bytes) by modulo 255
1 block is not a EOF block, RECLEN must be 512;
1 bits are not used
1 and a bad sector has also RECLEN=0 with set EOF bit
1 14 bytes)
1 output port
1 which have fourth byte #FD
1 value of the program counter (e.g. exit monitor
1 value of the memory pointer, in pages of 14
1 value of the memory pointer, and increments the
1 value of the memory pointer, and displays the
1 value of the memory pointer
1 value of memory pointer
1 value 25; the memory pointer will be incremented
1 unusual using of '?')
1 to address #FC38
1 there, skips two bytes, and finally, puts string
1 then leave monitor
1 the memory pointer; the memory pointer will be
1 the memory pointer
1 screen lines
1 result
1 register, then put string 'ZX' there
1 register, in 15 screen lines long pages
1 register
1 real ZX Spectrum 128, but in this emulator it is
1 program counter reaches 40000
1 possible, but only using Y command in the monitor
1 pointer
1 of the memory pointer
1 monitor)
1 monitor
1 memory)
1 memory pointer, skips one byte, and finally, puts
1 memory pointer by 22
1 memory
1 marked register, and 44200 at current value of
1 marked register and #FFAA, then displays result
1 many forms, depending of its value
1 management unit (e.g. acts nearly like a SPECTRUM
1 leave monitor
1 is silly usage of parameters, but it is possible)
1 is not a wildcard in W command) and 400 at
1 internal coding of '?')
1 incremented by 8
1 if you not change registers during working in the
1 have value 24231
1 from address 0 to value of current marked
1 frame around the picture
1 forms, depending of its value
1 displays the result (which is 5868)
1 displays the result (which is 1152)
1 currently marked register (usually PC)
1 currently marked register
1 current value of the memory pointer
1 counter
1 command in '128 Basic')
1 clears video memory)
1 bytes 5, 3 and 200 at address 40000, 40001 and
1 by four
1 bank in address space 8K-64K
1 bank in address space 16K-64K
1 as a headerless file
1 and HOME bank in address space 8K-56K
1 alternative video page
1 also be displayed
1 Spectrum ROM
1 ROM
1 LD_BYTES has address 1366)
1 CLEAR 30000: NEW in the presence of the Spectrum
1 CLEAR 30000: NEW
1 CLEAR 24999: NEW
1 Bits D3-D7: Not used (always 0)
1 Bit D2: Clear if block belongs to file
1 Bit D1: EOF bit, set if this sector is the
1 Bit D0: Always 0, to mark data block
1 ASCII codes and BASIC tokens in this area will
1 50000
1 43200 to address 43500
1 40002; memory pointer now have value 40003
1 40000 to 50000, in pages of 10 screen lines
1 30 and 25, third byte is not significant, and
1 23755 (beginning of BASIC area) to address 25000;
1 1000 to 2000
1 0, use standard video page, and then lock memory
1 (instruction CALL has code 205, and routine
1 (1000=232+256*3)
1 'Sinclair' at address 24223; memory pointer now
1 #C000
1 "#000F 15")
1 will be loaded regardless of its actual length
1 length in register DE. If DE=0, the whole block
1 length in register DE on the disc with filename
1 <filename>.
1 <filename> at address in register IX, with
1 (this is a new feature of release 2.51.).
1 without variables, and the variables
1 the name TELEPHONE. The array name is a$().
1 on the disc.
1 of the block is 64993 bytes, but after
1 occupy no additional space. There is no
1 occupy an additional 30 bytes. The start
1 name ACCOUNT. The array name is a(). It's
1 line of the program is 10.
1 length is 5000 bytes.
1 length is 3121 bytes.
1 is 180 bytes without variables, and variables
1 from the tape EAR socket. The logical length
1 flag byte 255.
1 compression, this block occupies only 5807
1 bytes on the disc.
1 autostart.
1 PENETRATOR. It has a length of 1200 bytes
1 MEMORY. The start address is 32000, and its
1 It's length is 12123 bytes.
1 2048 bytes, but it occupies only 510 bytes
1 on this address
1 last sector assigned to some file
1 first header (TS - Timex)
1 first header (48, 128)
1 created using PRINT#
1
1
1
1